NR-L3-SIG-10064 ISSUE 7 - AkA C001 For Clearance PDF

Ref: NRIL3ISIGI10064
Issue: 7
Date: 01 September 2018
Compliance date: 01 December 2018
Level 3
Work Instruction
General Instructions to Staff Working on S&T
tquipment
Approvals
Content Approved by:
Pardip Basran,
Technical Lead
Content approved by:
Jerry Morling,
Standard and Control Document Owner
Approved for publication by:
Mick McManus,
Standards and Controls Management Team
This document is the property of Network Rail. It shall not be reproduced in whole or part nor disclosed to a third
party without the written permission of Network Rail.
O Copyright 2018 Network Rail.
Uncontrolled copy once printed from its electronic source.
Published and Issued by Network Rail, 2nd Floor, One Eversholt Street, London, NW1 2DN.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Net workRail
Copyright Network Rail

Provided by IHS Markit under license with Network Rail Licensee=Capita Symonds to Capita property & infrastructur/5965831001, User=Bong
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/19/2018 05:07:35 MDT
Ref: NR/L3/SIG/10064
Issue: 7
User information
This Network Rail document contains colour-coding according to the following
Red–Amber–Green classification.
Red requirements – no variations permitted

• Red requirements are to be complied with and achieved at all times.
• Red requirements are presented in a red box.
• Red requirements are monitored for compliance.
• Non-compliances will be investigated and corrective actions enforced.
Amber requirements – variations permitted subject to approved risk analysis

and mitigation
• Amber requirements are to be complied with unless an approved variation is in
place.
• Amber requirements are presented with an amber sidebar.
• Amber requirements are monitored for compliance.
• Variations can only be approved through the national variations process.
• Non-approved variations will be investigated and corrective actions enforced.
Green guidance – to be used unless alternative solutions are followed
• Guidance should be followed unless an alternative solution produces a better
result.
• Guidance is presented with a dotted green sidebar.
• Guidance is not monitored for compliance.
• Alternative solutions should be documented to demonstrate effective control.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Page 2 of 10

Issue: 7
Compliance
This Network Rail standard/control document is mandatory and shall be complied
with by Network Rail Infrastructure Limited and its contractors if applicable from 1st
December 2018.
Where it is considered not reasonably practicable1 to comply with the requirements in
this standard/control document, permission to comply with a specified alternative
should be sought in accordance with the Network Rail standards and controls
process, or with the Railway Group Standards Code if applicable.
If this standard/control document contains requirements that are designed to
demonstrate compliance with legislation they shall be complied with irrespective of a
project’s Governance for Railway Investment Projects (GRIP) stage. In all other
circumstances, projects that have formally completed GRIP Stage 3 (Option
Selection) may continue to comply with any relevant Network Rail standards/control
documents that were current when GRIP Stage 3 was completed.
NOTE 1: Legislation includes Technical Specifications for Interoperability (TSIs).
NOTE 2: The relationship of this standard/control document with legislation and/or
external standards is described in the purpose of this standard.
Disclaimer
In issuing this standard/control document for its stated purpose, Network Rail
Infrastructure Limited makes no warranties, expressed or implied, that compliance
with all or any standards/control documents it issues is sufficient on its own to
provide safety or compliance with legislation. Users are reminded of their own duties
under legislation.
Compliance with a Network Rail standard/control document does not, of itself, confer
immunity from legal obligations.
Where Network Rail Infrastructure Limited has granted permission to copy extracts
from Network Rail standards or control documents, Network Rail Infrastructure
Limited accepts no responsibility for, nor any liability in connection with, the use of
such extracts, or any claims arising there from.
This disclaimer applies to all forms of media in which extracts from Network Rail
standards and control documents might be reproduced.
Supply
Copies of standards/control documents are available electronically, within Network
Rail’s organisation. Hard copies of this document might be available to Network Rail
people on request to the relevant controlled publication distributor. Other
organisations can obtain copies of this standard/control document from an approved
distributor.
1 This can include gross proportionate project costs with the agreement of the Network Rail Assurance
Panel (NRAP).
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Page 3 of 10
Issue: 7
Issue record
Issue Date Comments
1 Jan 1998 Emergency issue by Railtrack
2 Apr 2006 Updated to Network Rail issue
3 Jun 2009 Updated section U004 in reference to Hardlock
nuts fitted to point stretcher bars
4 Dec 2010 Updated to include new G!/B004 requiring
preservation of evidence after accidents and
incidents
5 Dec 2016 New module B005,E022 updated to incorporate
LOI323 and module A011 withdrawn. Re-
categorised as Level 3 document
6 March 2018 Module B005 update to reflect actual product
installed
7 Sept 2018 Modules A003 & A013 – Minor amendments to
remove out of date references to ORR documents.
Module A012 withdrawn as out of date.
Legislation
No legislation has been identified that is applicable to the content of this
standard/control document.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- Page 4 of 10
Issue: 7
Contents
1 Purpose .................................................................................................................. 6
2 Scope ...................................................................................................................... 6
3 NR/GI/A001 – Contents.......................................................................................... 7
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Page 5 of 10
Issue: 7
1 Purpose
This Handbook covers personal safety issues and the essential features of S&T
equipment. The handbook also includes information not covered by the Rule Book
which is necessary for any S&T staff involved in lineside or technical work.
2 Scope
This Handbook applies to all signal engineering staff.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Page 6 of 10
Issue: 7
3 NR/GI/A001 – Contents
Section Description Issue Date
NR/GI General Instructions to Staff Working on S&T Equipment 04 Dec 10
Part A Administrative and General
A001 Contents 02 Apr 06
A002 Subject Index 02 Apr 06
A003 Definitions 03 Sep 18
A011 Introduction and Overview 02
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Dec 16
Withdrawn December 2016 – No longer required
A012 Competency 02 Sep 18
Withdrawn September 2018, out of date
A013 Briefing of Standards 03 Sep 18
A014 Distribution of Essential Standards 02 Apr 06
A016 Definition of Safety-Critical Work 02 Apr 06
A017 Working on Equipment - General 02 Apr 06
Part B Rule Book Supplementary Instructions
B001 Work that Could Affect the Operation of Signalling 02 Apr 06

Equipment, but Can be Carried Out between Trains
B002 Disconnections 02 Apr 06
B003 Releases and Restoration 02 Apr 06
B004 Preservation of Evidence After Accidents and Incidents 01 Dec 10
B005 Remote Resetting of Signalling Equipment 02 Mar 16
Part C Clearances and Structure Gauge
C001 Clearances for S&T Equipment 02 Apr 06

Part D Design and Preparation
D001 Before Starting Work 02 Apr 06

D011 Non-Conceptual Design 02 Apr 06
D012 Temporary Work 02 Apr 06
D013 Temporary Signalling Alterations for Emergency 02 Apr 06
Trackwork
D014 Stagework 02 Apr 06
D021 Plans and Diagrams of Engineering Details 02 Apr 06
Page 7 of 10
Issue: 7
D022 Circuit Diagrams - Colouring 02 Apr 06

D023 Circuit Diagrams - Symbols and Nomenclature 02 Apr 06
D024 Circuit Diagrams - Wiring 02 Apr 06
D025 Version Control of Diagrams 02 Apr 06
D026 Presentation of Partially Commissioned (or Out of Use) 02 Apr 06
Design Details
D031 Site Records 02 Apr 06
D032 Site Records for Testing Purposes 02 Apr 06
Part E Electrical and Electronic
E001 Electrical Interference 02 Apr 06

E002 Electromagnetic Compatibility with Rolling Stock 02 Apr 06
E003 Use of Mobile Telephones, Radio Transmitters and Un- 02 Apr 06
Suppressed Portable Devices
E004 Safe Handling of Electrostatic Sensitive Devices 02 Apr 06
E005 Segregation of Wiring 02 Apr 06
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
E011 New Product Guidelines 02 Apr 06

E012 Product Approval Status 02 Apr 06
E021 Earthing and Equipotential Bonding 02 Apr 06
E022 Rectification of Power Supply Earth Faults Protected by 03 Dec 16
Automatic Disconnection
E041 Signalling Circuits in Telecommunication Systems 02 Apr 06
E051 Alterations to Existing Signalling 02 Apr 06
E052 Insulation of Unterminated Wires 02 Apr 06
E053 Recovery of Redundant Assets 02 Apr 06
E054 Securing Points Out of Use 02 Apr 06
E061 Completion of Work 02 Apr 06
Part M Maintenance
M001 Signalling Maintenance 02 Apr 06

M002 Seasonal Precautions 02 Apr 06
Part P Painting and Labelling
P001 Painting of Signalling Equipment 02 Apr 06

P011 Labelling Internal Equipment 02 Apr 06
P012 Service Labelling 02 Apr 06
Page 8 of 10
Issue: 7
P013 Labelling Telephones 02 Apr 06

P015 Safety Signs for S&T Installations 02 Apr 06
Part T Testing
T001 Testing -General 02 Apr 06

Part U Tools and Instrumentation
U001 Tools, Measuring Instruments and Calibration 02 Apr 06

U002 Inspection and Safety of Tools, Plant and Protective 02 Apr 06
Equipment
U003 Fixings: Nuts, Bolts, Screws, Washers 02 Apr 06
U004 Hardlock Nuts 03 Jun 09
U005 Torque Wrenches 02 Apr 06
U006 Bond Punches 02 Apr 06
U007 Checking Gauges 02 Apr 06
U008 Under-Rail Rail Bonding Unit 02 Apr 06
U011 Stripping Tools 02 Apr 06
U012 Extractor Tools 02 Apr 06
U013 Marking Pliers for Wire Loop Connections 02 Apr 06
U014 Wire Connections and Crimping 02 Apr 06
U015 Soldering 02 Apr 06
U016 Wire Wrapped Connections 02 Apr 06
U017 Insulation Displacement Connectors 02 Apr 06
U020 Meters for Signalling Use 02 Apr 06
U021 Insulation Test Equipment 02 Apr 06
U022 Track Circuit Shunt Box 02 Apr 06
U023 Track Circuit Fault Detector 02 Apr 06
U024 Double Millivoltmeter 02 Apr 06
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
U025 Direct Reading Phase Angle Meter 02 Apr 06

U026 TI.21 Test Meters 02 Apr 06
U027 Reed Track Circuit Instrumentation 02 Apr 06
U028 HVI Track Circuit Adaptor Integrator 02 Apr 06
U029 FS2600 Set-Up Box 02 Apr 06
U031 Cable Locating Tools 02 Apr 06
U033 Use of Monitoring and Test Equipment 02 Apr 06
Page 9 of 10
Issue: 7
U034 Management and Control of Temporary Straps 02 Apr 06

U041 Miscellaneous Test Equipment 02 Apr 06
U042 Earth Fault Test Adapters 02 Apr 06
U043 AWS Strength and Polarity Meter 02 Apr 06
U044 TPWS Test Equipment 02 Apr 06
Part W Worksite and Lineside
W001 Security - General 02 Apr 06

W002 Portable Plant, Tools, Materials and Road Vehicles at the 02 Apr 06
Lineside
W003 Excavations, Buried Services and Driving Spikes 02 Apr 06
W004 Common Worksite Hazards for S&T Staff 02 Apr 06
W005 Working Environment 02 Apr 06
W011 Asbestos 02 Apr 06
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
W012 Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs) 02 Apr 06
Part X Electrical Safety
X001 Electrical Safety - General 02 Apr 06

X002 Electrical Safety -Working On or Testing Electrical 02 Apr 06
Equipment
X003 Electrical Safety -Isolation of Electrical Equipment Before 02 Apr 06
Work
X004 Electrical Safety - Permit to Work 02 Apr 06
X011 Electrical Safety - Cathode Ray Tubes 02 Apr 06
X012 Electrical Safety - Lithium Batteries 02 Apr 06
X021 Safety in Battery Rooms 02 Apr 06
X022 Safe Work On or Near DC Electrified Lines 02 Apr 06
Page 10 of 10
Standard and control document briefing note
Ref: NR/L3/SIG/10064 Issue: 7
Title: General Instructions to Staff Working on S&T Equipment
Publication date: 01 September 2018 Compliance Date: 01 December 2018
Standard/Control Document Owner: Professional Head of Signalling
Non-compliance rep (Approver of TRACKER applications): Route Asset Manager [Signalling]
Technical lead/contact for briefings: Pardip Basran, Senior Engineer [Control, Command Tel: 07801 903854
and Signalling]
Purpose: Scope:
This Handbook covers personal safety issues and the essential This Handbook applies to all signal engineering staff.
features of S&T equipment. The handbook also includes
information not covered by the Rule Book which is necessary
for any S&T staff involved in lineside or technical work.
Overview of change
Reference to out of date ORR documents removed. A012 competency module withdrawn.
Detail of change
Section(s)/clause(s) Summary of changes

A003 and A013 Reference to out of date ORR documents withdrawn. A13 has been tidied up for RAGging purposes.
A012 Withdrawn.
Reasons for change

Modules A003 and A013 have been amended to remove references to out of date ORR documents. Module A012 has been
withdrawn because it is out of date.
Affected documents:
Reference Impact
NR/L3/SIG/10064 ISSUE 6 Superseded
NR/GI/A003 ISSUE 2 Superseded
NR/GI/A013 ISSUE 2 Superseded
NR/GI/A012 ISSUE 2 Withdrawn
Briefing requirements:
Will Briefing Management System be used to deliver the briefing to posts listed below? Yes/No
Technical briefings are given to those who have specific responsibilities within this standard/control document.
Awareness briefings are given to those who might be affected by the content but have no specific responsibilities within the standard/control
document.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Details of the briefing arrangements are included in the associated briefing programme.
All posts identified for briefing must be as described in OrgPlus.
Briefing Post Responsible for

(A-Awareness/ Function cascade briefing?
T-Technical) Y/N
A Route Asset Manager [Signalling] Route Businesses Y
A Signal & Telecomms Maintenance Engineers Route Businesses Y
A Section Manager [Signals] Route Businesses Y
A Signal Technicians/Signalling Technical Support Staff Route Businesses N
A S&T Trainer [Workforce Development Specialist] Route Services Y
A Project Engineering Manager (Testing & Commissioning) Infrastructure Projects Y
A Senior Project Engineer (Signalling) Infrastructure Projects Y
NOTE: Contractors are responsible for arranging and undertaking their own Technical and Awareness Briefings in accordance with their own processes
and procedures.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
NR/GI/A002 Page: 1 of 29
Subject Index
This Subject Index is sorted by primary and

secondary descriptions.
Description Section
A.C. Busbar Earth Test Adapter U042
Acceptance, New Products E011
Accompaniment, Electrical Safety X002
Activities that are Always Safety-Critical A016
Activities that are Not Safety-Critical A016
Activities that may be Safety-Critical A016
Additional Requirements, Electrostatic Sensitive Devices E004
Affected Fluke Meters U020
After Telecoms work completed, Signalling Circuits E041
After work is completed:, Disconnections B002
Alterations to Existing Signalling, Compliance with E051
Diagrams
Alterations to Existing Signalling, Conflicting Standards E051
Alterations to Existing Signalling, Retrospective Work E051
Alterations to Existing Signalling, Temporary Work E051
Altering or Repairing Signalling Equipment, Working on A017
Equipment
Aluminium Cored Power Cables, Crimping U014
AMP, Crimping U014
Analysis, Engineering Details D021
Anti-frost Lubricants M002
Apparatus Names (Identities) D023
Approval, Cable Locating Tools U031
Arcing, Electrical Safety X001
Asbestos on the Railway W011
Asbestos, S&T Equipment W011
Audio Frequencies, Electrical Interference E001
Audio Nuisance E001
Automatic Disconnection, Earthing E021
Avo Model 8, Meters U020
AWS Strength and Polarity Meter U043
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Subject Index
Description Section
AWS, Completion of Work E061
Axle Counter Restoration Form BR29789/2 B003
Axle Counters, Disconnections B002
Axle Counters, Electrical Interference E001
Ballast removal, DC Electrified Lines X022
Batteries, TI.21 Test Meters U026
Battery Check, Earth Fault Test Adapters U042
Before Starting Work D001
Before Telecoms work, Signalling Circuits E041
Before work starts, Disconnections B002
Bomb Tails, Insulation E052
Bond Punches, Defective U006
Bonding of Broken Rail Joints, Temporary D013
Briefing of Standards A013
Buried Services , Spike Mounting Equipment and Driving W003
Earth Rods
Buried Services and Driving Spikes, Protection of W003
Excavations
Cable and Overhead Lines, Seasonal Precautions M002
Cable Locating Tools, 400 Cable/Pipe Locator Series U031
Cable Locating Tools, CAT & Genny (Radiodetection Ltd) U031
Cable Locating Tools, Competency and Inspection U031
Cable Locating Tools, Gaining Approval U031
Cable Sheath Stripping, Tools U011
Cables and Wires, Completion of Work E061
Cadmium W004
Calibration, Tools, Measuring Instruments U001
CAT & Genny, Cable Locating Tools U031
Cathode Ray Tubes, Electric Shock X011
Cathode Ray Tubes, Hazards X011
Cathode Ray Tubes, Working in Public Areas X011
CCTV equipment, Electrical Interference E001
CCTV Transmission Systems, Electrical Interference E001
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Subject Index
Description Section
Changeover of Duplicate and Back-Up Systems B003
Changing Shunt Signal Lamps, DC Electrified Lines X022
Charge Prevention, Lithium Batteries X012
Choice of Voltage and Current Limits, Electrical Safety X001
Circuit Diagrams D021
Circuit Diagrams - Colouring D022
Circuit Diagrams, Apparatus Names (Identities) D023
Circuit Diagrams, External Wiring D024
Circuit Diagrams, Fuses D024
Circuit Diagrams, Internal Wiring D024
Circuit Diagrams, Lever and Switch Contacts D023
Circuit Diagrams, Power and Earthing Cable D024
Circuit Diagrams, Terminal Names D023
Circuit Diagrams, Termination Numbers D023
Circuit Diagrams, Wire/Cable Types D024
Circuit Diagrams, Wiring Symbols D023
Circuitry, Partially Commissioned (or Out of Use) D026
Clamp Ammeter U020
Clamp Lock Detection Setting Gauges U007
Clamp Lock Limit Switch Gauges U007
Clamp Locks, Securing Out of Use E054
Cleaning Equipment, DC Electrified Lines X022
Clearances for S&T Equipment C001
Clearing the First Earth Fault, Power Supply Protected by E022
Automatic Disconnection
Clip-on Ammeter U020
Colour-coded Equipment, Service Labelling P012
Coloured Stagework Wiring D014
Colours, Painting Equipment P001
Common Worksite Hazards for S&T Staff W004
Competence, DC Electrified Lines X022
Competence, Monitoring and Test Equipment U033
Competency and Inspection, Cable Locating Tools U031
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Subject Index
Description Section
Competency, Correlation A012
Competency, Electrical Equipment A012
Competency, Electrostatic Sensitive Devices A012
Competency, Other Disciplines A012
Competency, Safety-Critical Work A012
Competency, Testing A012
Competency, Tools, Instrumentation and Plant A012
Completion of Work, AWS E061
Completion of Work, Cables and Wires E061
Completion of Work, Checklists E061
Completion of Work, Control Panel E061
Completion of Work, Deliverables E061
Completion of Work, Minor Work E061
Completion of Work, Points E061
Completion of Work, Power Supplies E061
Completion of Work, Relays E061
Completion of Work, Signals E061
Completion of Work, Test Panel E061
Completion of Work, Track Circuits E061
Compliance with Diagrams E051
Conflicting Standards, Alterations to Existing E051
Connection of Points to a SB, Securing Out of Use E054
Construction of Temporary Straps U034
Contaminated Insulation W004
Contents A001
Control Panel, Completion of Work E061
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Control Tables D021
Convertors, Electrical Interference E001
Correlation, Competency A012
Crimp Connectors - Faston Style U014
Crimp Connectors (Spade Style) for Terminations to U014
Relay Plugboards
Crimp Connectors for Terminations with Nuts and Screws U014

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Subject Index
Description Section
Crimp Terminals U014
Crimping Tools U014
Crimping Tools - Points to Note U014
Crimping, Aluminium Cored Power Cables U014
Crimping, AMP U014
Crimpstar HP 2 WT1560 U014
Cross-Contamination, Segregation of Wiring E005
CTT RTB–510 Tool, Crimping U014
Current value, Electrical Safety X001
DC Electrified Lines, Ballast removal X022
DC Electrified Lines, Cleaning Equipment X022
DC Electrified Lines, Competence X022
DC Electrified Lines, Inspection X022
DC Electrified Lines, Oiling and Greasing X022
DC Electrified Lines, Point adjustment X022
DC Electrified Lines, Removing Rubbish X022
DC Electrified Lines, Safe Methods of Work X022
DC Electrified Lines, Shunt Signal Lamps X022
DC Electrified Lines, Statutory Requirements X022
DC Electrified Lines, Test Meters X022
Defective Punches U006
Definition of Safety-Critical Work A016
Definitions A003
Definitions, Telecommunication Systems E041
Deliverables, Completion of Work E061
Design Relaxation for Temporary Work D012
Design Relaxation, Non-Conceptual Design D011
Design, New Products E011
Direct and Indirect Disconnections B002
Direct Reading Phase Angle Meter U025
Direct Reading Phase Angle Meter U025
Discharging Fault Currents, Earthing E021
Disconnecting and Working on Equipment B002
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Subject Index
Description Section
Disconnecting Point KRs B002
Disconnecting Track Circuit TPRs B002
Disconnection of Signalling Equipment A017
Disconnection of Signals (Direct) B002
Disconnection of Signals (Indirect) B002
Disconnections, Axle Counters B002
Disconnections, Before work starts B002
Disconnections, Electronic Interlockings B002
Disconnections, Links B002
Disconnections, Local Procedure B002
Disconnections, Maintenance Testing B002
Disconnections, Mechanical Signalling B002
Disconnections, Missing/ Illegible Diagrams B002
Disconnections, Point KRs B002
Disconnections, Procedure B002
Disconnections, Relay Interlocking B002
Disconnections, Remote Procedure B002
Disconnections, Selection of Procedure B002
Disconnections, Supply of Forms B002
Disconnections, Track Circuit TPRs B002
Disconnections, Track Circuits B002
Disconnections, Works Testing B002
Disposal, New Products E011
Disposal, Polychlorinated Biphenyls W012
Distant Signal Restriction A017
Diversion and Reinstatement of Multicore Cables, B003
Releases and Restoration
Diversion of Circuits in Telecommunication Systems E041
Door Locks, Security W001
Double Millivoltmeter, Connections U024
Double Millivoltmeter, Operation U024
Double Millivoltmeter, Traction Return Current Values U024
Drainage, Seasonal Precautions M002
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Subject Index
Description Section
Drop Shunt Test U022
Dummy Amplifier, HVI Track Circuit Adaptor Integrator U028
During the work, Disconnections B002
Earth Fault Test Adapters, Battery Check U042
Earth Fault Test Adapters, External Multimeter Shunts U042
Earth Fault Test Adapters, FDM Earth Test Adapter U042
Earth Fault Test Adapters, Interruptions to Testing U042
Earth Fault Test Adapters, Lead Connection U042
Earth Fault Test Adapters, Precautions U042
Earth Fault Test Adapters, Testing of Cores U042
Earth Fault Test Adapters, Visual Inspection U042
Earth Fault Test Adapters, Voltage Comparison U042
Earth Sources, Earthing and Equipotential Bonding E021
Earthing and Equipotential Bonding, Requirements E021
Earthing of Surge Arrestors E021
Earthing, Automatic Disconnection E021
Earthing, Discharging Fault Currents E021
Earthing, EMC Shielding E021
Earthing, Engineering Details E021
Earthing, Equipotential Zone E021
Earthing, FTE E021
Earthing, Functional Circuit Return E021
Earthing, Reasons E021
Earthing, Remedies E021
Earthing, Testing E021
Electric Burns X001
Electric Shock X001
Electric Shock, Cathode Ray Tubes X011
Electric Token Systems, Releases and Restoration B003
Electrical equipment, Safety X001
Electrical Interference, Audio Frequencies E001
Electrical Interference, Audio Nuisance E001
Electrical Interference, Axle Counters E001
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Subject Index
Description Section
Electrical Interference, CCTV equipment E001
Electrical Interference, Convertors E001
Electrical Interference, FDM E001
Electrical Interference, PMUXs E001
Electrical Interference, Reed Systems E001
Electrical Interference, Reed Track Circuits E001
Electrical Interference, SSI E001
Electrical Interference, TDM E001
Electrical Interference, TPWS E001
Electrical Interference, Track Circuits E001
Electrical Requirements, New Products E011
Electrical Safety, Arcing X001
Electrical Safety, Choice of Voltage and Current Limits X001
Electrical Safety, Explosion X001
Electrical Safety, Exposed (conductor) X001
Electrical Safety, Fires X001
Electrical Safety, Glossary X001
Electrical Safety, Isolation X001
Electrical Safety, Live work X001
Electrical Safety, Multi user lock off device X001
Electrical Safety, Personal lock X001
Electrical Safety, The Law X001
Electrical Safety, The Risks X001
Electricity Cables, Buried Services W003
Electromagnetic Interference, Segregation of Wiring E005
Electronic Interlocking, Releases and Restoration B003
Electronic Interlockings, Disconnections B002
Electro-Pneumatic Installations, Seasonal Precautions M002
Electrostatic Discharge, Safe Handling E004
Electrostatic Sensitive Devices, Competency A012
Electrostatic Sensitive Devices, Handling Area E004
Electrostatic Sensitive Devices, Marking E004
Electrostatic Sensitive Devices, Packaging E004
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Subject Index
Description Section
Electrostatic Sensitive Devices, Permanent Safe E004
Handling Area
Electrostatic Sensitive Devices, Portable Safe Handling E004
Area
Electrostatic Sensitive Devices, Precautions E004
Electrostatic Sensitive Devices, Static Control E004
Electrostatic Sensitive Devices, Storage E004
Electrostatic Sensitive Devices, Training E004
Electrostatic Sensitive Devices, Transparent electrostatic E004
shielding bag
Electrostatic Sensitive Devices, Transportation and E004
Storage
EMC Shielding E021
EMC, New Products E011
EMC, Rolling Stock E002
Emitted Substances, New Products E011
Engineering Details, Earthing and Bonding E021
Equipment and Substances, New Products E011
Equipment Rooms and Lower Floors of Signal Boxes, W002
Security
Equipotential Zone E021
Erroneous Releasing of Locking B003
Essential Standards, Distribution of A014
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Excavations, Buried Services and Driving Spikes, Safe W003

System of Work
Excavations, Driving Spikes, Services Likely to be W003
Encountered
Excavations, Electricity Cables W003
Excavations, Gas Pipes W003
Excavations, Pipelines W003
Excavations, Telecommunications W003
Excavations, Water Pipes and Sewers W003
Exceptions, Circuit Diagrams D024
Expandable Sleeves, Insulation E052
Explosion, Electrical Safety X001

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Subject Index
Description Section
Explosive Atmospheres, Mobile Telephones E003
Extractor Tools U012
Failures, Signalling Maintenance M001
Fast Transient Earth E021
Faulty Shunt Boxes U022
FDM Earth Test Adapter U042
FDM, Electrical Interference E001
Final Records D031
Fire Prevention and Tidiness, Security W002
Fire Protection, Segregation of Wiring E005
Fires, Electrical Safety X001
First Earth Fault, Rectification of E022
Fitting, Safety Signs P015
Fixing the Labels, Internal Equipment P011
Fixing to Concrete U003
Fixing to Hollow Surfaces U003
Fixings, Lock Nuts U003
Fixings, Lock Washers U003
Fixings, Locking Compounds U003
Fixings, Slotted Nut U003
Fixings, Split Pins U003
Fixings, Threads U003
Fixings, Tools U003
Fixings, Types U003
Fixings, Washers U003
Fluke 23, AVO M2006, Meters U020
Fluke 8060A, Philips EA116, Meters U020
Fluxes, Soldering U015
Foliage, Seasonal Precautions M002
Forms, Disconnections B002
FPL Setting Gauge U007
Frequency Selective Voltmeter, TI.21 U026
FS2600 Set-Up Box U029
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Subject Index
Description Section
FTE Bonding, Segregation of Wiring E005
Functional Circuit Return E021
Fuses D024
Gas Pipes, Excavations W003
Gaskets, Seasonal Precautions M002
Gauges, Clamp Lock Detection Setting U007
Gauges, Clamp Lock Limit Switch U007
Gauges, FPL Setting U007
Glossary, Electrical Safety X001
Grandfather Rights, Product Approval Status E012
Guards, New Products E011
Hand Operated Stripper, Tools U011
Handling Area, Electrostatic Sensitive Devices E004
Handling Cable Drums W004
Hardlock Nut Tightening Procedure U004
Hardlock Nuts, Installation U004
Hardlock Nuts, The Tool Kit U004
Hardlock Nuts, Tightening U004
Hardlock Nuts, Torque U004
Hardlock Nuts, Torque Wrench U004
Hazards, Cathode Ray Tubes X011
Heat Sensitive Equipment, Soldering U015
Heaters, Seasonal Precautions M002
Hellerman Mk.3/RS8, Crimping U014
Hot “Vee” Stripper, Tools U011
Hour Changes, Seasonal Precautions M002
How to Crimp U014
HPSS, Securing Out of Use E054
HVI Track Circuit Adaptor Integrator U028
Illegible or Missing Labels P012
Incidents A011
Incorrect Readings with Certain Multimeters U020
Input and Output Integrity, Segregation of Wiring E005
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Subject Index
Description Section
Inspection and Safety of Tools, Plant and Protective U002
Equipment
Inspection of Items Connected to the Running Rail, DC X022
Electrified Lines
Inspection, Ladders U002
Inspection, Loose Lifting Tackle U002
Inspection, Percussion Tools U002
Inspection, Powered Plant U002
Inspection, Protective Equipment for Working at Height U002
Inspection, Protective Equipment, Live Working U002
Inspection, Tools, Plant and Protective Equipment U002
Installation Procedure for Hardlock Nuts U004
Installation, New Products E011
Installations with Outstanding Earth Faults X002
Instrumentation, Monitoring and Test Equipment U033
Insulation Adjustment of AMP Tools, Crimping U014
Insulation Displacement Connectors U017
Insulation of Unterminated Wires, Bomb Tails E052
Insulation of Unterminated Wires, Expandable Sleeves E052
Insulation of Unterminated Wires, Squeeze on Sleeves E052
Insulation of Unterminated Wires, Tools E052
Insulation Test Equipment, Megger U021
Insulation Test Equipment, Rail Clip Insulation Tester U021
Insulation Test Equipment, Sleeper Insulation Tester U021
Insulation Testing Equipment X002
Internal and External Wiring, Segregation E005
Internal Wiring, Circuit Diagrams D024
Interoperability, New Products E011
Isolation by Local Disconnection X003
Isolation of Electrical Equipment, Accompaniment X002
Isolation of Electrical Equipment, Exception to Live X002
Working Prohibition
Isolation of Electrical Equipment, Insulation Testing X002
Isolation of Electrical Equipment, Local Disconnection X003
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Subject Index
Description Section
Isolation of Electrical Equipment, Meters, leads and X002
prods
Isolation of Electrical Equipment, Outstanding Earth X002
Faults
Isolation of Electrical Equipment, Personal Protection X002
Isolation of Electrical Equipment, Power Feeder Cables X003
Isolation of Electrical Equipment, Protective Isolation X003
Isolation of Electrical Equipment, Taking Measurements X002
Isolation of Electrical Equipment, Tools X002
Isolation, Electrical Safety X001
Isolations - Power Feeder Cables X003
Items to be Checked after Commissioning E061
Items to be Checked before Commissioning E061
Key Types, Security W001
Label Colour P011
Label Material P011
Label Position, Internal Equipment P011
Label Position, Service Labelling P012
Labelling Internal Equipment, Colour P011
Labelling Internal Equipment, Fixing P011
Labelling Internal Equipment, Lettering Size P011
Labelling Internal Equipment, Material P011
Labelling Internal Equipment, Position P011
Labelling Telephones P013
Labelling, Telephones P013
Ladders, Inspection U002
Law, Electrical Safety X001
Lead Work W004
Leptospirosis W004
Lettering Size, Labelling P011
Level Crossing, Releases and Restoration B003
Lever and Switch Contacts, Circuit Diagrams - Symbols D023
Lever Collars or Reminder Appliances A017
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Subject Index
Description Section
Light Measuring Tools U041
Lineman’s Avo, Meters U020
Lineside Fences W001
Lineside Locations, Recovery of Redundant Assets E053
Links B002
Lithium Batteries, Charge Prevention X012
Live work, Electrical Safety X001
Live Working Procedures, Earth Faults E022
Live Working Prohibition, Exception to X002
Live Working, Inspection U002
Local Disconnection Procedure B002
Lock Nuts U003
Lock Washers U003
Locking Compounds U003
Locking Methods U003
Locking Nuts U003
Loose Lifting Tackle, Inspection U002
Maintenance of Signalling Equipment A017
Maintenance Painting – Top Coat Colours P001
Maintenance Testing, Disconnections B002
Maintenance, New Products E011
Making a Wrapped Joint U016
Management and Control of Temporary Straps, Attended U034
Management and Control of Temporary Straps, U034
Construction
Management and Control of Temporary Straps, U034
Unattended
Managing Work, Signalling Circuits in E041
Telecommunication Systems
Manual Operation, Isolation and Restoration of Points B003
Marking Pliers for Wire Loop Connections U013
Marking, Electrostatic Sensitive Devices E004
Material, Security of Lineside W002
Mechanical Adjustments, Seasonal M002
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Subject Index
Description Section
Mechanical Frame, Releases B003
Mechanical Points, Securing Out of Use E054
Mechanical Signalling Equipment, Service Labelling P012
Mechanical Signalling, Disconnections B002
Megger, Insulation Test Equipment U021
Meters, “Lineman’s” Avo U020
Meters, Avo Model 8 U020
Meters, Clip-on Ammeter U020
Meters, D.C. Clamp Ammeter U020
Meters, Digital U020
Meters, Fluke 23, AVO M2006 U020
Meters, Fluke 8060A, Philips EA116 U020
Meters, Incorrect Readings U020
Meters, leads and prods, Electrical Safety X002
Meters, Special Frequency U020
Meters, Unaffected Fluke U020
Methods of Giving a Release B003
Millivoltmeter U024
Miniature Lever Power Frame, Releases B003
Minor Work, Completion E061
Missing/ Illegible Diagrams, Disconnections B002
Mobile Telephones E003
Mobile Telephones, Radio Transmitters and Un- E003
Suppressed Portable Devices, Warning Signs
Mobile Telephones, Susceptible Electronic Equipment E003
Monitoring and Test Equipment, Competence U033
Requirement
Monitoring and Test Equipment, Permanent Fixed U033
Monitoring Systems
Monitoring and Test Equipment, Short Duration Attended U033
Tests
Monitoring and Test Equipment, Temporary Unattended U033
Monitoring
Motor Transport, Seasonal Precautions M002
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Subject Index
Description Section
Multi user lock off device X001
Multimeter Shunts U042
Needle Stick Injuries W004
Network Termination Point, Signalling Circuits in E041
New Products, Acceptance E011
New Products, Design E011
New Products, Disposal E011
New Products, Electrical Requirements E011
New Products, EMC E011
New Products, Emitted Substances E011
New Products, Guards E011
New Products, Installation E011
New Products, Interoperability E011
New Products, Maintenance E011
New Products, Noise E011
New Products, Testing E011
New Products, Training E011
Noise, New Products E011
Noise, Worksite W004
Non-Conceptual Design, Records D011
Non-Conceptual Design, Relaxation D011
Notices and Signs, Battery Rooms X021
Occupational Dermatitis W004
Oiling and Greasing, DC Electrified Lines X022
Operational Telecommunications E041
Other Disciplines, Competency A012
Packaging, Electrostatic Sensitive Devices E004
Padlocks, Security W001
Paint Application P001
Painting Frequencies P001
Painting of Colour Light Signals P001
Painting of Signalling Equipment, Colour Light Signals P001
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Subject Index
Description Section
Painting of Signalling Equipment, Colours P001
Painting of Signalling Equipment, Frequencies P001
Painting of Signalling Equipment, Top Coat Colours P001
Panel Multiplexers, Electrical Interference E001
Partially Commissioned Installations D014
Partially Operational Equipment on Site, Presentation, D026
Design Details
Partially Operational Equipment on Site, Recovery of E053
Redundant Assets
PCBs in S&T Equipment W012
Percussion Tools, Inspection U002
Permanent Fixed Monitoring Systems U033
Permanent Safe Handling Area, Electrostatic Sensitive E004
Devices
Permissible Work, Between Trains B001
Permit to Work, Shift Changes X004
Personal lock, Electrical Safety X001
Personal Protection, Testing Electrical Equipment X002
Personal Protective Equipment A011
Personnel Protection, Between Trains B001
Pick-up Shunt Test U022
Pipelines, Excavations W003
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Plans and Diagrams of Engineering Details, Circuit D021

Diagrams
Plans and Diagrams of Engineering Details, Signal D021
Sighting Forms
Plans and Diagrams, Analysis D021
Plans and Diagrams, Control Tables D021
Plans of Engineering Details D021
Plans, Diagrams of Engineering Details D021
Plant, Security at the Lineside W002
Point adjustment, DC Electrified Lines X022
Point Machine, Securing Out of Use E054
Points, Completion of Work E061

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Subject Index
Description Section
Polychlorinated Biphenyls, Disposal W012
Polychlorinated Biphenyls, in S&T Equipment W012
Polychlorinated Biphenyls, Replacement W012
Polychlorinated Biphenyls, Spillage W012
Portable Computer Diagnostics U041
Portable Digital Oscilloscopes U041
Portable Ladders W005
Portable Safe Handling Area E004
Power and Earthing Cable, Circuit Diagrams D024
Power Supplies, Completion of Work E061
Powered Plant, Inspection U002
Powered Plant, Worksite Hazards W004
Precautions, Battery Rooms X021
Precautions, Earth Fault Test Adapters U042
Precautions, Electrical Interference E001
Precautions, Electrostatic Sensitive Devices E004
Preparation for Autumn, Seasonal Precautions M002
Preparation for Summer, Seasonal Precautions M002
Preparation for Winter, Seasonal Precautions M002
Presentation of Out of Use Design Details, Recovery of D026
Redundant Assets
Presentation of Partially Commissioned (or Out of Use) D026
Design Details, Circuitry
Presentation of Partially Commissioned (or Out of Use) D026
Design Details, Partially Operational Equipment on Site
Principles of Giving a Release B003
Procedure for Making Disconnections B002
Product Approval Status, Grandfather Rights E012
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Product Check List E011
Protection from Traction Faults, Segregation of Wiring E005
Protection of Excavations W003
Protective Equipment for Working at Height, Inspection U002
Protective Isolation, Electrical Safety X003
Provision of Facilities for Securing Points E054

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Subject Index
Description Section
Radio Electronic Token Block (RETB) Failures, B003
Restoration
Radio Transmitters and Un-Suppressed Portable E003
Devices, Explosive Atmospheres
Rail Clip Insulation Tester U021
Records, Signalling Circuits in Telecommunication E041
Systems
Recovery of Redundant Assets, Locations E053
Recovery of Redundant Assets, Partially Operational E053
Equipment
Recovery of Redundant Assets, Relaxation E053
Recovery of Redundant Assets, Signal Boxes and E053
Interlockings
Recovery of Redundant Assets, Trackside Equipment E053
Rectification of Power Supply Earth Faults E022
Rectification of Power Supply Earth Faults, Live Working E022
Procedures
Redundant Material, Security of Lineside W002
Reed Systems, Electrical Interference E001
Reed Track Circuit, Test Equipment U027
Reed Track Circuits, Electrical Interference E001
Reinstatement, Temporary Signalling Alterations D013
Relay Interlocking (route locking), Releases B003
Relay Interlocking, Disconnections B002
Relay or SSI Interlocking (track circuit), Releases B003
Relays, Completion of Work E061
Releases and Restoration, Authorisation and Records B003
Releases and Restoration, Axle Counter Form B003
Releases and Restoration, Axle Counters B003
Releases and Restoration, Block Systems B003
Releases and Restoration, Changeover of Duplicate and B003
Back-Up Systems
Releases and Restoration, Electric Token Systems B003
Releases and Restoration, Electronic Interlocking B003
Releases and Restoration, Erroneous Release B003
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Subject Index
Description Section
Releases and Restoration, Level Crossing B003
Releases and Restoration, Mechanical Frame B003
Releases and Restoration, Miniature Lever Power Frame B003
Releases and Restoration, Points B003
Releases and Restoration, Relay Interlocking B003
Releases and Restoration, Relay or SSI Interlocking B003
Releases and Restoration, RETB Failures B003
Releases and Restoration, SSI B003
Releases, Giving a Release B003
Releases, Sealed B003
Releases, Seals B003
Remedies for Deficient Earthing E021
Remote Disconnection Procedure B002
Removing Rubbish (fire hazards), DC Electrified Lines X022
Replacement Labelling P012
Reset and Restoration of Block Systems B003
Restoring to Service, Signalling Maintenance M001
Retrospective Work, Alterations to Existing Signalling E051
Risk Assessment, Temporary Work D012
Risks, Electrical Safety X001
Road Vehicles near the Line, Use of W002
Rocoil Rail Current Transducer U026
Safe Handling Areas, Electrostatic Sensitive Devices E004
Safe Methods of Work, DC Electrified Lines X022
Safe System of Work, Excavations W003
Safety in Battery Rooms, Equipment X021
Safety in Battery Rooms, Notices and Signs X021
Safety in Battery Rooms, Precautions X021
Safety Procedures for Working on Electrical Equipment A012
Safety Signs for S&T Installations, Fitting P015
Safety Signs for S&T Installations, Regulations P015
Safety-Critical Work, Competency A012
Screw Termination without a Crimp Connector U014
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Subject Index
Description Section
Sealed Releases B003
Sealing, Service Labelling P012
Seals, Releases and Restoration B003
Seals, Working on Equipment A017
Seasonal Precautions, Anti-frost Lubricants M002
Seasonal Precautions, Cable and Overhead Lines M002
Seasonal Precautions, Drainage M002
Seasonal Precautions, Electro-Pneumatic Installations M002
Seasonal Precautions, Foliage M002
Seasonal Precautions, Gaskets M002
Seasonal Precautions, Heaters M002
Seasonal Precautions, Heaters M002
Seasonal Precautions, Hour Changes M002
Seasonal Precautions, Mechanical Adjustments M002
Seasonal Precautions, Motor Transport M002
Seasonal Precautions, Preparation for Autumn M002
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Seasonal Precautions, Preparation for Summer M002
Seasonal Precautions, Preparation for Winter M002
Seasonal Precautions, Signal Post Telephones M002
Seasonal Precautions, Stand-By Supplies M002
Seasonal Precautions, Terminals M002
Securing Points Out of Use, Clamp Locks E054
Securing Points Out of Use, Connection to a SB/GF E054
Securing Points Out of Use, HPSS E054
Securing Points Out of Use, Mechanical Points E054
Securing Points Out of Use, Not Connected to a SB/GF E054
Securing Points Out of Use, Point Machine E054
Securing Points Out of Use, Swing Nose Crossings E054
Securing Points Out of Use, Switch Diamonds E054
Securing Swing Nose Crossings E054
Securing Switch Diamonds E054
Securing Switches E054
Security, Door Locks W001

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Subject Index
Description Section
Security, Equipment Rooms W002
Security, Fire Prevention W002
Security, Key Types W001
Security, Lineside Fences W001
Security, Material W002
Security, Padlocks W001
Security, Plant W002
Security, Redundant Material W002
Security, Staff Safety W002
Security, Temporary Works W002
Security, User Worked Crossings W001
Segregation of Wiring, Cross-Contamination E005
Segregation of Wiring, Electromagnetic Interference E005
(EMI)
Segregation of Wiring, Fast Transient Earth Bonding E005
Segregation of Wiring, Fire Protection E005
Segregation of Wiring, Input and Output Integrity E005
Segregation of Wiring, Internal and External Wiring E005
Segregation of Wiring, Protection from Traction Faults E005
Segregation of Wiring, Thermal Effects E005
Segregation of Wiring, Transient Protection E005
Segregation of Wiring, Voltage Separation E005
Selection of Procedure, Disconnections B002
Separate Alterations, Stagework D014
Service Labelling, Colour-coded Equipment P012
Service Labelling, Illegible or Missing Labels P012
Service Labelling, Label Positioning P012
Service Labelling, Mechanical Signalling Equipment P012
Service Labelling, Minimum Requirements P012
Service Labelling, OEM and Replacement Labelling P012
Service Labelling, Sealing P012
Service Labelling, Serviced Date Coding P012
Service Labelling, Traceability P012
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Subject Index
Description Section
Services, Buried W003
Setting to Work E061
Shared S&T Cables and Systems E041
Shift Changes, Permit to Work X004
Short Duration Attended Tests, Monitoring Equipment U033
Signal Boxes And Interlockings, Recovery of Redundant E053
Assets
Signal Post Telephones, Seasonal Precautions M002
Signal Sighting Forms D021
Signalling Circuit, Telecommunication Systems E041
Signalling Circuits in Telecommunication Systems, After E041
Telecoms work completed:
Signalling Circuits in Telecommunication Systems, E041
Before Telecoms work may start:
Diversion of Circuits
Managing Work
Network Termination Point (NTP)
Records
Telecoms Bearer Steward
Testing of Operational Telecommunication Tail Cables
Signalling Maintenance Testing Handbook T001
Signalling Maintenance, Failures M001
Signalling Maintenance, Restoring to Service M001
Signalling Maintenance, Working on Operational M001
Equipment
Signalling Works Testing Handbook T001
Signals, Completion of Work E061
Site Records, Final D031
Site Records, Temporary D031
Site Records, Test Records D032
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Subject Index
Description Section
Site Records, Testing D032
Site Records, Testing where Site Records Differ from D032
Wiring
Site Records, Testing where Site Records have been D032
Amended
Site Records, Testing where there are No Site Records D032
Site Records, Version Control D031
Sleeper Insulation Tester U021
Slotted (or Castellated) Nut and Split Pin U003
Small Soldering Jobs (e.g. Wires to Tags) U015
Solder U015
Soldered Spade Connectors for Relay Plugboards U014
Soldering a Lug Onto a Copper Cable U015
Soldering Irons: Heat Source U015
Soldering Irons: The Bit U015
Soldering Larger Jobs with a Gas Torch U015
Soldering to Telecoms Type Tag Blocks U015
Soldering, Fluxes U015
Soldering, Heat Sensitive Equipment U015
Soldering, Small Jobs U015
Special Frequency Meters U020
Special Precautions for EPROMs, Safe Handling E004
Spike Mounting Equipment and Driving Earth Rods W003
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Spillage, Polychlorinated Biphenyls W012

Split Pins U003
SPWEE A012
Squeeze on Sleeves, Insulation E052
SSI TFM Input Tester U041
SSI, Electrical Interference E001
SSI, Releases and Restoration B003
Staff Safety, Security at the Lineside W002
Stagework, Alterations D014
Stagework, Coloured Wiring D014

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Subject Index
Description Section
Stagework, Partially Commissioned Installations D014
Stagework, Planning D014
Staging Back D014
Standard Structure Gauge, Clearances for S&T C001
Equipment
Stand-By Supplies, Seasonal Precautions M002
Static Control, Electrostatic Sensitive Devices E004
Statutory Requirements, DC Electrified Lines X022
Storage, Electrostatic Sensitive Devices E004
Strategic Spares W002
Stripping Tools, Cable Sheath U011
Stripping Tools, Hand Operated U011
Stripping Tools, Hot “Vee” Stripper U011
Subject Index A002
Susceptible Electronic Equipment, Mobile Telephones E003
T1.21 Test Meter U026
Taking Measurements, Electrical Safety X002
TCAID Test Set U041
TDM, Electrical Interference E001
Technical Relaxation, Temporary Work D012
Telecommunications, Excavations W003
Telecoms Bearer Steward, Signalling Circuits in E041
Telegram Error Rate Test Set U041
Temporary Approach Control Links (TACLs) A017
Temporary or Emergency Alterations A017
Temporary Records D031
Temporary Signalling Alterations for Emergency D013
Trackwork, Bonding of Broken Rail Joints
Temporary Signalling Alterations for Emergency D013
Trackwork, Reinstatement
Temporary Straps - Attended U034
Temporary Straps - Unattended U034
Temporary Unattended Monitoring U033
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Subject Index
Description Section
Temporary Work, Alterations to Existing Signalling E051
Temporary Work, Control Measures D012
Temporary Work, Design Relaxation D012
Temporary Work, Risk Assessment D012
Temporary Work, Technical Relaxation D012
Temporary Works, Plant and Materials on Platforms, W002
Security
Terminal Names, Circuit Diagrams D023
Terminals, Seasonal Precautions M002
Termination Numbers, Circuit Diagrams D023
Test Equipment, Reed Track Circuit U027
Test Panel, Completion of Work E061
Testing and Maintenance of Hand Crimping Tools U014
Testing of Earthing and Protective Conductors E021
Testing of Operational Telecommunication Tail Cables E041
Testing of Signalling Apparatus A017
Testing where Site Records Differ from Wiring D032
Testing where Site Records have been Amended D032
Testing where there are No Site Records D032
Testing with Site Records D032
Testing, Competency A012
Testing, New Products E011
Thermal Effects, Segregation of Wiring E005
Threads, Nuts, Bolts, Screws U003
TI.21 Test Meters, Batteries U026
TI.21 Test Meters, Measurement Hints U026
TI.21 Test Meters, Signal Levels, “Healthy” and “Failed” U026
Tightening in the Correct Direction, Hardlock Nuts U004
Tightening where Adaptor Plates are Fitted, Hardlock U004
Nuts
Tool Kit, Hardlock Nuts U004
Tool Kit, Hardlock Nuts U004
Tools, Electrical Safety X002
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Subject Index
Description Section
Tools, Instrumentation and Plant, Competency A012
Tools, Insulation of Unterminated Wires E052
Tools, Measuring Instruments, Calibration U001
Torque Specification, Hardlock Nuts U004
Torque Wrench Quick Release Button, Hardlock Nuts U004
Torque Wrenches U005
TPWS, Electrical Interference E001
TPWS, Test Equipment U044
Traceability, Service Labelling P012
Track Circuit Fault Detector U023
Track Circuit Shunt Box, Drop Shunt Test U022
Track Circuit Shunt Box, Faulty Shunt Boxes U022
Track Circuit Shunt Box, Pick-up Shunt Test U022
Track Circuit Shunt Box, Universal Shunt Box U022
Track Circuits, Completion of Work E061
Track Circuits, Disconnections B002
Track Circuits, Electrical Interference E001
Trackside Equipment, Recovery of Redundant Assets E053
Trackwork Associated with Switches and Crossings, D013
Temporary
Traction Return Current Values, Double Millivoltmeter U024
Training, New Products E011
Training, S Electrostatic Sensitive Devices E004
Transient Protection, Segregation of Wiring E005
Transparent electrostatic shielding bag E004
Transportation and Storage, Electrostatic Sensitive E004
Devices
Under-Rail Rail Bonding Unit U008
Universal Shunt Box U022
Unterminated and Disconnected Wires E052
Unwrapping, Wire Wrapped Connections U016
Updating of Records, Non-Conceptual Design D011
Use of Points when Not Connected to a SB/GF E054
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Subject Index
Description Section
User Worked Crossings, Security W001
Using Plant in the Vicinity of Overhead Wires W005
Using Test Meters, DC Electrified Lines X022
Version Control , Diagrams D025
Version Control, Site Records D031
Visiting Signal Boxes A011
Vital Reed, Electrical Interference E001
Voltage Separation, Segregation of Wiring E005
Warning Signs, Mobile Telephones E003
Washers, Fixings U003
Water Pipes and Sewers, Excavations W003
Weil's Disease (Leptospirosis) W004
Wire Connections, Screw Termination without a Crimp U014
Connector
Wire Connections, Soldered Spade Connectors for Relay U014
Plugboards
Wire Crimping, CTT RTB 510 U014
Wire Crimping, CTT RTB–510 Tool Pressure Adjustment U014
Wire Crimping, Examples of Crimp Terminals U014
Wire Crimping, Examples of Crimping Tools U014
Wire Crimping, Hellerman Mk.3/RS8 U014
Wire Crimping, Testing and Maintenance of Hand U014
Crimping Tools
Wire Wrapped Connections, Making a Joint U016
Wire Wrapped Connections, Requirements U016
Wire Wrapped Connections, Tools U016
Wire Wrapped Connections, Unwrapping U016
Wire/Cable Types, Circuit Diagrams D024
Wiring Symbols D023
Work that Can be Carried Out between Trains, B001
Permissible Work
Work that Can be Carried Out between Trains, Personnel B001
Protection
Working at Height W005
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Subject Index
Description Section
Working Environment, at Height W005
Working Environment, Confined Spaces W005
Working Environment, Connected Equipment W005
Working Environment, Portable Ladders W005
Working Environment, Signal Posts or Telegraph Poles W005
Working Environment, Using Plant in the Vicinity of W005
Overhead Wires
Working in Public Areas, Cathode Ray Tubes X011
Working on Axle Counter Equipment, Reset and B003
Restoration
Working on Connected Equipment W005
Working on Equipment, Altering or Repairing A017
Working on Equipment, Disconnection A017
Working on Equipment, Distant Signal Restriction A017
Working on Equipment, Lever Collars or Reminder A017
Appliances
Working on Equipment, Maintenance of Signalling A017
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Equipment
Working on Equipment, Seals A017
Working on Equipment, Temporary Approach Control A017
Links
Working on Equipment, Temporary or Emergency A017
Alterations
Working on Equipment, Testing of Signalling Apparatus A017
Working on Operational Equipment, Signalling M001
Maintenance
Working On or Near Electrical Equipment, Competency A012
Working on Signal Posts or Telegraph Poles W005
Works Testing, Disconnections B002
Worksite Hazards for S&T Staff W004
Wrapping Tools U016
END

Issue: 03
Date: Sept 2018
Definitions
A glossary of general signalling terms is given in

GK/GN0802. Those terms are not repeated here
except where they have been given a more
technical definition for use within this Handbook.
Any reference to source indicates that the definition
has been taken from an external document.
Term Definition
Adequate Ensuring that the driver’s view of a signal is
sighting not obstructed, e.g. by trees, bushes,
buildings or other structures, and can be
seen for the minimum reading time on
approach (see NR/SP/SIG/10157).
Alignment is detailed in Signalling
Maintenance Specification SG00.
Affected Lever, mechanical locking or lever lock that

lever/locking could be affected by the work undertaken.
The work could affect the integrity of the
locking, for example through the removal of
a locking mechanism, or a potential release
of the locking mechanism allowing a lever to
become free when it should be locked, or an
alteration to the settings and associated
locking, or any inadvertent alteration to the
mechanical locking.
Alterations Changes to existing installations (including

the provision of new signalling) which form
part or all of a self contained scheme. A
single alteration is by definition one which is
designed to be commissioned on a single
occasion.
Apparatus A product with an intrinsic function intended

for the end-user and supplied or taken into
service as a single commercial unit.
[source: EMC Regs - modified]
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Provided by IHS Markit under license with Network Rail Licensee=Capita Symonds to Capita property & infrastructur/5
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from
Not for
IHSResale, 09/19/2018 05:07:35 MDT
Issue: 03
Date: Sept 2018
Definitions
Term Definition
Apparatus case An apparatus housing which is intended for
unprotected outdoor use, is smaller than a
building or REB and is usually capable of
being transported as a made-up unit.
May also be known as an apparatus

cupboard.
Apparatus See apparatus case.

cupboard
Apparatus This is provided to house relays and / or

housing other equipment at lineside locations or
interlockings, and may consist of an
apparatus case, disconnection box,
equipment room, REB, signal box, control
centre, or other equipment building.
Application Document(s) specifying the constraints

criteria applied to the installation and maintenance
of a system or an item of equipment in order
that if can be guaranteed to deliver the
performance attributes stated in the system
or equipment specification.
Approval Authorisation of a product type for use (see

NR/L2/RSE/100) or, in the case of
infrastructure works, for scheme plan
acceptance or for construction (see
NR/L2/CIV/003 and NR/L2/SIG/11201).
See also product acceptance.
Aspect test See signal aspect test.
Assessment The undertaking of an investigation in order

to arrive at a judgement, based on evidence,
of the suitability of a product, competence of
a person or acceptability of a risk.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Not for
IHSResale, 09/19/2018 05:07:35 MDT
Issue: 03
Date: Sept 2018
Definitions
Term Definition
Automatic A signalling function that, under ordinary
function operation, is operated automatically by the
passage of trains. The function is generally
associated with a particular signal box from
which its operation is supervised, unless
some form of local monitoring is provided.
The state of the function when there are no

trains present is designated normal.
Back (B) contact A contact of a relay which is made when the

relay is released and broken when it is
operated.
Back feed An inadvertent feed which has arisen at an

intermediate point within a circuit due to the
uncontrolled combination of positions of
several pieces of control equipment.
Balise A track mounted spot transmission unit that

uses magnetic transponder technology. Its
function is to transmit/receive messages
to/from the train passing overhead. A TASS
balise is passive with no interface to a
Lineside Electronic Unit (LEU) and will
therefore only transmit the fixed telegram
stored in its memory. This data can only be
changed by reconfiguration.
Balise Provides all the necessary information to the

Positioning Form installer to allow the accurate trackside
(BPF) positioning and installation of the balise.
Balise Testing Provided to allow appropriate checks and

Form (BTF) tests associated with the balise to be
recorded and a record retained.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Block tests A test to ensure correct operation of

(various) specified block equipment.

Not for
IHSResale, 09/19/2018 05:07:35 MDT
Issue: 03
Date: Sept 2018
Definitions
Term Definition
Bonding plan A detailed plan of the track layout showing
individual rails and position of IRJs, together
with track circuit feed and relay connections
with polarities, cross bonds, structure bonds,
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
impedance bonds, etc., as applicable. This
term may also include track plans and
negative Bonding Plans in d.c. electrified
areas.
Brush A maintenance task to remove all loose dirt

from apparatus and foundations.
Cable function A test to ensure that each circuit in a cable

test functions correctly after work on that cable.
Change-over See dependent contact.

contact
Check A maintenance task to ensure correct, by

visual, audible and/or physical inspection for
alignment, obstruction, breakage, decay, or
obvious damage.
Circuit diagrams A collection of individual drawings showing

the equipment layout and circuit
arrangement associated with a location, an
interlocking or signal box.
Circuit function A test of each individual circuit to verify the

test presence of the necessary controls.
This test applies to signalling works testing.
Class I Electrical equipment that requires the

equipment connection of the exposed-conductive-parts
to a protective conductor connected to
earth, to ensure personal safety. See BS
2754.

Not for
IHSResale, 09/19/2018 05:07:35 MDT
Issue: 03
Date: Sept 2018
Definitions
Term Definition
Class II Electrical equipment with double or
equipment reinforced insulation, either to prevent
contact with exposed-conductive-parts, or to
ensure no contact between such parts and
live parts. The insulation is not therefore to
be pierced by screws. Such equipment is
never connected to earth. See BS 2754.
Clean A maintenance task to remove moisture,

dirt, corrosion or roughness e.g. from
contact faces.
Closure list Final Index of design details issued to the

tester in charge.
Common cause A failure which is the result of an event(s)

failure (CCF) which, because of dependencies, causes a
coincidence of failure states of components
in two or more separate channels of a
redundancy system, leading to the defined
system failing to perform its intended
function (source: BS EN 61508)
Competent A person who has the qualifications or

person certification, experience and ability
necessary to perform a particular task.
Concentrator A facility to connect several telephone

circuits to one terminal and thus avoid the
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
need for a telephone instrument for each

circuit.
Configuration A procedure to ensure that the functional

control and physical characteristics of a design or
product are adequately identified and that
changes to these characteristics are
controlled and traceable throughout the life-
cycle of the design or product, by recording
its version or modification state.
Also known as version control.
Configuration The structuring and interconnection of the

(system) hardware and software of a system.
Not for
IHSResale, 09/19/2018 05:07:35 MDT
Issue: 03
Date: Sept 2018
Definitions
Term Definition
Construction The carrying out of any building, civil
engineering or other engineering work,
particularly that which falls within the scope
of the Construction (Design and
Management) Regulations.
Also know as installation.
Continuity test A test to ensure the continuity and

correspondence of each individual wire or
cable core shown on the wiring diagrams.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Control point A signal box (including control centre), gate
box or ground frame (including ground
switch panel or shunting frame).
Control table test A test to ensure that each signalling function

conforms to all the requirements specified in
the approved Control Tables.
Controlled A signalling function that, under ordinary

function operation, is controlled from the signal box
(or other control point) to which the function
is allocated and may be interlocked with
other signalling functions.
Correlation check The comparison of the configuration and

version status of a system with the design
records to ensure that the two are in
agreement.
Correspondence Ensuring that the following all agree:

1 The controlling device, e.g. relay or SSI
telegram, AND
2 The operated function, AND
3 The associated signalbox indication(s),
e.g. repeat relay or SSI telegram.
Custodian (of The organisation appointed by the

records) infrastructure controller to take care of
master records.
Copyright Network Rail Also known as records custodian.
Not for
IHSResale, 09/19/2018 05:07:35 MDT
Issue: 03
Date: Sept 2018
Definitions
Term Definition
Cut-section A method of reducing the continuous length
(track circuit) of a track circuit by the use of individual
track circuits, each one controlling a
common final track repeat relay, or
equivalent. These are indicated as one
track circuit on the signaller’s display.
This is also known as a multi-section track

circuit.
Data (signalling) Site specific geographical and control

information in an electronic form, which may
be of a safety-critical nature or otherwise. In
order to be used in an electronic system or
sub-system, data from master data files is
usually permanently stored in an EPROM
(erasable programmable read only
memory).
Data link A serial data transmission system.
In SSI systems, this refers to the link

between the interlocking and the lineside
location and may take the form of a
baseband unmodulated trackside data link
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
cable, or a long line link using standard

telecommunications PCM equipment.
Internal data link cables are also provided

between the modules in an SSI cubicle and,
where applicable, between modules in
adjacent interlocking cubicles.
De-energised See released.

(relay)
Degraded The state of the part of the railway system

conditions when it continues to operate in a restricted
manner due to the failure of one or more
components

Not for
IHSResale, 09/19/2018 05:07:35 MDT
Issue: 03
Date: Sept 2018
Definitions
Term Definition
Dependent A contact set which consists of a front
contact contact, a back contact and one arm shared
between them, with not more than one
contact path made at any one time.
Also referred to as change-over contact.
Design A wide term including specification and the

production of drawings, design details and
bills of quantity (including specification of
systems or equipment).
Design authority Network Rail or such other organisation as

is contracted by Network Rail to undertake
specified design work on a system or on the
infrastructure.
Design details Any plans, control tables, engineering

(signalling) details and data, which are required to
sufficiently define signalling systems and
equipment for production or record
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
purposes.
Design records Design Details defining the current state of

the infrastructure.
Destructive test A test which may alter the electrical,

mechanical or physical state of the
equipment.
Difference list A computer/data processor generated print

out (produced by a validated software
program) which details the data differences
between two versions of a software program
or data.
Disarrangement The interlocking can no longer be relied on

of interlocking to operate safely because of the removal or
disturbance of component parts.
Disconnection An apparatus housing for unprotected

box outdoor use, which is intended to contain
mainly terminations and is commonly
smaller than an apparatus case.
Not for
IHSResale, 09/19/2018 05:07:35 MDT
Issue: 03
Date: Sept 2018
Definitions
Term Definition
Double-cut The inclusion of controls in both feed and
(circuit) return legs in order to mitigate the risk
associated with a false feed or earth fault.
Drop away (DA) The maximum voltage applied to an

voltage (relay) operated relay coil at which the last front
contact breaks.
Drop shunt The maximum value of non-inductive

resistance which, when placed across the
rails, causes the track relay to fully open its
front contact.
Drop-away time The time between the application of a shunt

(track circuit) to the rails and the front contacts of track
relay (TR) fully opening.
The converse is pick-up time.
Dust A maintenance task involving a light dusting

of apparatus with brush or duster e.g. relay
tops.
Earth fault Unintentional contact between a circuit

conductor and a conductive part at earth
potential, by which an earth fault current
may flow.
Earth fault A permanent device, wired to the busbars,

--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
detector that will detect an earth fault on the power

supply and give an alarm that will alert the
maintainer.
Also known as earth leakage detector.
Earth fault loop The impedance of the earth fault current

impedance loop starting and ending at the point of earth
fault (source: BS 7671 extract)
Earth leakage See earth fault detector.

detector
Earth test A test to ensure that leakage current to

earth is below specified limits.

Not for
IHSResale, 09/19/2018 05:07:35 MDT
Issue: 03
Date: Sept 2018
Definitions
Term Definition
Emergency A current unforeseen or unplanned event
situation which has life threatening or extreme loss
implications and requires immediate
attention (e.g. a fire)
Energised See operated.
Engineering Design details from which a signalling

details system is constructed.
(signalling)
Engineers Line A unique alphanumeric code used by

Reference (ELR) Network Rail to define each route segment
of the network.
Equipotential Electrical connection maintaining various

bonding exposed-conductive-parts and extraneous-
conductive-parts at substantially the same
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
potential. It need not include a direct

connection to earth.
(source: BS 7671 augmented)
Examine A maintenance task involving a close

physical inspection of apparatus and
connections for wear, security, corrosion,
deterioration decay and damage.
Exposed- A conductive part of equipment that can be

conductive-part touched and which is not a live part but
which may become live under fault
conditions. (source: BS7671)
External (circuit Any circuit/power supply that fails to wholly

or power supply) meet the internal criteria.
Extra-low voltage Normally not exceeding 50V a.c. or 120V

ripple free d.c. (source: BS 7671)
Extraneous- A conductive part liable to introduce a

conductive-part potential, generally earth potential, and not
forming part of the electrical installation, e.g.
structural metalwork.
(source: BS7671 augmented)

Not for
IHSResale, 09/19/2018 05:07:35 MDT
Issue: 03
Date: Sept 2018
Definitions
Term Definition
Extraneous An external light source affecting a signal
lighting aspect, e.g. from an open signal head door
or nearby street lamps.
Fail-safe A concept which is incorporated into the

design of a product such that in the event of
failure, it enters or remains in a safe state.
(source: BS EN 50129)
Final functional A test carried out immediately prior to

test “signing-in” for operational use to ensure all
equipment is fully connected and operates
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
correctly.
FREDDY Flange Reading Electronic Detector

Designed at York.
FREDDY treadles are not approved for use

on Network Rail Infrastructure and will be
removed in due course.
Free-wired A relay interlocking that comprises

interlocking individually wired relays, rather than pre-
wired geographical sets of relays.
Frequency A data transmission system that uses

division multiplex unique frequencies to separate channels
(FDM) over a single pair of conductors.
Front (F) contact A contact which is made when the relay is

operated and broken when it is released.
Functional The connection to earth necessary for the

earthing proper functioning of electrical equipment,
i.e. an earth return. This may be used for
telecommunications purposes, but is no
longer permitted for new signalling circuits.
Conductors for functional earthing are
identified by the colour cream.
(source: BS 7671 augmented)
Gauge or Test A maintenance task to examine apparatus

for correct functioning and adjustment within
the specification, by operating or by using
the appropriate calibrated gauge, tool or
instrument.
Not for
IHSResale, 09/19/2018 05:07:35 MDT
Issue: 03
Date: Sept 2018
Definitions
Term Definition
Global A non-railway system used to determine
Positioning geographical vicinity.
System (GPS)
Guaranteed See secure power supply.

power supply
Independent Independent checking means that one

checking person undertakes the work and another
person checks it. In some cases, the work
may allow two staff to work on two tasks and
then change over to check or test each
other’s work (as long as both are suitably
competent).
Maintenance Testing may often be quite

interactive within the guidelines of
independence.
Infrastructure The organisation responsible for the control

controller and operation of the railway, including track,
structures, plant and control equipment. An
Infrastructure Controller may either own or
lease the infrastructure concerned.
Infrastructure The rail engineer responsible for co-

engineer ordinating on-site engineering support.
Infrastructure The infrastructure maintainer is responsible

maintainer for carrying out maintenance activities on
railway infrastructure, including signalling
and operational telecommunications
equipment.
Inspection A visual check to ensure that the specified

equipment has been installed securely,
undamaged and in accordance with the
design details.
Installation That part of the signalling system associated

(infrastructure) with the infrastructure at a particular place.
Installation See construction.

(function)
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Not for
IHSResale, 09/19/2018 05:07:35 MDT
Issue: 03
Date: Sept 2018
Definitions
Term Definition
Insulated block See insulated rail joint (IRJ).
joint (IBJ)
Insulated rail A method of joining rail ends together whilst

joint (IRJ) maintaining electrical insulation between
them.
An alternative non-preferred term is

insulated block joint (IBJ).
Insulation test A test to ensure that a cable, wire, spare

core or other equipment meets the required
insulation criteria.
Interlocking The (generally dedicated) building housing

(building) the interlocking system, where separate
from the signal box (or other control point).
Interlocking The equipment that performs the role

--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(equipment) required of the interlocking system.
Interlocking The safety-critical locking provided between

(system) signalling functions in accordance with
control tables.
Interlocking area The area of railway controlled by a particular

interlocking, extended up to a boundary with
each other adjacent interlocking controlled
by the same or another signal box.
Internal (circuit) A circuit that does not leave the apparatus

housing in which it originates and which is
fed from a busbar which feeds only internal
circuits. This includes the feed to an
isolated transformer supplying an external
circuit. Circuits that extend between
adjacent apparatus housings may be
considered to be internal if they are run in a
protective non-conducting duct and are
judged to be away from any environment
that might be susceptible to earth faults.
Internal (power A power supply feeding only internal circuits.

supply)
Also known as local power supply
Not for
IHSResale, 09/19/2018 05:07:35 MDT
Issue: 03
Date: Sept 2018
Definitions
Term Definition
Joint hopping Where fast moving short vehicles pass from
one track circuit to the next, the difference
between the pick-up and drop-away times
can cause the vehicle to momentarily be
undetected.
Also known as light engine syndrome or

track jumping.
Jumper An interconnecting cable (commonly single

core) between two termination points within
an apparatus housing.
Jumper cable An interconnecting cable (commonly single

(track circuit / core) between two pieces of rail that are not
traction) adjacent, for track circuit or traction
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
purposes. This includes midpoint
connections to impedance bonds.
Lamp proving A neutral d.c. relay designed to operate from

relay the current supplied to signal lamps and to
release when lamp or lamps burn out.
Some relays incorporate a bridge rectifier to
operate from a.c. lamp currents.
Left hand relay The left hand half of a twin relay as viewed
from the front. In a 930 series twin relay this
controls the contacts in banks C and D.
Less-vital Safety-related but not safety-critical.
Light engine See joint hopping.

syndrome
Like for like The removal and restoration of an item of

replacement equipment, including a cable, in a previously
working and commissioned system where
the work does not change the design. This
may involve restoring the original item of
equipment or replacing it with an
operationally equivalent new item.
Line circuit An external relay circuit that is not a

trackside circuit, i.e. a circuit that runs
between apparatus housings, but does not
go with
Provided by IHS Markit under license via Network
trackside
Rail equipment.
Licensee=Capita Symonds to Capita property & infrastructur/5
Not for
IHSResale, 09/19/2018 05:07:35 MDT
Issue: 03
Date: Sept 2018
Definitions
Term Definition
Local panel A panel (sometimes simplified) provided at
the interlocking and capable of being used
to take over control from the main panel at
the signal box. It may also be used as a
maintainer’s monitoring panel, when the
operating function is not in use.
Local power See internal power supply.

supply
Local signal A competent signal engineer with line

engineer management responsibilities, such as the
S&TME.
Location A group of all signalling lineside apparatus

housings (including buildings) at a particular
site and the equipment contained therein.
(This excludes apparatus housings that
perform a main interlocking function,
although some interlocking local to ground
frames or level crossings may be included.)
Alternatively known as lineside location.
Low voltage Normally exceeding extra-low voltage, but

not exceeding 1000V a.c. or 1500V d.c.
between conductors, or 600V a.c. or 900V
d.c. between conductors and earth.
(source: BS 7671)
Lubricate A maintenance task to oil and grease parts

to reduce friction or provide protection.
Surplus lubricant to be wiped off.
Main cable A twin or multicore lineside cable carrying

signalling functions or power supplies
between apparatus housings.
Main earthing The terminal or bar provided for the

terminal (MET) connection of protective conductors,
including equipotential bonding conductors,
and conductors for functional earthing if any,
to the means of earthing. (source: BS 7671)
--``,,,,``,`,``,,

Not for
IHSResale, 09/19/2018 05:07:35 MDT
Issue: 03
Date: Sept 2018
Definitions
Term Definition
Maintainer’s An indication panel situated at the
monitoring panel interlocking that repeats the indications sent
to the signaller and allows the maintainer to
observe the state of the interlocking. It also
indicates various fault conditions. This may
be combined with a test panel.
Maintainer’s This consists of a VDU, keyboard and

terminal printer connected to a solid state
interlocking, or an IECC system monitor
sub-system. It is used to obtain essential
fault diagnostic information and also acts as
an interface with the system to enable
restrictive controls on the equipment to be
set.
Also known as technician’s terminal.
Maintenance The combination of all technical and

administrative actions, including supervision
actions, intended to retain a product in, or
restore it to, a state in which it can perform a
required function, i.e. prevent or rectify a
failure. (source: BS EN 50126 augmented)
See also maintenance task.
Maintenance 1) Design records kept on site for

--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
records maintenance purposes.

Also known as site records.
2) Records of maintenance that has been

undertaken.
Maintenance task The individual task which is carried out in

order to achieve the required level of safety
and reliability whilst optimising the useful
working life of an item of infrastructure.
(source: NR/L2/SIG/10661)
An interval between services that meets the

requirement for signalling infrastructure
maintenance is specified in
NR/L2/SIG/10661.
Not for
IHSResale, 09/19/2018 05:07:35 MDT
Issue: 03
Date: Sept 2018
Definitions
Term Definition
Maintenance A person certificated as competent in the
tester application of Maintenance Testing.
Master record The certified signalling design record from

which duplicates are obtained for issue.
Mechanical A test to ensure that each mechanical lever

locking function is locked in its correct position.
test
Mentor A person appointed as guide and councillor

to a Trainee in a specific competence. The
Mentor retains responsibility for the
Trainee's actions in the Mentored
Competence, but the Trainee is able to gain
the necessary experience under field
conditions. The Mentor ensures the safety
and integrity of the signalling system.
Meshed circuit Complex circuitry feeding more than one

relay, where the same could be achieved by
independent circuits, thereby requiring
duplication of contacts. Not all paths in a
meshed circuit are applicable to all relays.
Method A comprehensive step-by-step plan of how

--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
statement the work is to be safely carried out in order

to ensure that all hazards are considered
and risks minimised.
Missing Equipment which was previously working

equipment and which is physically missing or separated
from its normal position.
Mod state See modification status.
Modification The detail that defines the particular version

status of the design or specification, appropriate to
the functional and physical characteristics of
an item of equipment or system, and is
recorded under configuration control
procedures.
Colloquially known as mod state.

Not for
IHSResale, 09/19/2018 05:07:35 MDT
Issue: 03
Date: Sept 2018
Definitions
Term Definition
Modifications Changes to the design details which are
required to be carried out after they have
been officially issued, usually as a result of
installation, testing and commissioning
activities.
Monitored, local Checked by the observation of driver's

(level crossing) indicator which provides the driver with the
status of equipment.
See also supervised (level crossing).
Monitored, Checked by the observation of signaller's

remote (level indications which provide the signaller with
crossing) the status of equipment.
See also supervised (level crossing).

--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Multi-section See cut-section.

(track circuit)
Non-conceptual Work which is based directly on an

work applicable existing proven design and does
not introduce new design features to a
system.
This includes work items that facilitate

maintenance, or performance
improvements, whilst maintaining similar
functionality.
Non-destructive A test which may involve:

test • visually examining signalling equipment,
• taking measurements or readings
without disconnecting the equipment or
disturbing the electrical characteristics
of the system.
Non-safety- A relay contact that is not a safety contact.

contact This includes metal to metal contacts for
medium duty use, where both elements are
made of silver, silver cadmium oxide, or
60/40 silver palladium.

Not for
IHSResale, 09/19/2018 05:07:35 MDT
Issue: 03
Date: Sept 2018
Definitions
Term Definition
Non-safety- A signalling function or sub-system where
related operational safety and the integrity of the
interlocking are not directly affected.
Manual intervention, where a failure would
be noticed, may be part of the process.
Also known as non-vital.
Non-vital See non-safety-related.
Normal (function) Position of a lever when it is fully back in the

lever frame (away from the operator). The
non-operated or quiescent state of a two-
state system. In the case of points, the
normal position is defined on the signalling
plan and is generally that which will give the
maximum protection, or otherwise the most
regularly used position.
The converse is reverse.
Note (failure Clearly record the facts when they are

investigation reported or discovered. Notes should be
records) readable and retained for future reference.
Operate time The time interval between the energisation

(relay) of the relay coil and the first front contact
making. In the case of a specification
BR949 relay, it is the time between the
energisation of the relay coil and the first
back contact breaking.
The converse is release time.
Operate voltage The minimum voltage applied to a released

(relay) relay coil at which the last front contact
makes.
Also known as pick-up (pu) voltage.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Not for
IHSResale, 09/19/2018 05:07:35 MDT
Issue: 03
Date: Sept 2018
Definitions
Term Definition
Operated (relay) The state of a relay when the armature is
energised, picked up (PU), or latched, all
front contacts are made and all back
contacts are broken.
Also known as energised, and colloquially

as ‘picked’ or ‘up’. The converse is
Released.
Operationally The replacement item of equipment is

equivalent functionally identical to the item it replaces.
Out of use Non-operational equipment that is still

connected to the infrastructure.
See also spare.
Output This includes all relevant indications,

displays, communications links, power
drives, etc.
Pick-up (PU) The minimum value of resistance between

shunt the two running rails at which the track relay
just closes its front contacts.
Pick-up (PU) See operate voltage.

voltage (relay)
Pick-up time The time between the removal of a shunt to

(track circuit) the rails and the first front contact of the
track relay (TR) making.
The converse is drop-away time.
Pin-code See registration pin-code.
Plugboard The permanent mounting block and

termination for external wiring, for use with
plug-in equipment.
Plug-in The attribute of an item of electrical

equipment which can be replaced without
disconnecting any wiring.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Not for
IHSResale, 09/19/2018 05:07:35 MDT
Issue: 03
Date: Sept 2018
Definitions
Term Definition
Point detection & A test to ensure the required
correspondence correspondence between points and their
test controls and indications is achieved and
ensure detection contacts are effective.
Polarised circuit A circuit where the resulting operation is

dependent on the polarity or phase angle of
the feed.
Pre-wired See relocatable equipment building.

equipment
building
Primary function The relay by which the logic required to

relay control a signalling function is brought
together. It is the first relay in a chain that
directly controls all safety-critical signalling
functions. it is the only function relay which
has back contacts valid for use in safety-
critical functions.
Principles test A test to ensure that the signalling system

provided conforms to Railway Group
Standards and Statutory Requirements, and
is fit for purpose.
Product Authorisation of a product type for use. See

acceptance NR/L2/RSE/100.
Protect A maintenance task to apply approved

--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
protecting agents.
Public A special telephone system for use at level

emergency crossings, which includes provision for
telephone system proving that handset connections are intact
(PETS) and also for the transmission of level
crossing status indications. The speech
path has priority over other facilities.
Pulse code A serial data transmission system by which

modulation many channels of information are passed
(PCM) over a data link, by use of a multiplexer.
Not for
IHSResale, 09/19/2018 05:07:35 MDT
Issue: 03
Date: Sept 2018
Definitions
Term Definition
Random Failures occurring at random times, which
hardware failure result from a variety of degraded
mechanism in the hardware.
Note 1) There are many degradation

mechanisms occurring at different rates in
different components and since
manufacturing tolerances cause
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
components to fail due to these
mechanisms after different times in
operation, failures of a total equipment
comprising many components occur at
predictable rates but at unpredictable (i.e.
random) times.
Note 2) A major distinguishing feature

between random hardware failures and
systematic failures is that system failure
rates (or other appropriate measure), arising
from random hardware failures, can be
predicted with reasonable accuracy but
systematic failures, by their very nature
cannot be accurately predicted. That is,
system failure rates arising from random
hardware failures can be quantified with
reasonable accuracy but those arising from
systematic failures cannot be accurately
quantified (source: BS EN 61508)
Record Information bearing media, irrespective of

date or physical format, created or received
in the course of carrying out the duties and
functions of an undertaking, and
subsequently retained by the undertaking or
its successors as evidence, as a reference
source, or to meet legal or regulatory
obligations.
Records See custodian (of records).

custodian
Rectify To make good any defects encountered.

Not for
IHSResale, 09/19/2018 05:07:35 MDT
Issue: 03
Date: Sept 2018
Definitions
Term Definition
Registration pin- A series of locating pins assembled in a
code unique pattern to prevent equipment being
incorrectly used. The unique pattern also
acts as a means of identification for a
specific style and variant of a relay.
The term registration pin-code is commonly

abbreviated to pin-code.
Release time The time interval between the removal of

(relay) the supply (at rated voltage) to the relay coil
and the last front contact breaking.
The converse is operate time.
Released (relay) The state of a relay when the armature is

de-energised, dropped away (DA), or
unlatched, all back contacts are made and
all front contacts are broken.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Also known as de-energised and colloquially

as ‘dropped’ or ‘down’.
The converse is operated.
Relocatable Apparatus housing to specification BR 1615

equipment or equivalent.
building (REB)
Also known as walk-in location or pre-wired
equipment building.
Reset Placing a system into a state which

corresponds with the actual state of the
railway prior to restoration into service, fault
finding or testing.
For an axle counter, this is the action of

setting the number of axles registered in a
track section to zero.

Not for
IHSResale, 09/19/2018 05:07:35 MDT
Issue: 03
Date: Sept 2018
Definitions
Term Definition
Residual voltage The voltage remaining across the rails or
relay of a track circuit after the feed has
been disconnected.
It may be caused by mutual interference

between adjacent single rail track circuits,
the battery effect of the track formation,
cathodic protection measures, or d.c.
traction return or other stray currents.
Restoration Accepting reset systems back into service

by the signaller after maintenance, failure or
(for axle counters) miscount.
Reverse Position of a lever when it is fully out of the

(function) lever frame (towards the operator). The
operated state of a two-state system. In the
case of points, the reverse position is merely
the opposite of the normal position.
The converse is normal.
Right hand relay The right hand half of a twin relay as viewed
from the front. In a 930 series twin relay this
controls the contacts in banks A and B.
Right side failure A failure which does not result in the

--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(RSF) protection normally provided by the

signalling system being reduced.
The converse is wrong side failure.
Risk based Risk based maintenance specifications have

maintenance been developed from detailed failure mode
studies, deterioration analysis, consequence
assessments and various trials around the
country, to allow differing maintenance
intervals depending on the risk classification
of the asset.
They are for use only where specifically

authorised.

Not for
IHSResale, 09/19/2018 05:07:35 MDT
Issue: 03
Date: Sept 2018
Definitions
Term Definition
Safe state Any one of the following:
• the state of the last valid request at the
interlocking; or
• correspondence with the state of the
trackside equipment; or
• the most restrictive state.
Safety contact A relay contact that is specified for safety

purposes in the 930 series specifications.
These are non-weld metal to carbon
contacts, generally silver to silver
impregnated graphite (SIG) for ordinary use.
Safety-critical Carries direct responsibility for safety.

--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Also known as vital.
Safety-critical See wrong side failure.

failure
Safety-critical A function or subsystem where operational

(function or safety or the integrity of the interlocking is
subsystem) directly affected.
Also known as vital.
Safety-related Carries responsibility for safety (direct or

indirect) (source: BS EN 50129)
Safety-related, A function or subsystem which may be

but not safety- protected by the interlocking, but where
critical (function human intervention is part of the process
or subsystem) and misleading information could create an
unsafe situation or allow one to remain
unnoticed.
Also known as less-vital.
Scrape A maintenance task to scrape all dirt and

surplus grease off apparatus and
foundations, e.g. bed timbers.

Not for
IHSResale, 09/19/2018 05:07:35 MDT
Issue: 03
Date: Sept 2018
Definitions
Term Definition
Secure power A power supply system that can be relied
supply upon to keep certain safety-critical signalling
functions operating for a predetermined
minimum time, in the event of a total failure
of the main incoming supply.
Also known as guaranteed power supply.
Signal aspect A test to ensure that only the correct

test aspects and indications as specified in the
approved control tables and signal aspect
sequence charts are displayed to the driver.
Signal sighting A form that depicts the profile, location and

form other details of each signal as agreed by the
signal sighting committee.
Signalling Final discrete component of a signalling

function system listed on control tables with a unique
identity (such as signals, points, train
detection devices, releases and level
crossing barriers) and the circuitry or logic
by which it is controlled an / or proved.
Signalling functions are allocated (as

defined by the control tables) to a specific
interlocking controlled by a particular signal
box (or other control point) and are given a
unique identity within a particular signaller’s
area.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Not for
IHSResale, 09/19/2018 05:07:35 MDT
Issue: 03
Date: Sept 2018
Definitions
Term Definition
Signalling system Equipment, circuitry and software
associated with:
• lineside signals;
• point operation;
• level crossings;
• train detection;
• trainborne equipment conveying
information about the state of the line;
• operational telecommunications
(excluding electrification control
systems and electrification telephones);
and
• fixed trackside safety systems.
Single cut The inclusion of controls in either the feed or

(circuit) return leg, but not both, to be used only
where there is no significant risk of false
feeds or earth faults. (See double cut.)
Site records See maintenance records.
Slow acting relay A relay in which both operation and release

are intentionally delayed.
Slow to operate A relay in which the operation is intentionally

relay delayed and the operate time is significantly
longer than the release time.
Slow to release A relay in which the release is intentionally

--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
relay delayed and the release time is significantly

longer than the operate time.

Not for
IHSResale, 09/19/2018 05:07:35 MDT
Issue: 03
Date: Sept 2018
Definitions
Term Definition
Software Any item of electronic equipment which is
controlled controlled by software to enable it to perform
system (SCS) the required activities. Examples include:
general purpose microprocessor systems
(e.g. proprietary Personal Computers),
dedicated systems using microprocessors or
Digital Signal Processors.
Note that a SCS may be composed of

separate items, which are referred to in this
document as “the parts of the SCS”. Note:
Application Specific Integrated Circuits
(ASICs) have similar characteristics to
software; for example, they are not readily
visible to the tester, they may be created by
software controlled machines, and they may
themselves require configuration by data.
Therefore, the term SCS shall be taken to
include ASICs, and consideration shall be
given to applying these requirements to
machines which contain no software, but do
contain ASICs.
SPAD Signal Passed at Danger. The term used to

describe an incident when a train has
passed a stop signal at danger without
authority.
SPAR Signals Passed At Red – The term used to

--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
describe an incident when a train has

passed a Stop signal at Danger when it was
previously shown a Proceed aspect or a
train or vehicle that has run away.
Spare Equipment not connected to any part of the

infrastructure. See also out of use.
Specialist Examination or monitoring by a competent,

investigation independent signalling and
telecommunications specialist capable of
undertaking comprehensive technical
investigation of equipment and systems,
where necessary using complex
instrumentation.
Not for
IHSResale, 09/19/2018 05:07:35 MDT
Issue: 03
Date: Sept 2018
Definitions
Term Definition
Stagger The phase or polarity difference between
(electrical) one track circuit and the next, or between
the rails on either side of an IRJ within one
track circuit.
Stagger Occurs where two IRJs in a pair of rails are

(physical) not exactly opposite each other, thus
creating a dead section between track
circuits or within a track circuit.
State (of a Position or action of the equipment.

function) Examples of complementary states are:
operated / released, normal / reverse, on /
off, raised / lowered, locked / free, enabled
/ inhibited, energised / de-energised.
In data driven systems this is stored as

variable data.
State (of the Configuration of an installation defined by

infrastructure) the current design records.
State (of the The functional position of trackside

railway) equipment which should correspond to the
state of the controlling device and the signal
box indication.
Strap and A Circuit Function Test where the presence

function test and operation of each individual contact is
verified by the application of a test strap.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Supervised (level Checked by visual observation, either

crossing) directly or by use of CCTV.
See also monitored (level crossing).
Supervisor A person with appropriate engineering

supervisory responsibility for technicians.
(This term includes those formerly known as
Signalling Maintenance Assistants.)
Supervisory Control or indication circuit, particularly in

(circuit) respect of electric traction power supplies.
Not for
IHSResale, 09/19/2018 05:07:35 MDT
Issue: 03
Date: Sept 2018
Definitions
Term Definition
Systematic Failures due to errors (including mistakes or
failures acts of omission) in any safety life-cycle
activity which cause it to fail under some
particular combination of inputs or under
some particular environmental condition.
Systematic failures could arise in any safety
life-cycle phase.
Examples of systematic failure include:

Systematic failures due to errors in the
safety requirements specification;
design, manufacture, installation, operation
of the hardware;
design, implementation etc. of the software.
Tail cable A cable between trackside or on-track

signalling equipment and other such
equipment or a lineside apparatus housing.
For track circuits, see also track cable.
Technician A person with technical competency to work

(signalling) on signalling equipment, under the direction
of a supervisor.
Technician’s See maintainer’s terminal.

terminal
Temporary The short term reallocation of

diversion of cores/contacts or emergency repositioning
circuits of an item of equipment which has been
operating correctly.
Temporary work Alterations which remain in use for a limited

--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
period of time.
Terminated A wire that is finally connected in its allotted

position.
Test Ensure correct, by measurement using test

equipment, gauge or tool or by operation.
Not for
IHSResale, 09/19/2018 05:07:35 MDT
Issue: 03
Date: Sept 2018
Definitions
Term Definition
Test panel A control panel provided at the interlocking
for testing or maintenance purposes. It may
be provided temporarily for a commissioning
or the function may be performed by the
local panel.
Through circuit An external circuit drawn in entirety from

supply to destination.
Through test A test to ensure that each individual circuit

between the supply source and the final
control function operates and is installed
throughout as shown in the approved design
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
details.
Time division A non-safety-critical serial data transmission

multiplex (TDM) system that addresses each channel in turn
and converts it into a unique digital code. It
is generally used to transmit operating
controls and indications between a signal
box and interlockings.
Top-nutting Top-nutting is the connection of temporary

or stagework cables or wires to the top of
one side of a terminal strip with the links
between the terminal columns removed, so
as to interlink with existing circuitry beneath.
Track jumping See joint hopping.
Train operations The national computer data system for

processing management of train operations. This is a
system (TOPS) real-time network that tracks train
movements and formations, vehicle
identities and goods commodities. It
provides input to the national train running
system operating on TOPS (TRUST).
Also known as total operating and

processing system.
Track cable A track circuit tail cable which connects

directly to the rails.
Not for
IHSResale, 09/19/2018 05:07:35 MDT
Issue: 03
Date: Sept 2018
Definitions
Term Definition
Track jumping Occurs when a fast moving vehicle passes
over a very short track circuit (or a short arm
of a longer track circuit) and fails to de-
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
energise the track relay.
Trackside circuit An external circuit run to, or via, an item of

trackside or on-track signalling equipment in
a tail cable.
Train register This also includes any other book or form

prescribed for the purposes of recording
times and exceptional occurrences.
Type approval See product acceptance.
Uninterruptible A power supply with a secondary source

power supply which is capable of providing an
(UPS) uninterrupted changeover in the event of a
failure of the incoming supply. It generally
consists of low maintenance cells, a
charger, voltage regulator, and monitoring,
changeover and bypass devices.
Verification Confirmation by examination and provision

of objective evidence that the specified
requirements have been fulfilled.
Version control See configuration control.
Vital See safety-critical.
Walk-in location See relocatable equipment building.
Wash A maintenance task to remove

contaminated oils, greases and dirt by
applying an approved cleaning agent, or by
using a detergent and water, and then
drying.
Wipe A maintenance task to rub apparatus with a

cloth so as to remove dirt, grease etc.

Not for
IHSResale, 09/19/2018 05:07:35 MDT
Issue: 03
Date: Sept 2018
Definitions
Term Definition
Wire count A visual examination to ensure that the
specified number of conductors is securely
connected to each terminating point as
shown on the wiring diagram and/or contact
analysis, and that the conductors are
correctly labelled.
Works tester A person certificated as competent in the

application of Works Testing.
Wrong side A failure which reduces the protection

failure (WSF) normally provided by the signalling
infrastructure and increases the risk of an
incident. (Source: NR/L2/SIG/10047)
Also known as safety-critical failure.

--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
The converse is right side failure.
WSF protected A WSF where another part of the Signalling

Infrastructure system provides an
acceptable level of protection.
(Source: NR/L2/SIG/10047)
WSF unprotected A WSF where no other part of the Signalling

Infrastructure system provides an
acceptable level of protection.
(Source: NR/L2/SIG/10047)
END

Not for
IHSResale, 09/19/2018 05:07:35 MDT
Issue: 03
Date: Sept 2018
Briefing of Standards
All staff shall be briefed on the standards and work

instructions that are applicable to their duties, including
revisions. Managers shall confirm that those standards
that require a change in working practice are clearly
understood, e.g. by means of a question and answer
session, or discussion with feedback.
Staff should generally receive a verbal brief prior to the
compliance date, but, when this is not reasonably
practicable, written briefs can be used.
Managers shall keep a record of all staff that are briefed

and rearrange catch-up sessions for those unable to
attend.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Arrangements to brief those staff returning from long

term leave/sickness shall be put in place.
Special briefings might be necessary before particular
projects or activities are undertaken.
The applicable standards shall be made available at a
site that staff can access regularly and kept up to date.
END

Not for
IHSResale, 09/19/2018 05:07:35 MDT
Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Distribution of Essential Standards
Certain publications that provide essential safety

information appertaining to a role or duty may be
required to be issued to staff in a controlled manner.
Duties shall be assessed to determine which
publications, or parts thereof, are applicable and which
are essential.
A suitable method of availability or distribution shall be
selected that is commensurate with the degree of
applicability and will allow timely issue of amendments
and revisions. For example, it might be determined that
a certain group of staff should carry with them Rule Book
modules G1, G2 & T6 and the Personal Track Safety
Handbook when on or near the track, but have access to
the full Rule Book and local Sectional Appendix in the
depot library, or on the company intranet.
These central documents must be updated from the
Weekly Operating Notice, Periodical Operating Notice or
Rule Book module AM, as applicable. Personal
documents may need to be updated, depending on the
duties being undertaken.
Further Information
GE/RT8000 Rule Book
GE/RT8001 Changes to Specified Operations
Publications
GE/RT8004 Local Operations Instructions
GE/RT8051 Rule Book – Module Selection
GO/RT3209 Format And Content Of The Weekly
Operating Notice
GO/RT3210 Format And Content Of The Periodical
Operating Notice
RT3170 Personal Track Safety Handbook
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Definition of Safety-Critical Work
1 Activities that are Always Safety-Critical

Safety-critical work covered by the Railways (Safety
Critical Work) Regulations 1994 (RSCW), which imposes
requirements for competency and hours of work,
includes the signalling activities listed below.
Similar definitions apply to safety-critical work covered
by section 27 of the Transport and Works Act 1992,
which prohibits such work whilst under the influence of
drugs or alcohol.
a) Installing signalling components:
Where the activities can have a direct impact on the
operation of the signalling and the work is not
inspected and signed off by another person, the
individual is doing safety-critical work and is
covered by RSCW Regulation 2(1)(b)(i)(bb). Where
a supervisor or other competent person checks and
takes responsibility for the work, this person is
doing the safety-critical work and is covered by the
RSCW Regulations, instead of the individual who is
doing the work.
b) Testing signalling:
doing the work.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
c) Maintaining, repairing or altering signalling

equipment:
doing the work.
d) Inspecting signalling equipment:
Inspection, including the inspection as part of the
investigation of an incident, may result in trains
being stopped for urgent maintenance work to be
carried out, or a decision on the use or non-use of
signalling equipment, so that this activity is covered
by RSCW Regulation 2(1)(b)(i)(bb).
e) Maintenance, repair or alteration of the signalling
power supply:
The signalling power supply powers and therefore
operates the signalling equipment and so controls
the movement of vehicles, so that these activities
are covered by RSCW Regulation 2(1)(b)(i)(bb).
f) Operating level crossing equipment, e.g. under local
control, is controlling the movement of trains on the
running lines and is covered by RSCW Regulation
2(1)(a).
g) Blocking lines, arranging possessions and the
isolation of power supplies is controlling the
movement of vehicles and is covered by RSCW
Regulation 2(1)(a).
h) Hand signalling, often in an emergency, is used to
control the movement of trains and is covered by
RSCW Regulation 2(1)(a).
i) Protecting persons working in a maintenance
capacity on or near the line is covered by a clear
statement in RSCW Regulation 2(1)(b).
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
j) Controlling the setting of points, or manually

operating, securing or setting points following a
failure or disconnection, working to the instructions
of the signaller, controls the movement of trains and
is covered by RSCW Regulation 2(1)(a).
k) Controlling the movement of trains into and out of a
possession and onto the running line is covered by
RSCW Regulation 2(1)(a). A possession is the part
of the transport system where maintenance is
carried out, and where maintenance activities affect
the line and can affect adjacent running lines, so
that controlling the movement of a train within a
possession is also covered.
l) Maintenance, repair or alteration of the
infrastructure may include the use of rail, road/rail,
road wheeled or tracked vehicles; also, when it is
foreseeable that these vehicles could accidentally
foul an adjacent running line and affect the transport
system: both are covered by RSCW Regulation
2(1)(b)(i)(aa). This includes work on the permanent
way by machines, such as cranes, that may be
located on or off the permanent way, but could
rotate and foul an adjacent running line. Where the
last activity is a final inspection, this is covered by
the RSCW Regulations, instead of the
maintenance, repair or alteration work.
2 Activities that may be Safety-Critical

The following signalling activities may be safety-critical:
a) Leading a team when the team leader personally
undertakes work, some of which is safety-critical, in
addition to leading, directing, instructing and
supervising other members of the team is safety-
critical.
However, leading a team when the team leader
does not personally undertake any safety-critical
activities is not safety-critical. This may then be
considered to be supervising (see next item).
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
b) Direct supervision of an individual or group of

workers who are carrying out a safety-critical
activity, where the supervisor observes the activity
being carried out, checks that the activity has been
carried out correctly, ensures that any necessary
corrective action is taken and signs off the work: the
supervisor is covered by the RSCW Regulations,
the definition clearly applying at the first line
supervisor level. The supervisor will then take
overall responsibility for the safety-critical activity.
However, supervising a team or group will not be
safety-critical when the individual workers take
complete responsibility for their work and the
supervisor only manages them, and does not check
or take responsibility for signing off the work.
c) Managing a team or group will be safety-critical if
the manager personally carries out some safety-
critical activity which is not tested or inspected by a
person who would normally carry out safety-critical
work, or when no other person has sufficient
knowledge to check the work, take responsibility for
it, and sign it off (as a supervisor).
However, managing a team or group is not safety-
critical when the manager is carrying out the normal
management activities of planning, organising,
motivating and controlling staff.
d) A project engineer will be carrying out safety-critical
work if the project engineer personally carries out
some safety-critical activity which is not tested or
inspected by a person who would normally carry out
safety-critical work, or when no other person has
sufficient knowledge to check the work, take
responsibility for it, and sign it off (as a supervisor).
However, project managing a project is not safety-
critical when the project manager is carrying out the
normal activities of managing the project to
completion on time, to cost and to the required
quality.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
3 Activities that are Not Safety-Critical

The following signalling activities are not safety-critical
(but are safety related):
a) Many work activities carried out in the railway
industry may affect the health and safety of persons
on the transport systems, but do not have a real
time impact on the operational railway. These do
not come within the definition of safety-critical work
in the RSCW Regulations.
However, staff carrying out safety related work are
still required to be competent under the Health &
Safety at Work (HSW) Act (especially sections 2
and 3) and Management of Health & Safety at Work
(MHSW) Regulations, instead of the RSCW
Regulations.
b) Training persons to carry out safety-critical activities
and assessing the competence of persons to carry
out safety-critical activities:
It is important that persons carrying out safety-
critical activities are adequately trained and
assessed, but inadequate training does not directly
increase the risk to health and safety on the
transport system, since there are other factors and
people involved that can mitigate against any
increased risks, including competence assessment,
supervision, management, and the integrity of the
person involved. (However, if at any time the person
carrying out the training or assessment has to take
over the safety-critical activity, or act in a
supervisory role, see above, the new activity is
safety-critical.)
Training is covered by the HSW Act, section 2(2).
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
c) Designing, including software, hardware, etc,

manufacturing, supplying or importing products:
Setting down the design principles, detailed design,
prototyping, manufacturing, validating, etc. is
important for correct and efficient operation,
reliability, maintainability and safety of the product.
If the design work or manufacture is not
satisfactory, the product may operate incorrectly, or
it may operate inefficiently, unreliably or unsafely.
Some faults may be identified by testing and
inspection. It is unlikely that the remaining faults will
have an immediate impact on the operational
railway, so that design work is not covered by the
RSCW Regulations.
However, the longer term effect on the safe
operation of the railway can be significant, so that
all those taking part in the overall design and
manufacture processes shall be competent. This is
covered by the HSW Act, section 6.
d) Installing and commissioning new signalling works
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
is safety related, as the standards and quality

required are as high or higher than for maintenance,
repair or alteration, but New Works Projects fall
outside the requirements of the RSCW Regulations.
However, they require HMRI approval under the
Transport and Works Act and are likely to have to
satisfy the Construction (Design & Management)
Regulations.
Further Information
GO/RT3260 Competence Management for Safety
Critical Work
1974 c.37 Health and Safety at Work etc. Act 1974
1992 c.42 Transport and Works Act 1992
S.I.1994/3140 Construction (Design and Management)
Regulations 1994
S.I.1999/3242 Management of Health and Safety at
Work Regulations 1999
S.I.1994/299 Railways (Safety Critical Work)
Regulations 1994

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
L50 Railway Safety Critical Work ACoP and

Guidance (HSE Books)
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Working on Equipment - General
1 Maintenance of Signalling Equipment

See section M001.
2 Disconnection of Signalling Equipment

Whenever it is necessary to disconnect signalling
equipment the provision of section B002 must be strictly
observed.
3 Testing of Signalling Apparatus

After repairs or alterations to signalling apparatus the
equipment must be tested. See section T001.
4 Altering or Repairing Signalling Equipment

For a checklist before starting work, see section D001
and, on completion, section E061.
Alterations to signalling arrangements shall only be
made in accordance with the engineering details
supplied for the work (see section E051). Technicians
shall not manipulate signalling equipment to cause it to
work by any means other than the designed
arrangement unless they are authorised by the
supervisor.
Alterations to existing installations shall not reduce the
overall safety integrity of the original installation.
Technicians must always make a point of seeing that a
correct entry has been made by the signaller in the Train
Register, and that it is properly signed. Where it is not
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
practicable to enter the signal box, technicians shall

communicate with the signaller and have the train
register entry read back to them. It is important that the
signaller is clearly informed of the nature of the work to
be undertaken.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
5 Temporary or Emergency Alterations

No temporary or emergency alterations to the signalling
arrangements, mechanical or electrical, shall be made
by technicians unless they are authorised by the
supervisor. A report to the supervisor must be provided
as described in SMS part A08.
6 Seals
Seals on instruments, relays and other apparatus shall
not be broken by technicians unless so instructed by the
supervisor.
Some timing relays may require unsealing before
adjustment and do not require permission. These shall
then be resealed.
7 Lever Collars or Reminder Appliances

When any signalling equipment has been damaged or
disconnected, or is otherwise out of use or under repair,
technicians must ensure that lever collars or other
reminder appliances are placed on the levers or panel
switches concerned, to remind the signaller. Before such
levers or switches are moved, the signaller must be
aware that those working on the equipment concerned
must be warned that it is about to be operated.
8 Temporary Approach Control Links (TACLs)

A technician may be instructed to disconnect a signal
TACL in order to restrict the speed of trains in
connection with emergency or engineering situations.
TACLs are also used at junction signals to facilitate the
placing of temporary speed restrictions on routes beyond
the junction, in accordance with GK/RT0038.
9 Distant Signal Restriction

During failure of a distant signal repeater, block
indicator, or single line block, the Rule Book series TS
requires the signaller to keep the relevant distant signal
at caution.

--``,,,,``,`,`
Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Technicians must also ensure that the protecting distant

signal is restricted to caution when disconnecting level
crossing equipment.
Further Information
GE/RT8000 Rule Book
GK/RT0038 Speed Restrictions
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
NR/GI/B001 Page: 1 of 3
Work that Could Affect the Operation of Signalling
1 Principles
Section 3 of Rule Book module T1A defines the
arrangements necessary for undertaking work on
equipment which is in service that will not affect the
normal passage of trains.
Module T1A permits certain work that may interfere with
the normal working of signalling equipment to be carried
out without completing form RT3187, Signal Engineering
Work. However, an entry is required to be made in the
Train Register.
No work must be done which will interfere with the
normal operation of signalling equipment without the
agreement of the signaller.
Work which does not interfere with the normal operation
of signalling equipment such as oiling and cleaning can
be done at any time.
Work that may interfere with the normal working of
signalling equipment can be carried out under Rule Book
module T1A if all the following apply:
a) the work is of a type specified under Permissible
Work in section 3,
AND
b) the work is carried out in accordance with the
Signalling Maintenance Specifications or other
defined procedures,
AND
c) the work can be carried out between trains without
detriment to safety and train working,
AND
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
d) The work is either self protecting, or protection will

be provided by temporarily removing fuses or
slipping links, but wires must not be removed from
terminals or plugboards for this purpose. For
disconnection of signalling equipment see section
B002.
Staff working on the interior of a point machine, who
require the machine to be isolated for their own
protection (see section 6 of section B003), can use
section 11 of Rule Book module T6. The agreement of
the signaller is required before isolating the machine, but
no form RT3187 has to be completed.
2 Personnel Protection
Rule Book module T1A is all about protecting trains. It
does not give staff any protection at all. If staff need
personal protection, they must make separate
arrangements with the signaller under Rule Book module
T2 (or module T12 when undertaking work for up to 30
minutes).
3 Permissible Work
a) Track circuit testing and adjustment.
b) Point testing and adjustment.
c) Signal lamp and route indicator lamp changing,
testing and adjustment.
d) Cable testing, providing that no disconnection of
wires, other than by sliding links, is involved.
e) Reterminating or jointing a single core cable
(e.g. track circuit connection). Multicore cables,
tail cables with more than one core, and wires
in interlockings or internal wires in apparatus
cases are excluded.
f) Reterminating or jointing cables to telephones
or similar lineside equipment.
g) Disconnection of power supplies for cell
replacement or other remedial action.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
h) Temporary disconnection of AWS for testing.

i) Temporary disconnection of TPWS for testing.
j) Changing a plug-in pin-coded component such
as a relay, a reed transmitter or receiver, or a
SSI trackside functional module.
k) Routine testing at level crossings, emergency
replacement switches, signal replacement
switches or timers.
l) Short duration tests on non safety-critical
equipment such as remote control and train
describers.
m) Routine maintenance of signal and detonator
placer motors.
Further Information
GE/RT8000 Rule Book
RT3187 (form) Signal Engineering Work
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Disconnections
1 Disconnecting and Working on Equipment

No work shall be done which will interfere with the
normal working of signalling equipment without the
agreement of the signaller.
Section B001 defines the arrangements necessary for
working on equipment which is in service.
Disconnection of signalling equipment shall follow the
requirements of Rule Book modules T1A and/or T2, as
appropriate. In selecting the means of disconnection,
the following shall be taken into account:
a) Do not rely upon disconnection of the equipment
which is being worked on, or which may be
disturbed or affected during the work.
b) Do not apply a disconnection which may be
ineffective under some circumstances (e.g.
disconnection of track circuit to hold a signal at
danger may not be effective if the signal has
permissive working facilities).
c) Do not apply a disconnection which subsequently
has to be reinstated for the purposes of testing the
work prior to handback to the signaller.
d) If the work is partially completed and some of the
equipment is handed back for use, the
disconnections must remain effective for that
equipment which is not available for use.
Disconnections shall be planned and documented by a
competent tester and shall be checked by an
independent competent tester. The effectiveness of
disconnections shall be verified before they are relied
upon and the presence of signaller's reminder devices
shall be confirmed.
Disconnections shall be clearly labelled to prevent
inadvertent reconnection.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Disconnections
When it is necessary for a lever or panel switch to be

moved during the work, the signaller shall be requested
to move it or his permission obtained.
Any disconnection of a circuit that affects the signaller,
including level crossing telephones and other telecoms
circuits, shall be advised to the signaller who shall put in
place the necessary method of working.
Signalling equipment shall not be manipulated to cause
it to work by any means other than the designed
arrangement unless special instructions are issued to
the contrary.
When it is necessary to disconnect any electrically
operated points or signals to disarrange the interlocking
in connection therewith, the electrical controls of all
signals affected must be disconnected as described in
section 3.
In every case necessitating the changing of any part of
electrically operated points which would interfere with the
correct functioning of the equipment, the technician must
treat the points as being out of order in accordance with
module T1A of the Rule Book and isolate them as
described in section 6 of B003.
2 Procedure for Making Disconnections

When work is to be done to the requirements of Rule
Book module T1A (Failure, renewal and maintenance of
signalling equipment) and/or protection procedure T2-D
(disconnecting signalling equipment), disconnections
need to be carried out to prevent a signal displaying a
proceed aspect over, or up to, equipment which is being
worked on (T1A) or the work site (T2-D). There are
three situations that need to be considered when
deciding which signals need to be disconnected:
a) T1A when not using T2-D.
b) Using T1A and T2-D together.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Disconnections
c) T2-D when not using T1A.

(When T2-D is to be used, signal disconnections
will always be required.)
See Figure B1 for details of when signal disconnections
are required for work being carried out using module
T1A only.
When carrying out work under module T1A of the Rule
Book, care shall be taken to ensure that the effects of
any disarrangement of the interlocking are fully
considered.
In order to provide protection, the equipment that is to be
disconnected must not be disturbed or affected during
the work process.
Where the work is within the overlap of the protecting
signal, the need to disconnect the signal approaching
the protecting signal shall be considered. This decision
shall be based on the proximity of staff to the signal and
the consequences of a signal passed at danger (SPAD).
A competent person must make all disconnections.
Where large numbers of disconnections are required it
may be more appropriate to use alternative methods of
work, e.g. T3 (Possession of the line for engineering
work).
Discon-
Equipment being worked on nection
required
Signal on track circuit block lines:
- Signal not inoperative or not exhibiting most restrictive yes
aspect
- Signal inoperative and exhibiting most restrictive no
aspect
Signal on lines other than track circuit block lines:
- Signal applicable to movements in the normal (#1 only)
direction
- Signal applicable to movements in the wrong direction no
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Disconnections
Discon-
Equipment being worked on nection
required
Point
- Worked by machine/clamp lock yes
- Switch diamond/swing nose crossing yes
- Other mechanical points yes (#2)
Track Circuit
- TPR not disconnected yes
- TPR disconnected no (#1)
AWS - magnet no (#1)
ATP - on track equipment no
- ATPLIT or UT (GWML only) yes
Level Crossing
- Manned Controlled Barriers/Gates, CCTV controlled yes
barriers, AHBCs with stopping/non-stopping controls
- other types of crossing (other AHBCs, ABCL, AOCL, no
etc.)
Cables #3
Other, signalling
- no affect on integrity of interlocking no (#1)
- causes 'disarrangement of interlocking' yes
#1 The distant signal 'on lines other than track circuit block
lines' will require to be disconnected.
#2 Only signals for movements in the facing direction over
the points being worked on.
#3 Work on cables may affect other equipment which is
remote from the site of work. To ensure that full
protection of trains is provided, the function operated over
each cable core must be checked. Disconnections may
be required if any core carries a function as listed in
Figure B1.
Figure B1 Signal Disconnections

Required for T1A Only
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Disconnections
3 Direct and Indirect Disconnections

Where signals are to be disconnected and the point of
disconnection has been identified on predefined
disconnection lists, the relevant entry shall be consulted.
Where these are not available, the relevant control
tables, signalling plans and circuit diagrams shall be
consulted to ensure that all relevant signals/routes are
disconnected.
The preferred method of disconnecting a signal is to use
a Direct Disconnection, these are described in section 4.
A Direct Disconnection is where the point of
disconnection is in the circuit which controls the signal
aspect, e.g. R1 spade of the HR, GR or DR. The
disconnection must maintain the signal at danger.
Alternatively, a signal may be disconnected using an
Indirect Disconnection, these are described in section 5.
An Indirect Disconnection is where the point of
disconnection is not in the circuit which controls the
signal aspect, e.g. disconnecting a link in the line feeding
a TPR, the TPR in turn will 'disconnect' the HR.
Great care needs to be exercised when using Indirect
Disconnections. The responsible tester must ensure
that the disconnection will be effective in holding the
appropriate signal(s) at their most restrictive aspects.
4 Disconnection of Signals (Direct)

4.1 Relay Interlocking
The following, in order of preference, are the
methods of disconnecting signals on conventional
relay interlockings:
a) As stated on the predefined disconnection list,
where available.
b) Withdraw the Route Disconnection Link (or GY
link) for each route affected.
c) Where individually fused, remove the aspect
relay (HR, UGR, GR, etc.) circuit fuse.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Disconnections
d) Disconnection of a link controlling the aspect

relay (HR, UGR, GR, etc.), where the link is at
the same location as the relay.
e) Removal, and suitable isolation, of the coil
spade/connection of the relay controlling the
aspect (HR, UGR, GR, etc.).
The following options may be used where no work
which subsequently affects the integrity of the
disconnection is to be carried out:
f) Disconnection of a link in the cable remotely
controlling the aspect relay (HR, UGR, GR,
etc.).
g) Disconnection, and suitable isolation, of a
terminal of the cable remotely controlling the
aspect relay (HR, UGR, GR, etc.).
4.2 Electronic Interlockings

Signals/routes shall be disconnected to ensure that
the ARS cannot route into an area where
disconnections have been made to protect
equipment being worked on. Consideration shall be
given to alternative routes that may be available.
The following are the methods of disconnecting
signals:
a) For Solid State Interlockings, signal
disconnection is via the technician's terminal,
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
using the aspect disconnection procedure
published in the appropriate Technician's
Terminal Manual in the M1303/TT series.
b) For other systems, by the prescribed method, or
as stated on the predefined disconnection list,
where available.
4.3 Mechanical Signalling

The following, in order of preference, are the
methods of disconnecting mechanical signals:

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Disconnections
T2-D a) A catch handle locking device fitted to the

only signal lever.
b) The catch handle shall be disconnected from
the catch rod and a reminder collar placed
on the signal lever.
T1A/ c) Disconnect the signal wire at the lever tail.
T2-D
For colour light and motor semaphore signals controlled
from a mechanical signal box:
T1A/ d) Disconnect as shown in section above on
T2-D Relay Interlocking.
5 Disconnection of Signals (Indirect)

5.1 Track Circuits
There are a number of pitfalls, particularly where
track circuits can release as well as lock, or may not
lock at all. Problem areas include:
• automatic signals (see Rule Book modules S4
& S5 for automatic signals being passed at
danger if the SPT fails),
• shunt signals and shunt moves from main
signals,
• permissive lines,
• level crossings.
The responsible tester shall ensure that the
proposed disconnection will effectively hold the
signal(s) at their most restrictive aspect.
Where the following conditions are met, it is
permissible to disconnect the TPR:
i) The TR controls no relays or equipment other
than the first TPR.
ii) No more than one TPR is controlled from the
TR.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Disconnections
5.2 Method of Disconnecting Track Circuit

TPRs
When it is permissible to disconnect a TPR in
accordance with the previous paragraph, one of the
following methods shall be used:
a) Where individually fused, remove the TPR
circuit fuse.
b) Withdraw a link in the feed to the coil of the
TPR.
c) Remove, and suitably insulate (section E052)
the coil spade/connection of the TPR.
d) Disconnect, and suitably isolate at a binding
post in the feed to the coil of the TPR.
5.3 Using Axle Counters

The use of axle counters for disconnection
purposes shall be avoided wherever possible.
5.4 Method of Disconnecting Point KRs

Disconnection of point KRs is of limited use. It is
not appropriate where FPL and/or detection tests
are required as part of the work. Consider carefully
the alternative methods before using the
disconnection of point KRs.
CAUTION: Point detection circuitry may use 1 or 2
relays (WKR or NKR/RKR) and may
be wired as a 2, 3 or 4 wire circuit.
When it is required to disconnect a point KR, one of
the following methods shall be used:
a) Where individually fused, remove the KR circuit
fuse.
b) Withdraw a link or links in the feed to the coil of
the point KR(s).
c) Remove, and suitably insulate (section E052)
the coil spade(s)/connection(s) of the point
KR(s).
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Disconnections
d) Disconnect, and suitably isolate at a binding

post or binding posts in the feed to the coil(s) of
the point KR(s).
Note: Before reconnecting the KR circuit for
testing purposes, the system for personnel
safety (section 11 of Rule Book module T6)
must be reviewed.
5.5 Alternative Methods

Other methods of disconnection may be used to suit
local circumstances (ground frame release, block
lines, etc.).
It is the responsibility of the tester to ensure
adequate protection.
6 Missing/ Illegible Diagrams

Where on site records are missing or illegible, an
attempt shall be made to obtain information from another
set of diagrams (e.g. relay room copy).
If this is not possible and the tester knows which
equipment is to be disconnected, but not which links or
fuse will provide the disconnection, the tester may, under
these circumstances only, disconnect and insulate the
relay coil/ spade connection of the controlling relay.
7 Selection of Procedure
When making signal disconnections it is important to
ensure that the disconnections are effective and that the
risks of inadvertent reconnection are low. The
appropriate method of work shall be selected by
comparing the work to be done against criteria listed for
Local and Remote disconnections.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Disconnections
When using automatic signals to protect the work it

needs to be noted that the Rule Book modules S4 and
S5 (Part B) allow automatic signals to be passed at
danger if the SPT has failed. To ensure that the SPT is
operational, it must be tested prior to relying on the
automatic signal for protection. If the SPT does not
work, arrangements must be made to provide alternative
protection, such as a different disconnection point or
protection procedure, e.g. T2-H (using handsignallers or
detonator protection).
Local Disconnection Procedure, criteria for use:
• The disconnection(s) are for T2-D,
• Disconnections required for short duration, typically
less than 1 hour,
• Small number of disconnections (up to 6),
• No change of tester during work,
• All disconnections in single location or equipment
room,
• Work within visual range of the disconnection point
or the access to it (e.g. location, equipment room
door).
Remote Disconnection Procedure, criteria for use:
• Any work requiring a T2-D that does not meet the
criteria of the Local Disconnection Procedure,
• Any work under module T1A.
8 Local Disconnection Procedure

8.1 Before work starts:
a) Identify signal(s) to be disconnected.
b) Identify where effective disconnection(s) can be
made to place required signal(s) at their most
restrictive aspect(s).
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Disconnections
c) Make disconnection(s). Where the

disconnection(s) are not made using links, the
tester shall ensure that any bare conductors,
e.g. relay spades, ring crimps, etc., are suitably
insulated, in accordance with section E052.
d) Complete maintenance log sheets as required
by type of disconnection.
e) Record the numbers of the signal(s) kept at
danger by disconnection(s) on the RT3181 form
(Record of Arrangements for Protection of the
Line for Engineering Work or for Protection of a
Hand Trolley) included in Rule Book module T2.
8.2 After work is completed:

a) Reconnect links, relay spades, etc., that were
disconnected and test the signal(s).
b) Complete maintenance log sheet as required.
c) Ensure that equipment that was disconnected is
now operational.
Note: Where the tester considers there is a risk of
inadvertent reconnection, perhaps due to
shift changes, disconnections shall be
labelled. See section 10 (links), or SMTH
Test Plan CA01 (spades/wires).
9 Remote Disconnection Procedure

9.1 Before work starts:
a) Identify signal(s) to be disconnected.
b) Identify where effective disconnection(s) can be
made to place required signal(s) at their most
restrictive aspect(s).
c) Make disconnection(s). Where the
disconnection(s) are not made using links, the
responsible tester shall ensure that any bare
conductors, e.g. relay spades or ring crimps,
are suitably insulated, in accordance with
section E052.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Disconnections
d) Complete maintenance log sheets as required

by type of disconnection.
e) Each disconnection point shall be labelled with
a warning label. The label shall state "Danger
work in progress - do not reconnect" and bear
the name of the person doing the work. Pre-
printed labels should be available (section 11).
Maintenance Testing
f) All disconnections shall be made in accordance
with the following procedures:
Section 10 for slipping links,
SMTH Test Plan CA01 for the removal and
refitting of a cable/
wire, including spade
connections.
g) All disconnections shall be recorded. The
record of disconnections shall contain the
following information:
• Equipment being worked upon and
Controlling Signal Box,
• Equipment Room/Location where
disconnections are carried out,
• Signals/Routes disconnected,
• Method of disconnection,
• Date and time disconnections are made,
• Name and signature of person making
disconnections.
h) The disconnection record shall be placed in the
equipment room/location where the
disconnections have been made. Where
possible the record shall be placed in the
signalling equipment room log book.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Disconnections
Works Testing
i) All disconnections shall be made in accordance
with the procedures described in
NR/SP/SIG/11221.
j) The Tester in Charge shall ensure that
disconnections are recorded, as stated in g)
above, a copy of which shall be retained in the
equipment room/location where the
disconnections are made.
Note: A preformatted sheet for recording the
disconnections should be available (see
section 11).
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
9.2 During the work:
The person carrying out the disconnections shall,
when relieved, ensure that relieving staff are clearly
informed of the whereabouts of the disconnection
record sheet. This is to enable staff who did not
carry out the disconnections to be fully conversant
with the current status of disconnections before
making any reconnections.
For maintenance testing, the handover
arrangements are given in Part 2 of the Signalling
Maintenance Testing Handbook (SMTH).
9.3 After work is completed:

a) Reconnect links, relay spades, etc. that were
disconnected and test the signal(s).
b) Remove warning labels.
c) Complete SMTH logbook sheets as required.
d) Ensure that equipment that was disconnected is
now operational.
e) When the reconnections are made, the date,
time and the name/signature of the person
making the reconnections shall be recorded.
This shall be done on the same record as the
original disconnections.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Disconnections
10 Links
Where a terminal block and/or its links (and any red
dome nuts) have to be removed during work, their
original position shall be recorded. Where a link has to
be slipped during the work this shall be recorded unless
there is no risk of confusion about its correct
replacement, such as for a simple isolation of
equipment.
Any previously slipped links in the vicinity of the work
shall be recorded to avoid inadvertent replacement. The
recording shall include, as a minimum, slipped links on
the vertical strip of terminals where links are required to
be moved as part of the work.
Where a link or connector has to be removed or slipped
during the work and must not be replaced, such as
during a temporary diversion of circuits, this shall be
recorded. Suitable reminder arrangements shall be
made on site, such as the fitting of red dome nuts to
terminals.
If the person doing the work is unable to ensure that the
equipment will not be reconnected without their
knowledge the isolating link shall be labelled. The label
shall state “Danger, work in progress – do not reconnect”
and bear the name of the person doing the work or
testing.
On completion of work a check shall be made to ensure
that the configuration of links and any red dome nuts is
correct. Where cable cores are spare and unused by
any circuit or function, any links fitted to the terminal
blocks at either end of the unused core shall be
removed. Where testing is handed on to a different
team the details of outstanding slipped links shall be
forwarded to the person taking over.
11 Supply of Forms
Templates for forms and labels that meet the
requirements of section 9 should be available from
supervisors:
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Disconnections
Disconnection Record Pad

Disconnection Record Sheet
Disconnection label, card
Disconnection label, plastic
Further Information
GE/RT8000 Rule Book
RT3181 (form) Record of Arrangements for Protecting
Engineering Work or a Hand Trolley on a
Line not Under Possession
NR/SP/SIG/11221 Signalling Works Testing
NR/SP/SIG/11231 Signalling Maintenance Testing
Handbook
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
This section covers both:

i) one-shot release of facilities during degraded
working (sections 2 to 7), as permitted by the Rule
Book and GE/RT8071; and
ii) initialisation, and resetting & restoration following
failure, incorrect operating sequence, maintenance
disconnection, or changeover between alternative
systems (sections 6 to 14). This is subject to the
requirements of GK/RT0027.
1 Erroneous Releasing of Locking

In some cases the inadvertent releasing of locking can
occur when equipment is removed/replaced.
Examples include:
a) Release of single line locking when changing a
track repeat relay.
b) Moving a set of points when changing a latched
relay.
Testers shall consider the potential for such situations
when undertaking work, and ensure that the protection
arrangements and the way in which the work is
performed avoid any risk to safety.
2 Principles of Giving a Release

The signaller may under the provisions of Rule Book
module T1A request that a release be given:
a) for a failed track circuit which is locking points,
solely to enable the points to be moved, but a signal
must not be allowed to clear over the affected track
circuit;
b) for a failed track circuit or other failed signalling
equipment which is locking a route, solely to allow
the release of the affected route so that signals can
be worked for movements clear of the failure;
c) for a track circuit occupied for an extended time by
engineering work, derailment or other exceptional
circumstances, solely to allow the working of signals
for movements clear of the obstruction;
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
d) for a track circuit occupied for an extended time by

failure, engineering work, failed train or other
exceptional circumstances, solely to allow a level
crossing to be opened to road traffic (see Rule Book
module TW8);
e) for a track circuit, to allow single line working by
pilotman (see Rule Book module P1), but Rule
Book module T1A does not permit the release of a
control that will allow 'line clear' to be given on any
block indicator (although Rule Book module TS3
requires the signaller, when single line working is in
operation, to use the block indicator for the line
being used for single line working to signal trains in
both directions, if this is possible);
f) to obtain a token to release a ground frame, during
single line working by pilotman (see Rule Book
module T1A).
The signaller shall be advised if giving a release will
unduly delay (or even take longer than) the faulting
process, or a release cannot be safely arranged. The
following general requirements shall apply:
i) A release given under this authority shall only apply
for one train, unless ii) applies. Whenever possible
the release shall be removed before any associated
train movement takes place, otherwise the person
giving the release shall remain on site until the train
passes, ensuring the release has been normalised
by the passage of the train or has been withdrawn
immediately afterwards.
ii) Exceptionally, where arrangements are required to
remain in place for more than a single release, this
shall be specially authorised in writing by the
supervisor and be subject to formal design and test
(NR/SP/SIG/11201 and NR/SP/SIG/11221), unless
the design is non-conceptual (see section D011)
and a SMTH Test Plan in the A&R (temporary
alteration) series is applicable.
iii) No signal shall be allowed to clear over a failed
track circuit.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
iv) Electric lever locks which carry interlocking (lock

cover may be painted red) on mechanical frames
shall not be released.
v) Before any release is given, assurance shall be
obtained from the signaller that there are no train
movements on any line within the area controlled by
the frame or interlocking and that the movement for
which the release is required can be made safely.
vi) The signaller shall be advised just prior to any
release being given and when train movements
may be resumed.
The precise, physical method of releasing shall be
documented (see section 4) and shall only be
undertaken by persons competent to do so. Any covers
moved or temporary arrangements made to give the
release shall be correctly restored immediately
afterwards.
If the release request is considered unsafe or there is
any doubt about the release requirements the supervisor
shall be advised.
Special arrangements exist for resetting or restoring axle
counters and other equipment where the restoration
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
process could result in a false clear indication being
given (see section 12).
3 Authorisation and Records

A separate form RT3186 shall be completed or dictated
on each occasion that the signaller requests a release
(see Rule Book module T1A). A clear understanding of
what is to be released shall be reached and details of
the work shall be entered on the form, as follows:
i) When the technician is present at the signalbox, the
signaller will complete form RT3186 and the
technician shall take a copy before giving the
release.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
ii) If the technician is not at the signalbox, the signaller

will dictate the RT3186 form to the technician who
shall read it back to the signaller before giving the
release.
Form RT3186 is not required where axle counter
restoration form BR29789/2 (or equivalent) applies (see
section 13).
4 Methods of Giving a Release

Note that the track circuit releases given below may not
be appropriate for axle counter sections. Where
necessary, local instructions shall be issued relating to
the release of points or route locking that are held by a
failed axle counter section. Axle counter resetting and
restoration is covered in section 12.
4.1 Mechanical Frame (track circuit or route

locking release)
This method may only be used to:
• allow a signal lever to be returned to normal,
• allow a point or FPL lever to be moved to
normal or reverse.
It must never be used to allow a signal lever to be
reversed.
1 Make sure that the movements for which the
release is being given can be made safely and
that the lever lock concerned does not carry
interlocking.
2 Get an assurance from the signaller that the
trains on any line controlled by the lever frame
have been stopped.
3 Tell the signaller that you are about to give the
release.
4 Lift the armature of the electric lock on the
correct lever and tell the signaller which lever
number you have released.
5 Ask the signaller to operate the lever to the
required position.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
6 Release the armature, replace and secure the

lock cover.
7 Tell the signaller that train movements may be
restarted.
CAUTION: For precautions to be taken when
working beneath mechanical frames,
see section W005.
4.2 Miniature Lever Power Frame (track

circuit or route locking release)
This method may only be used to:
• allow a signal lever to be returned to normal,
• allow or a point lever to be moved to normal or
reverse.
It must never be used to allow a signal lever to be
reversed.
1 Make sure that the movements for which the
release is required can be made safely.
movement of trains on any line controlled by the
power frame has been stopped.
release quoting the lever number.
4 Lift the armature of the selection lock on the
correct lever.
5 Ask the signaller to operate the lever to the
required position.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
6 Release the armature, replace and lock the

lever frame covers.
7 Tell the signaller that the train movements can
be restarted.
4.3 Relay or SSI Interlocking (track circuit

release)
1 Make sure the movements for which the release
is required can be made safely.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
2 Go to the location case or equipment room

containing the TR for the track circuit
concerned.
3 Using the circuit diagrams, find the contacts of
the TR which control the TPR or TFM circuit to
the interlocking at which the release is required.
4 Choose suitable test straps (one or two) to strap
out at the same time the TR contact(s)
controlling the TPR or TFM.
5 Monitor the outgoing TPR or TFM circuit with a
meter, or monitor the outgoing telegram with an
interrogator.
movement of trains on any line within the
interlocking area has been stopped and that
any route set over the track circuit concerned
has been cancelled.
release.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
8 Put the straps in position on the TR to false
feed the TPR or TFM circuit.
9 If necessary, ask the signaller to operate the
points to the correct position(s).
10 Confirm that the points have moved to the
required positions and / or the route indications
have been cancelled.
11 Remove the test strap(s) at both ends straight
away and put them away.
12 Check voltage has gone from the TPR lines or
the telegram shows track occupied. Obtain
confirmation from the signaller that the track
circuit shows occupied.
13 Remove the meter from outgoing lines.
14 Tell the signaller that train movements may
restart.
Note: The use of temporary straps shall be
controlled in accordance with section
U034.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
4.4 Relay Interlocking (route locking release)

1 Make sure the movements for which the release
is required can be made safely.
2 Check which route or part of the route needs
releasing and relate this to the position of the
relevant relays in the interlocking.
3 Decide, by checking the circuit diagrams, which
latched or polar-stick relays will be needed to
be operated to the opposite position to give the
required release.
Note: This will vary according to the system
in use:
Interlocking Release Method
Free wired Unlatch RLR (if a latched relay)
Latch up NLR.
WR (E10k) free No latched route relays.
wired & AEI-
GRS
geographical
ScR geographical Unlatch UR.
Westpac Mk1 Apply N50 to terminal d9 of the
geographical plug coupler of the
correct point or track unit.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Westpac Mk2 to 4 Latch up LUR in correct point or track

unit.
If necessary, unlatch UER, OER or
UFR in the correct signal.
GEC/SGE Latch up NLR in the entrance set or
geographical
Latch up USR in the point set or
Latch up XLR in the exit set or
Latch up LCR in the countermove
set.
For other types of route relay interlocking, see
local instructions.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006

movement of trains has been stopped on any
line within the area controlled by the relay room
and that any route set over the track circuit
concerned has been cancelled.
5 When in position in the relay room, advise the
signaller that you are about to give the release.
6 Remove the chosen latched or polar stick relay,
place in the bench test set and operate to the
required position. Replace the relay in its
original position.
or
In the case of Westpac Mk1, apply the N50
briefly to the appropriate geographical plug
coupler terminal d9.
7 Get confirmation that the release has been
effective.
8 Tell the signaller that train movements may be
restarted.
4.5 Electronic Interlocking

No technician's route release is available, unless
covered by system specific instructions. Where
necessary, local instructions shall be issued relating
to the release of points or route locking that are held
by a failed track section.
5 Sealed Releases
Where a sealed release is provided for the use of
signallers in the event of equipment failure, the
equivalent invasive releases described in section 4 are
not permitted.
After a sealed release has been used, signal
engineering staff shall reseal the release as soon as
possible after the fault is rectified. The appropriate seal
shall be used and the resealing reported.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
6 Manual Operation, Isolation and Restoration of

Points
CAUTION: Section 11 of Rule Book module T6 applies
to all work on or near points (see also
section W005).
For mechanically operated points, see section 4.1
(technician) or 5 (signaller's release).
For power operated points, the operating procedure
given in module T5 of the Rule Book will be initiated by
the signaller in the event of points failure.
Points mechanisms must be electrically isolated before
commencing work. The detection fuse (or links) shall
also be removed to ensure signals cannot be cleared.
Local detection will be restored as soon as the fuse is
reinstated, but the control system will not be reset until
the points are operated under power. Isolation, point
handle operation and restoration shall be performed as
follows:
i) Clamp Lock: Turning the switch from 'POWER' to
'MANUAL' will isolate the unit from the power
supply. The pump handle can then be used to
manually operate the points. The direction of
movement can be determined by moving the
selector into either the 'Normal' or 'Reverse'
position.
Note: The selector must be returned to the
'Neutral' position and the switch turned
to the 'Power' position when the
equipment is to be restored to power
operation.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
CAUTION: When manually operating switches

fitted with supplementary drives it is
essential that sufficient pump strokes
are made to ensure that the full
movement of the switch is completed.
Always check that the switch is
correctly fitted to the stock rail, not just
at the toe, even if it has completed its
travel and locked.
ii) Hydro-Pneumatic Train Operated: The pump
handle for manual operation is housed in a secure
cabinet adjacent to the equipment. To manually
operate the points, turn the relief valve ON (lever
vertical - valve open) and operate the hand pump.
The points will move to the reverse position against
the force exerted by the main actuator and
accumulator. The points will be restored to their
normal lie by the action of the accumulator when
the relief valve is turned OFF (lever horizontal -
valve dosed).
iii) WB&SCo Style M2 The machine is cranked from
the side. (The motor is not automatically isolated
when the manual crank handle is used, so the
motor fuse must be removed.)
iv) WB&SCo Style M3 & M3A The crank handle is
inserted through the top of the machine.
(Withdrawal of the pin holding the crank aperture
cap cover strap isolates the motor.)
v) WB&SCo Style 63 Insertion of the crank handle
alone is no longer an acceptable method of
electrically isolating the Style 63 point machine. To
ensure the machine is isolated, remove the motor
fuse.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Note: The operators who do not have access to

the fuses must be able to rely on the
insertion of the crank handle to isolate the
machine. Correct operation is essential for
their safety, any malfunction of the cut-out
contacts shall be repaired or reported to the
supervisor so that remedial action can be
instigated.
vi) Alstom HW Unlock the crank handle cover flap and
open, insert the point handle part way in and lift up.
The crank handle reset button must be seen to "pop
out". If it does not pop out cleanly, than the cutout
assembly may be defective. Continue to insert the
handle into the end of the machine until it contacts
the end of the crank handle drive shaft and then,
whilst continuing to push it in, rotate until the pin in
the handle engages with the slot in the shaft.
Undersize or worn crank handles can jeopardise the
integrity of the cut-out switch and must not be used.
Sticking latch mechanisms, worn cut-out
assemblies or loose assembly mountings have also
caused wrong side failures.
Note: The operating shaft of a crank handle
should be 27/32 inch diameter. A simple
check is to compare the diameter of the
operating shaft with a 1p coin. A correct
size handle will be slightly larger than the
coin. If it is not larger, or it is suspected of
being defective in any way, it shall be
reported/returned to the supervisor.
vii) HPSS Move the power isolation paddle to the
'power off' position. (It is released from the 'on' and
'off' positions by pulling out a sprung sleeve.) This
uncovers the access point for the crank handle,
which can be inserted either from the end, or the
side (new machines only). After removing the
handle, power is restored by pulling out the sprung
sleeve again whilst the paddle returns to the 'power
on' position.
Full details are given in the HPSS Operation &
Maintenance Manual.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Note: If 110Va.c. power is lost, the HPSS will lose

both normal and reverse detection. After
power is restored, it is necessary to operate
the machine, either manually or under
power, to reset the detection output.
Further details are given in the appropriate point
equipment documentation.
7 Level Crossing Release and Restoration

Where a sealed release is provided (section 5) that
allows the signaller to open a manually controlled level
crossing to road traffic when a controlling track circuit
has failed, or is occupied by a failed train, the
requirements of Rule Book module TW8 will be applied
to protect the crossing from approaching trains.
If a technician is asked to give such a release as per
sections 4.1 to 4.3, this shall generally be 'one-shot' for
one crossing opening only. Whenever possible the
release shall be removed as soon as the crossing has
been opened, otherwise the person giving the release
shall remain on site until the release can be removed.
When level crossings are subject to resetting and
restoration following failure, incorrect operating
sequence, maintenance disconnection, or changeover
between alternative systems, the requirements of
GK/RT0027 will generally apply:
i) a failure/maintenance disconnection procedure,
ii) isolation/protection arrangement,
iii) manual or automatic resetting to correspond with
the state of the railway,
iv) restoration to service procedure,
v) records to be kept of each
disconnection/restoration.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Modern automatic crossings are generally provided with

automatic failure protection to cater for extended (or
transient) track occupancy or failure, incorrect operating
sequence, or power supply failure. After a time the
crossing will open to road traffic and any directional
controls will be cancelled. Automatic restoration is
provided in the event of the failed track section clearing
or emergency plunger operation, but otherwise
technician's attendance may be required to reset the
crossing. Power supply failure is also self-restoring.
Further details are given in Part X of NR/GN/SIG/11600.
8 Solid State Interlocking (SSI) Release and

Restoration
No technician's route release is available.
A Technician's Terminal is used to start the interlocking,
and apply and remove restrictive controls, as described
in NR/SP/SIG/17004.
To ensure that Trackside Functional Module (TFM)
outputs operate correctly after a reset following the loss
of output interface, Defined Test B24 shall be performed.
SSI Central Interlocking initialisation, failure and power
changeover is protected by the protocols given in SSI
8003-10. Data links to the TFMs are similarly protected.
Note: When replacing a processor module, the
procedures given in SMTH Test Plan SS01 must
be followed to avoid the processor blowing its
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
security fuse.
An Emergency Signals On Control is provided to remove
the power from a Central Interlocking, in accordance with
SSI 8500F.
Note: A 'Mode 2' or 'Mode 3' start (see below) will
result when changing to a stand-by power supply
or when a Signaller's Emergency Signals On
control is operated.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
All the information stored in RAM is lost if the power

supply to the RAM chip fails. RAM stands for Random
Access Memory and this is a read/write memory chip
which is used to store information during the operation of
the program. One of its most important functions is to
store the current state of the railway. Each bit in the
RAM has two states known as 'one' and 'zero'.
This means that when power is first applied to a Central
Interlocking, a part of the software known as the
Initialisation Program must set up all of the RAM to a
predefined safe state. If power is lost, a capacitor
connected to the RAM allows the RAM contents to be
retained for at least six hours, but as data from the
Trackside Functional Modules has been lost in the
interim period it is still necessary for areas of the RAM to
be set back to a safe state. The extent to which this is
required is determined by the three Interlocking
Processors comparing the state of their RAM memory
immediately after start-up, and invoking one of three
start modes:
Mode 1:
If the RAM capacitor has been discharged, or there is
more than one disagreement in the state of the
technician's control bits in signal, points, route and track
circuit memory.
This would be the case when power is first applied to a
Central Interlocking after a long power failure.
In a 'Mode 1' start all the contents of RAM are set to zero
with the exception of the technician's controls on routes,
track circuits, points and signals, and the points key
position bits (which are all set to one), and the elapsed
timers and signal approach locking timers (which are
stopped).
This means that all routes and latches are unset, points
are not controlled or detected and the key switch position
is undefined, track circuits are in the undefined state,
sub-routes and sub-overlaps are locked, and signals are
not lamp-proven.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
When the program starts to operate after initialisation is

complete, the normal processing of output telegram data
for signals will set the 'free of approach locking' and
'signal stick' bits for the signals. When telegrams start to
be received from Trackside Functional Modules, the
track circuit 'occupied' and 'clear' bits, the points
detection bits and signal 'lamp proving', and 'not red
retained' bits will be set to the appropriate states. As the
track circuits clear, the sub-routes and sub-overlaps will
be freed sequentially (because all routes are unset) by
the flag operations data.
This leaves the Interlocking with all points detected in
the direction in which they are lying (but both point
control bits unset), all routes unset, and sub-routes and
sub-overlaps free (except where held locked by occupied
track circuits). After a 'Mode 1' start, panel requests from
the Panel Processors and other Central Interlockings are
ignored and all telegram outputs are set to their most
restrictive state. After a time delay the Technician's
Terminal can be used to 'enable' the Interlocking (using
the 'start' control), and normal operation commences.
Mode 2:
If Mode 1 is not invoked and either there is a
disagreement in the state of the route memory bits or
points memory control bits, or there are more than six
disagreements between the flag memory bits.
This covers the case where a short-term power failure
occurs while the route was being set or cancelled or a
set of points being called.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
In a 'Mode 2' start the contents of RAM are initialised as

for 'Mode 1', except that the original states of the
technician's control bits are preserved. If the one
permitted disagreement between the Interlocking
Processors exists, then this technician's control bit is set
to zero (control applied) in all three Interlocking
Processors. After a 'Mode 2' start the Interlocking is
initially disabled as in 'Mode 1', but will recommence
normal operation after the four minute time delay without
the need to be re-enabled from the Technician's
Terminal.
Mode 3:
If neither Mode 1 or Mode 2 is invoked. This covers the
case of a short-term power loss with nearly all the RAM
information being preserved.
In a 'Mode 3' start the contents of RAM are initialised as
for 'Mode 1', but all the technician's control, points
control, route and flag bits are preserved, except where
there is a disagreement between Processors, in which
case the bits concerned are set to zero. This means that
one additional technician's control may be applied, and
up to six sub-routes, sub-overlaps or latches may be
locked. After a 'Mode 3' start the Interlocking
commences normal operation immediately. As all the
routes are preserved, the signals for routes which were
set will have their 'free of approach locking' and 'signal
stick' bits held at zero, and for each route the signaller
will have to pull the entrance button and then 'restroke'
the route to set the 'signal stick' bit (via the clearing and
setting of the 'bpull' bit respectively) to allow the signal to
clear. As all signals will have their 'auto' bits held at zero
the signaller will have to push the replacement buttons
for automatic and semi-automatic signals to allow these
signals to clear.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
9 Radio Electronic Token Block (RETB) Failures

An emergency keyswitch is provided for use when radio
data communication fails. When the emergency
keyswitch is used in conjunction with a security number
and functional command entered by the signaller, the
interlocking will execute the command without the
transmission or reception of radio data, provided it is
safe to do so. Further details are given in GK/RT0054.
The emergency keyswitch is only operable by a key
allocated for that purpose. Each use of the keyswitch will
increment a counter.
Each Network Rail Territory with RETB installations shall
identify the circumstances when the emergency
keyswitch may be used, and shall ensure that secure
procedures are in place for the use and storage of the
key.
Note that, when replacing a processor module, the
procedures given in SMTH Test Plan SS01 must be
followed to avoid the processor blowing its security fuse.
10 Reset and Restoration of Block Systems

The appropriate SMTH procedure from the following list
shall be consulted in order to restore the system:
Defined Test B10 Tokenless Block Controls Test
(block release winder)
Defined Test B11 Tokenless Block Controls Test
(open / sealed cancel type)
Defined Test B17 Absolute Block Recovery Test
(block release timer or winder)
Defined Test B18 Tokenless Co-operative
Cancel Test (Direction Lever)
Defined Test B19 FREDDY Test (One Train
Working without Staff)
Note: Tokenless block, interlocked absolute block and
OTW without staff are subject to GK/RT0027,
which for each existing system requires:
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006

Note: The above also applies to keyless lockout
systems.
11 Electric Token Systems

When dealing with electric token instruments of any type,
the technician shall ensure that the signaller is fully
aware of the work in order to observe the Block
Regulations in the TS modules of the Rule Book. In
certain circumstances, disconnections under Rule Book
module T1A may be required.
The technician shall ensure that no section signals are
released when it is necessary for tokens to be withdrawn
or inserted into instruments. Any section signal release
shall be destroyed by removing two tokens and then
replacing one of them. Entries shall be made in both the
Train Register and the signalling staff Token Register
stating the number of tokens dealt with. When a token is
damaged the technician shall be in possession of the
damaged token before putting the instruments into
phase. When a token has been lost the technician shall
only put the instruments into phase with the written
authority of the designated Operations Manager or his
representative who shall be present when the
instruments are put into phase.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
When it is necessary to transfer tokens from one

instrument to another, except where magazines are
used, an even number shall be transferred. In order to
destroy any section signal release an odd number of
tokens must be removed, one more than required for
transfer, and then one replaced into the instrument. The
token system shall be functionally tested before and after
token transfer to verify correct operation. No token shall
be removable if a token is out, or only one if all tokens
are in the instruments.
During single line working by pilotman, the pilotman may
request a token to release an in-section ground frame.
Under these circumstances, the technician shall arrange
for a token to be withdrawn from the instrument.
12 Working on Axle Counter Equipment, Reset and

Restoration
Definitions
Reset: Placing a system into a state which
corresponds with the actual state of
the railway; in this case by setting
the number of axles registered in a
track section to zero.
Restoration: Accepting reset systems back into
service by the signaller after
maintenance, failure, disturbance or
miscount; in this case by
reconnecting the axle counter to the
external circuitry.
Before any work (including resetting) is started that
effects the correct operation of the axle counter, the
permission of the signaller at the monitoring signal box
must be obtained.
Note: Possession of the axle counter section must be
taken for full evaluator testing.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
The axle counter must then be isolated from other

signalling equipment. The isolation methods can vary
depending on the type of axle counter, but generally this
is achieved by disconnecting the TPR link or data output
from the evaluator.
Three types of reset & restoration may be found:
i) Technician: With this method, the technician resets
and restores to service the axle counter with
permission of the signaller.
(These systems generally require the use of the
form for authorising and recording axle counter
restoration given in section 13.)
The technician must first ensure that the work is
complete and the axle counter is tested and in
working order.
The technician may then advise the signaller that
the axle counter is to be reset and obtain
permission to restore it to service.
After resetting the axle counter, the technician shall
cancel the isolation by reinstating the link. The
restoration device may vary.
ii) Co-operative: With this method, the technician
resets and restores to service the axle counter in
co-operation with the signaller (both operating a
function at the same time).
(Some systems require the use of the form for
authorising and recording axle counter restoration
given in section 13.)
Before restoring the axle counter, the technician
must ensure that the work is complete, the axle
counter is tested, reset and in working order, and
the isolation is cancelled. The restoration device
may vary.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
iii) Signaller: With this method, the signaller

undertakes both resetting and restoring the axle
counter.
Before contacting the signaller on completion of
work, the technician must ensure that the axle
counter is tested and in working order, and the
isolation is cancelled.
It may be possible for the signaller to restore a
miscounting or disturbed axle counter without the
presence of a technician, provided that the last
count was out of the track section concerned.
In all cases, the signaller is responsible for ensuring the
axle counter section is clear before it is restored.
Where provided, operation of the signaller's restoration
device for an appropriate time will reconnect the axle
counter track section to the interlocking, provided that
the technician has cancelled any isolation taken.
After restoration, the technician shall ensure that the
evaluator shows zero and the appropriate indication
shows ‘section clear’ (green). Where the track section
continues to indicate 'occupied', the laid down faulting
procedure (see Test Guide T004 in the SMTH) shall be
carried out by the signalling technician before the
restoration process is again attempted.
A main running signal may only be able to display a
position light or other caution aspect upon a route being
set through the restored section, until the first train has
passed through the section with the axle counter
operating correctly.
Axle counter sites may have individual reset &
restoration procedures due to the different types of
design. Some of these technical procedures can be
found in SMS part AX00.
Further information on resetting and restoration to
service of axle counters is given in GK/RT0217.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
13 Axle Counter Restoration Form BR29789/2

(or equivalent)
Each Network Rail Area shall specify which procedure is
to be followed for axle counter reset and restoration,
including the records to be kept by the technician,
supervisor, signaller, Network Rail Area Production
Manager, or to be retained on site.
Supplies of form BR29789/2 (April 2006) given in Figure
B2, or local equivalent, shall be kept at each site where
axle counter reset equipment requires its use. It may be
printed in multiple parts to facilitate the restoration
procedure. The form may be completed on site, with
communications between technician and signaller
conducted by telephone.
The form fulfils the following purposes:
• for the technician to assure the signaller that the
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
work is complete and the axle counter reset;

--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Date: April 2006
Axle Counter Restoration Form

Page: 23 of 26
Issue: 02
Figure B2
NR/GI/B003
Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
• for the signaller to satisfy himself that the section of

line is clear;
• for the signaller to request the technician to restore
the specified axle counter to permit movements
between specified signals;
• for the technician to cancel the isolation and restore
the axle counter in accordance with section 12;
• for the signaller to operate a restoration device,
where provided; and
• for the technician to record details of the
restoration, including the incremental counter
number where provided.
14 Changeover of Duplicate and Back-Up Systems

Changeover between alternative systems is subject to
GK/RT0027, which for each existing system requires:
This also covers initialisation of systems following power
failure or disconnection.
This section applies to:
a) safety-related power supplies,
b) interlocking systems (for SSI see section 8),
c) signaller's control and indication systems (including
override and all-signals-on control),
d) remote control systems (see SSP 50),
e) level crossing CCTV.
This list is not exhaustive.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
15 Seals
Seals on instruments, relays and other apparatus shall
not be broken unless under supervision of the
supervisor. Some timing relays may require unsealing
before adjustment and do not require supervision. These
shall then be resealed.
Note: Seals on SSI modules are colour coded, to
indicate which organisation has sealed the
module, as follows:
Authority Seal
Network Rail staff red plastic seals for WRSL
(and appointed agents) modules and sealing pliers that
indicate 'NR' for Alstom
modules
WRSL (manufacturing black plastic seals
operations)
WRSL (project delivery) grey plastic seals
WRSL (overseas) blue plastic seals
not for use on NR
Alstom lead type with appropriate
indication
16 Use, Diversion and Reinstatement of Multicore

Cables
For the use of single post terminations with red dome nut
protection, and other issues, see SMTH Appendix D1
and Test Plans in the CA series.
17 Temporary Signalling Alterations and

Reinstatement
For alterations and reinstatement, see section D013 and
SMTH Test Plans in the A&R series.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Further Information
GE/RT8000 Rule Book
RT3186 (form) Release of Signalling Controls
GE/RT8071 Control Facilities for use during Signalling
Failures
(yet to be published)
GK/RT0027 Resetting and Restoration to Service of
Signalling Systems
GK/RT0054 Radio Electronic Token Block
SSP 50 Remote Control Standby Arrangements
SSI 8003-10 SSI Data Preparation: Interlocking
SSI 8500F Design of SSI Schemes:
Chapter F: Signalman’s Console
NR/SP/SIG/11201 Signalling Design: Production
Handbook
NR/GN/SIG/11600 Signalling and Operational
Telecommunications Design: Technical
Guidance
NR/GN/SIG/11774 Clamp Lock Handbook
NR/SP/SIG/17004 Requirements Specification for SSI
Technician’s Terminal
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`

Ref: NR/L2/SIG/10064/B004
Issue: 1
Date: 04 December 2010
Compliance date: 05 March 2011
NR/GI/B004 - Preservation of Evidence After Accidents and Incidents

This section covers your responsibilities to assist in the preservation of evidence
following an accident or incident. The Rule Book requires evidence to be preserved
for major accidents or incidents. However, the scope is to be extended to other
Signalling and Telecommunications safety related incidents. It applies to all
Signalling and Telecommunications Engineering staff, employed directly by or
contracted to Network Rail and working either directly (for instance, Maintenance or
Faulting) or indirectly (for instance, producing work which may effect Network Rail
assets, such as Signalling Design, Installation or Testing work) on Network Rail
infrastructure.
This section also reinforces the Signalling Maintenance Testing Handbook
NR/L3/SIG/11231 and the Telecommunications Maintenance Testing Handbook
NR/L2/TEL/31001.
1. Safety
The first duty of any staff working on Signalling and Telecommunications equipment
is always the safety of themselves, third parties, the trains and the infrastructure.
Where an accident or incident can be prevented, by removing dangerously defective
equipment from use, or protecting it, this shall be done in accordance with Rules,
Standards and Procedures. Such protection is outwith the scope of this General
Instruction.
2. Major Accidents and Incidents
Rule Book Module M5 applies. In summary, this looks to safety first (securing the
train, protecting the line, having the electric traction turned off, calling the emergency
services and protecting passengers, staff and any other people that might be
involved.)
A second important priority is to leave the evidence undisturbed until a responsible
person arrives to take control of the investigation.
3. Other Accidents and Incidents
Where a situation is discovered with the potential to cause a train accident or to

injure the public or staff (other than those covered within Rule Book Module M5)
arising from a defect or error within the Signalling or Operational
Telecommunications system, then the same principles shall apply. Examples of
accidents or incidents to be included are :-
•Design deficiencies discovered after the signalling has been commissioned
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
•Testing errors or omissions discovered after the signalling has been

commissioned or brought into use
•Vandalism leading to a wrong side failure
The first duty is protection of the line, staff, and other personnel. Protection of the
line could involve blocking the line with the signaller if the incident is serious enough,
Page 1 of 2
Ref: NR/L2/SIG/10064/B004
Issue: 1
Date: 04 December 2010
Compliance date: 05 March 2011
or signing the signalling out of use. It is, however, unlikely that the emergency
services will be required.
All Signalling and Operational Telecommunications related incidents or accidents will
involve investigation under Signal Maintenance Testing Handbook or
Telecommunications Maintenance Testing Handbook procedures. Until a person
qualified under one of these two handbooks arrives to take charge of the
investigation, Signalling and Telecommunications staff are to leave any evidence
pertaining to the incident undisturbed.
Once the line has been protected, examples of evidence that shall be left
undisturbed include:
•State of the diagrams at the time of the incident
•Defective equipment
•Testing straps and jumpers left in circuits
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
•Extraneous wires
•Seized pulleys, wheels and cranks
•Obstructing vegetation
•Third party property
•Incorrectly installed equipment
•External items - detritus etc.
•Cab Secure Radio data logger information
•GSM-R logging information and alarms
•Concentrator card alarms
•Data Logging information from PABX concentrators
•NRN Radio Channel Change button
The above list is not exhaustive.
Once the Signalling or Telecommunications Failure Investigator arrives, they will
take charge of the situation. The person who will investigate is trained in assessing
the situation and arranging for the appropriate level of investigation. It is essential
that this is done for an accurate diagnosis of the immediate and root causes of the
accident or incident - looking to prevent repetition in the future.
Signalling and Telecommunications staff may be asked to assist or cooperate in the
investigation, and it is essential that regardless of affiliation, a professional approach
is taken at all times.
Page 2 of 2
Issue: 02
Date: March 2018
Page 1 of 11
Page:
NR/GI/B005
Remote Reset of Signalling Equipment
1. Scope
This module covers the remote resetting of SSI TFMs.
2. Background
If an SSI TFM failure is recoverable, such as input or output interface failures,
an attempt can be made to reset the module remotely whilst Technicians are
en-route. If the module resets correctly, this will temporarily enable the train
service to be restored and the failure to be investigated.
The use of the reset system is not an alternative to the Technician’s
attendance.
3. Principles of Giving a Reset

The request for a reset will be made by the Signaller to resolve a known fault.
The following requirements shall apply:
a) a reset given under this authority shall only be undertaken twice for a
given SSI TFM in a 24 hour period and is enforced in the reset
software;
b) before a reset is given, assurance shall be obtained from the Signaller
that there are no train movements on any line(s) within the area
controlled by the SSI TFM;
NOTE: The SSI Reset software displays the functions being controlled.
c) the Signaller shall be advised just prior to any reset being given and
when train movements can be resumed.
The precise method of reset is documented in section 6.
If the reset request is considered unsafe or there is any doubt about the reset
requirements, the SM(S) shall be informed.
4. Competence
A reset shall only be undertaken by a competent person authorised by the
S&TME.
5. Authorisation and Records

The S&TME is accountable for:
a) all authorised Users under their control and record of these;
b) briefing of users prior to the process being used;
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
c) the removal of any user who no longer requires access.

This should be within 2 weeks.

Issue: 02
Date: March 2018
Page 2 of 11
Page:
NR/GI/B005
Records are kept electronically within the SSI Reset log file for each login and
include:
 User Name
 Time & Date
 Equipment Reset
 Reason for reset
 Successful Reset [Yes/No].
6. Method of Resetting SSI TFM

Check that the correct TFM is selected and the equipment controlled by it
does not affect train movements. Assurance shall be obtained from the
Signaller.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
6.1 Login and Browser Information

The reset process is initiated from a web based application.
Login screen (Figure 1) is presented. Enter user name, password and click
OK.
Figure 1 – Login Screen

Issue: 02
Date: March 2018
Page 3 of 11
Page:
NR/GI/B005
6.2 Reset Operations: Screen 1

Once logged in, a list of reset operations you are authorised to undertake
(Figure 2) are presented. Select ‘Reset SSI’.
Figure 2 – Reset Selection Screen 1 --``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
6.3 Reset Operations: Screen 2

The second Reset Operations screen (Figure 3) shows the locations of the
modules and selecting a location will take you to a sub menu listing all of the
TFM’s at that site. The process is shown in Figures 3-6.

Issue: 02
Date: March 2018
Page 4 of 11
Page:
NR/GI/B005
Figure 3 – Reset Selection Screen 1
Figure 4 – Reset Sub-Selection Screen 2 after selecting Broxbourne in Figure

3
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: March 2018
Page 5 of 11
Page:
NR/GI/B005
Figure 5 – Reset Sub-Selection Screen 3 after selecting Region 1 in Figure 4
Figure 6 – Reset Sub-Selection Screen 4 after selecting

REB 48.75 in Figure 5
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
You can then select;
 Reset (see 6.3.1) or

 Assets (see 6.7.1) or
 Logs (see 6.7.2)

Issue: 02
Date: March 2018
Page 6 of 11
Page:
NR/GI/B005
6.3.1 Reset
The reset screen is a confirmation that you wish to reset the selected module
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Figure 7 – Confirmation Dialogue Box
6.4 Signaller Check

Selecting ‘Yes’ to the confirmation brings up a screen to confirm that the
signaller has been informed.
Figure 8 – Signaller Check Screen

Issue: 02
Date: March 2018
Page 7 of 11
Page:
NR/GI/B005
6.5 Reset Reason

Clicking ‘Yes’ in the confirmation dialog box brings up the reset reason screen
(Figure 6). Enter the six digit fault number, select a reason for reset and re-
enter the password to the TFM reset process. Then click ‘OK’
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Figure 9 – Reset Reason Screen
6.6 Resetting Screen

The progress of the reset process is reported on the web page and shows
successful connection and reset initiation. The SSI TFM has been reset when
‘Completed’ appears.

Issue: 02
Date: March 2018
Page 8 of 11
Page:
NR/GI/B005
Figure 10 – SSI Reset Complete
6.7 SSI Reset successfully?

The next screen to appear requests if the reset was successful, enter ‘Yes’ or
‘No’.
Figure 11 – SSI Reser Successful?
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: March 2018
Page 9 of 11
Page:
NR/GI/B005
6.7.1 Assets
By clicking on the asset box in the Module, Description or Logs columns a pop
up box with additional information about the unit (Figure 9) will appear.
Figure 12 – Additional Information
6.7.2 Logs
The Logs section gives you access to further information about each rest. By
selecting Details you can see further details of the TFM, shown in Figure 14.
The edit column allows you to update information about the TFM, such as a
new Serial Number. This page is shown in Figure 15
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: March 2018
Page 10 of 11
Page:
NR/GI/B005
Figure 13 – Logs
Figure 14 – TFM Reset Details
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: March 2018
Page 11 of 11
Page:
NR/GI/B005
Figure 15 – Edit details of the TFM
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
6.8 Close Browser
Once the reset is completed, it is recommended that the browser is closed to
end the session to prevent any unauthorised access.
7. Investigation of Fault
Technicians shall attend site to investigate the failure before the fault can be
closed in FMS.
END

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
NR/GI/C001 Page: 1 of 12
Clearances for S&T Equipment
1 Standard Structure Gauge

Signalling equipment shall be located so that it does not
encroach on the standard structure gauge limits shown
in Figures C3 and C5, except as permitted below. The
technician must consult the supervisor regarding any
new equipment which would be foul to gauge and report
any existing equipment such as stay wires, balance
levers and ground signals which is foul to gauge.
All guys or line wires permanently above the track must
be fixed at height not less than 6100mm above rail level.
Temporary wires or ropes over the track must not be
lower than 5500mm above rail level or, if less, no train
must be allowed to pass until the wire or rope has been
removed. Supports for carrying temporary wires or ropes
shall be fixed securely and, if necessary, guyed.
2 Signal Structures on Lines of 100mph or Less

Where the maximum permitted speed is 100mph or less,
the standard structure gauge (Figure C3) requires the
following:
a) no part of any signal structure (post, SPT, ladder,
hoops, platform, handrails, or screening) below
4640mm above rail level shall normally encroach
within 1624mm of the running edge;
b) where the above is not achievable, an absolute
minimum distance of 1364mm may be used in case
of difficulty, such as where sighting is obstructed by
OLE masts;
c) any further reduction (e.g. to take advantage of the
curvature of the vehicle gauge) is subject to
individual site assessment by the Track Geometry &
Gauging National Specialist Team.
A straight post shall not be installed between two lines
unless there is a minimum distance of 2728mm, plus the
width of the widest part of the structure, between running
edges.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
See section 6 for horizontal and vertical increases due to

canted and curved track.
Signals must be installed so that they do not infringe the
standard structure gauge unless the sighting form
indicates that specific authority has been given by the
Track Geometry & Gauging National Specialist Team.
Note: When sighting signals, the appropriate signal
structure drawings shall be consulted to enable
the width of the structure or the position of the
signal post centre line to be calculated.
When positioning ground signals, the detailed lower
sector structure gauge in section 7 shall be used.
3 Signal Structures on Lines over 100mph

--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Where the maximum permitted speed exceeds 100mph,

but does not exceed 125mph, the standard structure
gauge shall be the same as in section 2, but with a
distance of 2480mm substituted for the normal 1624mm
in point a).
4 Walkways
The requirements for walkways given in
NR/SP/OHS/069 are illustrated in Figure C4.
The minimum distance from the running edge is
1300mm, but a distance of 2000mm shall be provided
where practicable. This shall be increased to 2406mm
adjacent to an unboarded conductor rail, or 2100mm
where the maximum permitted speed exceeds 100mph.
Note: The 2100mm still applies where speed exceeds
125mph even though staff access is prohibited,
since traffic can be temporarily restricted to allow
access.
See section 6 for horizontal increases on the above
figures due to canted and curved track.
The width of the walkway is to be 700mm.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
5 Cable Routes
The requirements are illustrated in Figure C4.
The normal minimum distance of a cable route is
2000mm from the running edge, passing on the
trackside of apparatus cases, signals, overhead line
masts and other obstructions. However, a reduced
clearance of 1250mm from the running edge is permitted
in case of difficulty. (If this is not achievable, the
supervisor should be consulted.) Where necessary, a
distance of 2600mm from the running edge shall be
provided to minimise interference in signalling and
telecoms cables.
No increases on the above figures are required due to
canted and curved track.
Where necessary, the cable route may be positioned
beneath the walkway, provided the lids are flush with the
surface.
A troughing route shall not be installed between two
lines unless there is a minimum distance of 4100mm
between running edges.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
6 Cant and Curvature
Additional allowance for cant and curvature shall be
added to the structure gauge dimensions, as given in
Figure C1.
The horizontal allowances (Tables 1 and 2) are to be
added to the required horizontal clearance measured
from the appropriate running edge.
The vertical allowance (Table 1) is to be added to the
required vertical clearance measured from the lower rail.
Note: All distances in this section C001 shall be
measured vertically or horizontally, irrespective
of the plane of the rails.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Table 1 - Allowance for Cant in mm

Cant Add Add
Horizontal # Vertical
0 0 0
10 33 22
20 65 43
30 97 64
40 129 86
50 161 107
60 193 128
70 225 150
80 257 171
90 289 192
100 320 214
110 352 235
120 383 256
130 415 277
140 446 299
150 477 320
160 509 342
170 540 363
180 571 385
190 602 406
200 632 427
Notes:
1 The horizontal figures from Table 1 and 2 must be added
together.
2 Tables 1 & 2 are based on the 4640mm vertical clearance
and 1624mm horizontal clearance from the running edge.
3 The lower rail is taken as rail level for vertical clearances.
# Added only to dimensions on inside of curve (dimensions
on outside of curve unaffected).
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Table 2 - Horizontal Allowance for Overthrow

of Rolling Stock on Curves in mm
Centre-throw End-throw
Radius of curve increase on increase on
(m) inside of curve outside of curve
100 257 450
125 200 350
200 128 225
250 100 175
300 85 150
400 64 115
500 51 95
750 34 65
1000 26 50
1500 17 34
2000 13 26
more than 2000 0 0
Figure C1 Additional Clearance
Required for Cant and Curves
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
7 Detailed Lower Sector Structure Gauge

The lower sector structure gauge (Figure C5) shall be
used for signalling equipment located within the four foot
or within 1m of the running edge. The top of the
signalling equipment shall not encroach above rail level
except as indicated, or foul the structure gauge unless
specially authorised by the Track Geometry & Gauging
National Specialist Team.
Note: It is accepted that trainstops in the raised
position will be foul to gauge.
Additional allowance for cant and curvature shall be
added to the dimensions when positioning ground
signals, as given in Figure C2. This depends on whether
the route has acceptance for Eurostar rolling stock or
2.6m wide containers.
The horizontal allowances "X1" & "X2" (Tables 3 and 4)
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
are both to be added to the required 730mm horizontal

clearance measured from the appropriate running edge.
The vertical allowance "Y" (Table 3) is to be subtracted
from the permitted 915mm vertical distance on the inside
of the curve, measured from the lower rail.
Note: Eurostar rolling stock requires an additional
clearance of 30mm, even on straight track.
Table 3 - Horizontal Overthrow Allowance "X1" mm
Radius of Standard Class 373 2.6m Wide Containers
curve (m) Gauge Eurostar inside outside
curve curve
< 160 subject to special assessment
160 96 126 96 145
200 63 93 63 104
250 37 67 37 71
300 20 50 20 49
360 5 35 5 31
≥ 500 0 30 0 0

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Notes:
1 The horizontal figures from Table 3 and 4 must be added
together.
2 Tables 3 & 4 are based on the 915mm vertical distance
and 730mm horizontal clearance from the running edge.
3 The lower rail is taken as rail level for vertical clearances.
4 Table 3 includes a 5mm allowance for sidewear on curves.
5 Table 4 applies only to dimensions on inside of curve
(dimensions on outside of curve unaffected).
Table 4 - Allowance for Cant in mm on inside of curve

Cant Add Subtract
Horizontal "X2" Vertical "Y"
0 0 0
10 6 5
20 13 10
30 19 15
40 25 20
50 32 25
60 38 31
70 44 36
80 50 41
90 56 46
100 62 51
110 68 56
120 74 61
130 80 66
140 86 81
150 92 86
160 98 92
170 103 97
180 109 102
190 115 107
200 121 112
Figure C2 Additional Clearances
Applicable to Dimensions "X" and "Y"
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
8 Enhanced Structure Gauge

The enhanced structure gauge in Figure C6, published
by HMRI, is only for use where specially authorised.
9 Non-Standard Structure Gauges

If there is any doubt as to the structure gauge for a
particular route, the details shall be ascertained from the
Track Geometry & Gauging National Specialist Team,
via the supervisor, before commencing work. (The
appendices in GE/GN8573 describe 13 possible vehicle
gauges.)
10 Clearance and Fouling Points within S&C

See NR/SP/SIG/11752 for detailed requirements for both
standard and Eurostar rolling stock.
Further Information
BR1612 Renovation and Construction of Cable
Routes
GC/RT5203 Infrastructure Requirements for Personal
Safety in Respect of Clearances and
Access
GE/RT8025 Electrical Protective Provisions for
Electrified Lines
GC/RT5212 Requirements for Defining and
Maintaining Clearances
GM/RT2149 Requirements for Defining and
Maintaining the Size of Railway Vehicles
GE/RT8270 Route Acceptance of Rail Vehicles
including changes in Operation or
Infrastructure
GE/GN8573 Guidance on Gauging
NR/SP/OHS/069 Lineside Facilities For Personal Safety
NR/SP/SIG/11752 Train Detection
NR/SP/TRK/015 Structure Gauge Policy
NR/SP/TRK/036 Management of Gauging and Clearances
NR/GN/ELP/65000 Assessment and Supply of Vehicle/ Track
Interface Parameters
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Provided by IHS Markit under license with Network Rail
Issue: 02
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Date: April 2006

Not for Resale, 09/19/2018 05:07:35 MDT
Licensee=Capita Symonds to Capita property & infrastructur/5965831001, User=Bong
Notes: See section 7 for Eurostar rolling stock on straight track. For additional clearances required for cant and curvature, see Figure C1.
# = optimum position. Actual distance to be determined by Sighting Committees.
Any proposal for further reduction in clearance is subject to site assessment by the Track Geometry & Gauging National Specialist Team.
Figure C3 Clearances for Lineside Equipment on Straight and Level Track where Permissible Speed does not exceed 125mph
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Notes: * = see Figure C3. For additional clearances required for cant and curvature, see Figure C1.
# = optimum position. Actual distance to be determined by Sighting Committees.
Any proposal for further reduction in clearance is subject to site assessment by the Track Geometry & Gauging National Specialist Team.
Figure C4 Clearances for Lineside Equipment on Straight and Level Track - Walkways and Cable Routes
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Note A: For lines electrified on the fourth rail system the fourth rail equipment extends to 40 mm above plane of the rails.
On other lines equipment close to the centre line of the track shall not extend more than 25 mm above plane of the rails.
Figure C5 Detailed Lower Sector Structure Gauge (see Figure C2 for "X" and "Y" Dimensions)
Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Figure C6 Enhanced Structure Gauge for Permissible Speed up to 300 km/h (for kinematic envelope up to 3290mm wide and 4700mm high)
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
NR/GI/D001 Page: 1 of 3
Before Starting Work
The following checklist gives items to consider before

starting work:
a) Do you have any handbooks or manuals necessary
for the work (GI, SMTH, SMS, SIH, SWTH, etc.)?
b) Are you competent (and, where applicable,
certificated) to work on the equipment and to use
any special tools required (section A012)?
c) Is the signaller aware of the work and is it entered
in the Train Register (section A017)?
d) Is green zone working practicable, or is it necessary
to follow the rules for red zone working?
e) Has Rule Book protection for traffic and personnel
been arranged where necessary (section B001)?
f) Do you have the correct version of the site records
or alteration drawings for the work (section D025)?
g) Is there anything to suggest that the installation
does not conform to the records
(NR/GN/SIG/11115)?
h) Is there a risk assessment to permit redundant
equipment/wiring to remain in situ (section E053)?
i) Are you aware of any Health & Safety warnings on
the drawings, or signs to be affixed (section P015)?
j) Are you aware of any hazards in the vicinity of the
work (Hazard Directory)?
k) Will power supplies and/or conductor rail be
isolated, or will the equipment be live (sections
X002 & X022)?
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
l) If excavating, driving earth rods, or stake mounting,
do you have records of buried services (section
W003)?
m) Have you assessed for manual handling any heavy
or bulky items of equipment that need to be
moved?
n) Does work involve asbestos or other substances
harmful to health, such as lead or PCBs (sections
W004, W011 and W012)?

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
o) Is working at height involved (section W005)?

p) Are your tools or plant approved for the work and,
where applicable, is the calibration and/or
inspection within date (sections U001 & U002 and
SMS part A05)?
q) Do you have a safe system of work and are you
familiar with the method statement for the work
(SMS part A04 for maintenance and faulting;
NR/SP/OHS/008 for new work)?
r) Is electronic equipment involved and are there any
electromagnetic compatibility issues (section
E001)?
s) Are the materials and any new/replacement
equipment approved for use (section E012, SMS
part A06)?
t) Is there wire degradation or other damage that must
be reported (SIGTAN012, SMS part A08)?
u) Are the appropriate maintenance record cards
available for recording measurements (SMS part
A12)?
v) Do you have an arrangement for disposing of any
waste from the worksite (SMS part A14)?
w) Is there adequate space on racks, in trunking and
on fuse/terminal racks for any additional
equipment?
x) Is the power supply and/or air conditioning
adequate for any additional load?
y) Is any other signalling work being undertaken at the
same installation that might affect the work
(NR/SP/SIG/19607)?
z) Is there anything else that should be assessed
(NR/GN/SIG/11116)?
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Further Information
GI/RT7003 The Management of Construction Work in
the Operational Railway Environment
GI/RC7503 Recommendations for the Management
of Construction Work in the Operational
Railway Environment
NR/GN/SIG/11115 Correlation of Signalling Records
NR/GN/SIG/11116 Assessment of Signalling Systems before
Signalling Design Alterations
NR/GN/SIG/19012 SIGTAN012 - Cables and Wires used for
Signalling Systems
NR/PRC/MPI/CI0026 Process for locating Buried Services prior
to ground penetration
NR/SP/OHS/006 Maintenance and Contents of the
National Hazard Directory
NR/SP/OHS/008 Network Rail Contract Requirements -
Safety
NR/SP/SIG/10660 Implementation of Signalling Maintenance
Specifications
Handbook
NR/SP/SIG/11303 Signalling Installation Handbook
NR/SP/SIG/19607 Management of Overlapping and Parallel
Signalling
S.I.1994/3140 Construction (Design and Management)
Regulations 1994
(amended by SI2000/2380)
S.I.1999/3242 Management of Health and Safety at
Work Regulations 1999
(amended by SI2003/2500)
HSG150 Health and safety in construction
(HSE Books)
HSG224 Managing health and safety in
construction. CDM Regulations 1994:
ACoP & Guidance (HSE Books)
L21 Management of Health and Safety at
Work ACoP (HSE Books)
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Non-Conceptual Design
1 Non-Conceptual Design
This is work that is based directly on an applicable
existing design and does not introduce any new
functionality to a system. It includes work items that
facilitate maintenance, or performance improvements,
whilst maintaining similar functionality.
This section is generally confined to maintenance design
and like-for-like work.
Relaxations in the technical requirements for non-
conceptual work that is temporary in nature are given in
section D012.
The Signalling Maintenance Testing Handbook (SMTH)
specifies the test plans required for non-conceptual
work.
2 Examples
The following are examples of non-conceptual work to
which the relaxation below applies:
a) Like-for-like renewal of standard equipment or
cables (see SMTH), including the replacement of
missing equipment, or emergency renewals
following an incident. Any unforeseen alterations to
circuit diagrams or equipment profiles shall be
annotated on the diagrams.
b) Replacement with operationally equivalent
equipment as defined in SMTH, e.g. changing the
type of point detector, point machine, or signal
head; upgrading track circuit connections,
disconnection boxes, or cable terminations;
changing the type of secondary cell; changing a
lock and controller for a combined type; and
renewing an interlocking tappet without a redundant
notch.
c) Special arrangements defined in SMTH, such as
temporarily strapping out point detection; plain lining
the bonding at damaged S&C; and strapping out
redundant equipment. See section D013.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
d) Other temporary disconnection or strapping for

maintenance purposes.
e) Renewal of cables, where a different type or size of
cable has to be used. See NR/GN/SIG/11213.
f) Rectification of cable faults, using red cable fault
jumpers to spare conductors, in accordance with
the SMTH.
g) Like-for-like switch and crossing renewals without
altering the track circuit bonding: The track
organisation’s plan shall be compared with the
bonding plan for the like-for-like status of the
renewals to be confirmed. However, any clearance
or bonding deficiencies shall be corrected at this
time, unless the work would not be merited by the
achievable risk reduction (see section E051). The
GK/RT0011 requirement for clearance points and
other insulated rail joints shall be observed in the
design and checked on site after construction. See
NR/SP/SIG/11752 for bonding requirements.
The track organisation's plan shall be annotated
with the position of the insulated rail joints (IRJs),
extended bearers and other requirements.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
3 Design Relaxation
Where work is capable of being designed completely by
alterations superimposed on record diagrams and this is
documented (e.g. in a design specification or on a
project initiation form), minor alterations may be
undertaken from maintenance record copies of circuit
diagrams. The alterations shall be shown initially on the
prints in green and red, but still require independent
checking.
A signalling/scheme plan extract or dimensioned sketch
may be sufficient, rather than producing a full scheme
plan, where stated in the design specification or on the
project initiation form.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Other expedients are not permitted for non-conceptual

work. In particular, no relaxation shall be granted to the
requirement for independence between design
production, checking and testing functions.
4 Updating of Records
The documentation shall state the responsibility for
arranging for the records to be updated and prints issued
(see NR/GN/SIG/11701). Where the source records are
not held and the work is not like-for-like, the Area Signal
Engineer shall be informed of the alterations within 48
hours of their commissioning.
The annotated production details shall be endorsed with
a new version and a copy of the final alterations,
including rack layouts and analysis, incorporating any
commissioning modifications (preferably the test copy),
shall be provided for updating purposes. See
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
NR/GN/SIG/11701 for details.

A full issue of maintenance records shall be made in
accordance with section D031.
For genuine like-for-like work (i.e. replacing an item of
equipment or cable with the same type and size), no
records are required and the source records and their
version shall remain unaltered.
Further Information
GE/RT8000 Rule Book
NR/GN/SIG/11004 Symbols for Plans and Sketches Used in
Signalling Applications
NR/GN/SIG/11701 Signalling Design: Production Guidance
Handbook
NR/GN/SIG/11213 Signalling Cable Equivalent Sizes
END

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Temporary Work
This section covers the following types of work which

remain in use for a limited period of time:
i) temporary non-conceptual work (see section D011);
ii) short-lived work;
iii) stagework progressing towards an approved overall
scheme (see section D014); and
iv) redundant assets left in situ for a limited time (see
section E053).
1 Risk Assessment
The likelihood of the system integrity being jeopardised
by these relaxations shall be addressed by a risk
assessment that considers the following factors:
a) the time for which the work may remain;
b) the likelihood of future alterations to the temporary
work;
c) the possibility of protracted timescales, requiring
imposed solutions in the event of slippage; and
d) the introduction of temporary work on life-expired
equipment with no maintainability.
2 Examples of Temporary Work

The following are examples of the types of temporary
work to which these relaxations apply:
a) Short-lived alterations to circuitry during permanent
way works after which all signalling returns to the
previous arrangement (either to maintain point
detection, and disconnection of affected routes, or
to maintain track circuit operation following
temporary removal of defective switch and crossing
components).
b) Short-lived new work and alterations to circuitry
during disarrangement of locking or long term track
engineering works after which all signalling returns
to the previous arrangement (including the
temporary provision of automatic signalling or single
line operation).
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Temporary Work
c) Stagework (progressing towards an approved

overall scheme) that will be removed at a
subsequent stage.
d) Stagework at installations with a very limited life.
e) Minimum stagework alterations where switch and
crossing work is to be recovered before the final
design work can be completed (in order to maintain
point detection and/or track circuit operation, and
hence associated signal or route operation, when
redundant switch and crossing components are to
be recovered).
f) Like-for-like emergency work (imposed due to
genuine emergency situations such as accidents,
fire and vandalism).
g) Rectification of cable faults (using red cable fault
jumpers to spare conductors). See the SMTH.
h) Temporary speed restrictions (TSRs)
(involving the disconnection of AWS inductors
associated with the planned application of a TSR).
See GK/RT0038.
j) Release of controls for engineering work or single
line working, in accordance with the Rule Book
module T1A, and section B003.
k) Partially commissioned work.
l) Recovery of redundant assets, but only in situations
(c) and (d), defined in section E053.
No relaxation is permitted for stagework that is not
temporary.
3 Design Relaxation for Temporary Work

This section generally applies to major works and
associated temporary stagework, as described in
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
examples a), b) and c), above. Where temporary work is

non-conceptual in nature, then the design relaxation in
section D011 shall be applied instead.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Temporary Work
It may be beneficial to use the “two drawing” method, but

without altering the source records. The temporary
alterations shall be coloured red (and green) for the first
stage and green (and red) for the second stage.
A signalling/scheme plan extract or dimensioned sketch
may be sufficient, rather than producing a full scheme
plan, where stated in the design specification.
Other expedients are not permitted for temporary work
(unless it is also non-conceptual as described in section
D011). In particular, no relaxation shall be granted to the
requirement for independence between design
production, checking and testing functions.
It is essential that the source records remain in the
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
possession of the responsible design engineer whilst the

temporary work remains in force. Otherwise the full
requirements of NR/SP/SIG/11201 shall be applied.
A separate set of circuit diagrams shall be produced for
the introduction and abolition of the temporary work,
irrespective of the timescale between the two stages.
Each stage shall be clearly identified on each drawing or
book of diagrams.
Record and version control shall be applied in
accordance with NR/GN/SIG/11701, with a new version
for the temporary arrangement. Provided the design is
restored to its original arrangement after the second
commissioning, the second records issue shall bear the
original version, in correspondence with the unaltered
source records. If, however, the source records have to
be altered, then the version shall be updated for the
altered sheets.
A full issue of installation and testing details and
maintenance records, including analysis, shall be made
for both stages in accordance with NR/SP/SIG/11201.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Temporary Work
4 Technical Relaxation for Temporary Work

The following expedients may be used in connection with
temporary work, provided the control measures in
section 5 are also applied:
a) the retention of redundant circuitry and equipment,
subject to the constraints in section E053;
b) the retention of temporarily out of use circuitry and
equipment;
c) the provision of not yet commissioned circuitry and
equipment in working installations;
d) the disconnection, insulation and securing of wires
in accordance with section E052, in lieu of complete
removal;
e) the bridging out of contacts with crimped straps;
f) the replacement of fuses with dummy fuses;
g) the removal of links to form single post terminals
with red domed nuts and insulating battens to
prevent the replacement of links;
h) "top-nutting" single post terminals (see the SMTH),
or provision of horizontal terminals, for stagework
cable connections;
j) the use of coloured jumpers crimped at each end
(see the SMTH);
k) the false feeding of circuits by the use of jumpers
crimped at each end;
l) the patching of signal box diagrams and panel
faceplates with overlays.
Note that non-commissioned latched lock relays shall be
removed and their bases plugged and labelled to
prevent the insertion of a relay latched the wrong way. If
necessary, crimped straps may be used to enable other
circuits to be introduced.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Temporary Work
5 Control Measures
Control measures shall be arranged in accordance
with the following principles, whilst the temporary
arrangements remain in force:
a) the final records for all previous alterations
shall be complete, unless covered by a
relaxation in NR/SP/SIG/11201;
b) the strategy for any stagework shall be
identified in the design specification for the
scheme (see NR/GN/SIG/11701) and be
subject to a fully documented process of risk
assessment;
c) the affected wiring shall be correlated as far as
reasonably practicable, in accordance with
NR/GN/SIG/11115;
d) all the relevant diagrams, including analysis,
cable core plans and bonding plans, shall be
produced and issued for production, testing,
commissioning and maintenance purposes, in
accordance with NR/GN/SIG/11701, except for
non-conceptual work (see section D011);
e) temporarily out of use, not yet commissioned
and redundant controls, circuitry and
equipment shall be correctly identified as such
on the production and record diagrams (see
section D026);
f) each end of redundant / temporarily out of use
wiring shall be fully terminated or “bomb tailed”
at all times, as described in section E052.
Further Information
GE/RT8000 Rule Book
GK/RT0038 Speed Restrictions
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Temporary Work

Handbook
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Temporary Signalling Alterations
for Emergency Trackwork
1 Bonding of Broken Rail Joints

The track engineer is responsible for the integrity of
the rails at all times. Track circuits are not provided
to identify rail breaks or disconnections.
In the event of a rail break, the track engineer may
make a temporary repair to allow the passage of
trains.
Where rail breaks involve S&C components
(including crossings), section 2 may apply.
Where rail breaks are associated with plain line, a
temporary joint may be bonded around to allow the
track circuit to work normally. Before restoration to
service, a full track circuit test shall be carried out.
Note: If the expected time to repair the joint is less
than the time required to complete the
bonding, it is not necessary to bond around
the temporary joint.
Note: In d.c. electrified areas, any rail carrying
traction current will be bonded by the
electrification linesman, rather than the
signalling technician.
2 Trackwork Associated with Switches and

Crossings
This section sets out the procedure to be adopted if
temporary alterations to track circuit bonding or
point detection circuits have to be made as a result
of the track engineer being unable to replace a
broken switch, stock rail, or crossing nose.
It also sets out the procedure to be adopted for
restoring the permanent track circuit bonding or
point detection circuits after the broken switch,
stock rail or crossing nose has been reinstated.
It applies in the following situations:
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
a) Where a crossing is temporarily taken out of

use or is replaced by a rail for one of the two
routes.
b) Where a switch is removed but the stock rail
remains.
c) Where a stock rail and switch is replaced by a
rail simulating the switch in either closed, or
open position. (Where a stock rail is replaced
by plain rail, the switch rail must also be
removed).
This instruction does not cover any situations where
the points would have to be moved for flank or
operating purposes.
Note: In d.c. electrified areas, the traction rail will
be bonded by the electrification linesman,
rather than the signalling technician.
2.1 Temporary Alterations

When advice is received that a broken switch, stock
rail or crossing nose will not immediately be
replaced like for like, the technician must arrange
for the supervisor to be advised of the
circumstances.
Work shall be undertaken in accordance with non-
conceptual design procedures (section D011).
All affected routes, together with the points and the
track circuit containing the broken crossing stock
rail or switch, must be signed out of use in
accordance with the Rule Book module T1A.
2.1.1 Crossings (situation a):

When a broken crossing cannot immediately be
replaced, the appropriate points must be
clipped, scotched and padlocked so that no
movements can take place towards broken or
missing rails.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
If the track circuit is capable of operating and

the bonding does not require a design
alteration, the track circuit must be tested in
accordance with the Full Test procedure of the
appropriate Signalling Maintenance
Specification, or SMTH Test Plan CA01 if the
track circuit cables are affected.
If the track circuit is not capable of operating, as
a result of missing bonding, a design for
temporary bonding must be added to the
existing bonding plan to simulate the missing
rail(s). Where the missing bonding is identified
as yellow bonding, the supervisor must be
consulted. The technician shall identify all
signalled routes which require disconnection
reading over the missing or broken rails. An
independent person competent in signalling
failure investigation or an independent qualified
signalling design checker, shall check the list of
proposed signalled route disconnections and
the proposed temporary bonding arrangements.
The design for temporary bonding and the list of
signalled routes to be disconnected shall be
signed and dated by the persons who have
produced and checked these details.
The technician must then arrange for all
identified and checked signalled routes reading
over the missing or broken rails to be
disconnected and for temporary bonding to be
installed in accordance with the checked
bonding plan. Where reasonably practicable,
the effectiveness of disconnections shall be
verified before they are relied upon and the
presence of signaller's reminder devices shall
be confirmed.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
An independent competent tester must test all

work carried out under this section, 2.1.1,
before the track circuit is restored as available
for use. Where appropriate, the Test Plan shall
be based on SMTH test plan:
A&R02 Temporary Alterations to Track
Circuit Bonding
2.1.2 Stock and Switch Rails (situations b

and c):
Track circuits shall be dealt with as described in
section 2.1.1.
The production of temporary design details for
the alteration of point detection circuits to allow
signalled movements over intact parts of the
affected layout must be carried out by the
Signalling Design Authority (this is the preferred
option), or by an independent person competent
in signalling failure investigation.
The temporary design must include as much of
the original detection circuitry and contacts as
the circumstances allow, having regard to the
requirements of section 2.1.3.
All temporary design details so produced must
be checked by an independent person
competent in signalling failure investigation or
an independent qualified signalling design
checker.
All temporary design drawings must bear the
signatures of the persons producing and
checking the design.
All temporary wiring must be installed with an
easily identifiable coloured wire, (not red), in
accordance with the checked temporary design
details and to approved installation standards.
Labelling must be applied to all temporary
wiring.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
A Test Plan for the temporary alterations must

be produced by a competent tester and must be
checked by an independent competent tester.
Where appropriate, the Test Plan shall be
selected from, or based on, the following SMTH
test plans:
A&R01 Temporary Alteration to Point
Detection
A&R02 Temporary Alterations to Track
Circuit Bonding
Testing must only be undertaken by a
competent tester. To maintain independence,
no person involved with the production or
checking of design details or with the
installation work, may take part in any testing
activity, except in an assisting capacity.
2.1.3 Securing of Switch Rails:

For situations b) and c) where a switch on either
side has been removed but the stock rail
remains or has been replaced by a rail
simulating a switch. If the remaining switch on
the opposite site is required to be secured in the
closed position, this must be as specified in
section E054. Additionally the stretcher bars
must be removed, together with any detector or
lock rods or clamp lock components which have
been disconnected from the missing switch.
If the remaining switch on the opposite side
would normally require to be secured in the
open position, the requirement for all stretcher
bars to be fitted to secure the open switch
cannot be met. In these circumstances the
switch blade must be removed.
In this case all stretcher bars and detector or
lock rods or clamp lock components which have
been disconnected from the switches must be
removed.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
If a point end which has been dealt with in this

way is part of double ended or multiple ended
points, all the ends involved must be clipped,
scotched and padlocked in the position required
by the signaller.
2.2 Reinstatement
When the crossing, switch or stock rail which has
been temporarily removed is to be reinstated, the
technician must arrange for the supervisor to be
advised of the circumstances.
2.2.1 Crossings (situation a):

When a crossing is to be reinstated and
temporary bonding was not required in section
2.1.1, the replacement crossing must be
bonded in accordance with the bonding plan.
The track circuit must be tested in accordance
with the full test procedure of the appropriate
Signalling Maintenance Specification.
All affected routes together with the points
which were signed out of use and the track
circuit may then be restored as available for
use.
If the bonding of the replacement crossing has
involved the removal and reinstatement of track
circuit cables or jumpers this must be tested in
accordance with SMTH Test Plan CA01.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
When a crossing is to be reinstated and

temporary bonding has been applied in
accordance with section 2.1.1, a new copy of
the permanent bonding plan shall be obtained
in advance, where practicable, and the
replacement crossing must be bonded in
accordance with this bonding plan. Otherwise,
the original, marked up, copy may be used, in
which case a replacement clean record copy
must be provided as soon as practicable (see
section D031).
Where the temporary or permanent bonding is
identified as yellow bonding, the supervisor
must be consulted. An independent competent
tester must test all work carried out under this
paragraph before the points, the signalled
routes and the track circuit are restored as
available for use.
signalled routes which have been disconnected
in accordance with section 2.1.1 to be
reconnected.
2.2.2 Stock and Switch Rails (situations b

and c):
When a switch or stock rail is to be reinstated,
track circuits shall be dealt with as described in
2.2.1 above.
All stretcher bars, detector or lock rods or clamp
lock components must be replaced.
A new copy of the original wiring diagrams shall
be obtained in advance, where practicable, and
the permanent wiring of the point detection
circuits reinstated and all temporary wiring
removed. Otherwise, the original, marked up,
copy may be used, in which case a replacement
clean record copy must be provided as soon as
practicable (see section D031).
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
An independent competent tester must test all

work carried out under this section, 2.2.2,
before the points, the signalled routes and the
track circuit are restored as available for use.
signalled routes which have been disconnected
in accordance with section 2.1.1 to be
reconnected.
Further Information
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
GE/RT8000 Rule Book
GI/RT7004 Requirements for the Design, Operation
and Maintenance of Points
Handbook
END

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Stagework
1 Planning
In planning the stagework programme for a multiple
stage project, allowance must be made for missed
stages or incomplete work in the programme.
2 Separate Alterations
Each stage to be commissioned on a separate date will
be treated as a separate alteration (with a separate
stage scheme plan where applicable). A separate set of
design details will be produced for each stage,
irrespective of the timescale between stages.
If it is necessary to divide work for one stage into
separate packages because of external safety-related
constraints, such as possession availability, each
package will generally be treated as a separate
alteration. However, a number of work packages may be
issued as a single alteration if all the following apply:
a) the packages are independent of each other (i.e.
may be undertaken in any order without affecting
the others), as regards design, installation and
testing;
b) installation activities present a low risk (as a
minimum, the correlation requirements have been
satisfied);
c) none of the packages are part of a multi-stage
project;
d) each package is clearly and suitably identified on
the design details;
e) maintenance record copies are provided and
annotated at each juncture, in accordance with
Part L of NR/GN/SIG/11701, to show which
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
packages have been brought into use; and
f) the issue of multiple work packages as a single
alteration is identified and agreed in the design
specification.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Stagework
3 Coloured Stagework Wiring

Temporary stagework wiring (that is to be removed
before or at the final commissioning) will be identified on
drawings (using the code shown in Figure D1) requiring
it to be run in a distinctive colour (e.g. blue, orange,
violet, brown or grey). Note that the colour used for
temporary straps, usually yellow (section U034), and red
which is reserved for temporary cable core diversion
(SMTH Appendix D1), must not be used for stagework.
Where confusion might arise, the colours of any power
cables in the vicinity should also be avoided.
Colour Letter Code
Black BK
Blue (including Light Blue) BU
Brown BN
Gold GD
Green GN
Grey (Slate) GY
Orange OG
Pink PK
Red RD
Silver SR
Turquoise TQ
Violet (Purple) VT
White WH
Yellow YE
Green and Yellow GNYE
Figure D1 Code for Designation of Colours
from BS 7645:1993
Relaxations in the technical requirements for temporary

work are given in section D012. No relaxation is
permitted for stagework that is not temporary.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Stagework
When it is known that installation is to be in progress on

more than one set of stagework drawings (stage or
package) at the same time, the drawings will be
endorsed to require wires for each stage to be clearly
identified. The type of identification will be agreed after
consultation with the relevant tester in charge.
4 Staging Back
Where the final arrangement is designed first, and then
"staged back" to create the previous stage designs,
special care shall be taken, since the design for any one
stage is likely to contain wiring or data for several stages
that are not yet commissioned.
5 Partially Commissioned Installations

As soon as part of the equipment in an apparatus case
is operational, the notice given in Figure D2 should be
affixed inside the door.
As soon as any portion of equipment in an equipment
room is commissioned, the relevant links, fuses, relays
and other pieces of apparatus concerned including
associated telecoms equipment, e.g. TDM line circuits
etc., must be marked with red adhesive tape, and the
notice given in Figure D2 should be displayed. The tape
is to be attached such that, as far as practicable, testing
can be carried out without its removal. (If the tape has to
be removed for testing or other work the person
removing the tape is responsible for its replacement.)
Otherwise, the tape shall only be removed once the relay
room is completely operational. The individual marking
of equipment is not necessary if a complete area of
working equipment, e.g. fuse panel, relay rack etc., can
be taped off as operational.
Requirements for the presentation of partially
commissioned circuitry are given in section D026.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Stagework
Figure D2 Partially Operational Notice (BR 13112)
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Stagework
Further Information
NR/SP/SIG/19607 Management of Overlapping and Parallel
Signalling
BS 7645 Code for designation of colours
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Ref NR/SP/SIG/10064
Issue 02
Date April 2006
The external documents quoted in "Further Information" at

the end of each section are available as indicated:
BSi British Standards Institute

http://www.bsonline.bsi-global.com
OPSI Office of Public Sector Information

http://www.opsi.gov.uk
This covers Acts of Parliament and Statutory
Instruments (Regulations) published since 1988.
HSE Health and Safety Executive

http://www.hse.gov.uk
HSE Books
http://www.hsebooks.com
RGS Railway Group Standards

http://www.rssb.co.uk/rgs.asp
Page 5 of 5
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Plans and Diagrams of Engineering Details
1 Types of Drawing
The diagrams provided for maintenance, installation or
testing purposes fall into the following categories:
• Plans and Schematics
• Circuit Diagrams and associated information
• Signal Sighting Forms
• Control Tables
• other Engineering Details and Schedules.
A list referencing more information about each type of
drawing is given in Figure D3.
Site records, in black and white, are endorsed
MAINTENANCE COPY and carry at least the "produced"
initials to signify that they are a true copy of a certified
master record. Similarly, prints issued for correlation
purposes are endorsed CORRELATION COPY.
Diagrams supplied for installation work are endorsed
INSTALLATION COPY and carry both "produced" and
"checked" initials and an issue date. The only exception
to this rule is for diagrams which have been colour
plotted from a Computer Aided Design system, in which
case the "produced" initials signify that the original has
been checked and the colouring is correct. Any design
details that are unchecked and issued for preliminary
information, or material ordering, etc., are endorsed
PRELIMINARY COPY or DRAFT COPY and carry an
issue date. Similarly, prints issued for testing purposes,
generally on pink paper, are endorsed TEST COPY.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Conventions Content
Documentation NR/GN/SIG/ NR/GN/SIG/
11701 Part M 11701 Part N
Scheme Plan 3 1.1
Signalling Plan 3 1.2
Signal Box Notes and General Notes 1.3
Numbering Grids 1.4
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Signal Spacing Parameters 1.5
Aspect Sequence Charts 1.6
Table of Signal Routes 1.7
Stage Scheme Plans 3 1.8
Signal Sighting Forms 1.9
Level Crossing Ground Plan 2
Control Tables 4 3
Track Section Schedule 3.4
Location Area Plans 3 4.1
Bonding Plans 4.2
Soleplate or S&C Plans 4.3
Cable Route Plan 4.4
Cable Schematic Plans 6.2 4.5
Cable Core Plans 5.2, 6.2 4.6
Power Distribution Plans 6.2 4.7
Mechanical Locking Charts and Lever Details 4.8
Mechanical Operation Details 4.9
Mechanical Engineering Details for Points and 4.10
Signals
Signal Box and Interlocking Circuit Diagrams 5, 6, 7 4.11
Index Sheet 4.11.1
Explanation or Reference Sheet 5.6, 6.1, 7 4.11.2
Equipment Room Layout 4.11.3
Equipment Rack Layouts 7 4.11.4
Electronic System Schematic and Allocation 5.3 4.11.5
Inter-Rack/Cubicle Cable Schematic Analysis 5.2, 8 4.11.6
Power Cubicle/Rack Layouts 4.11.7
Power Supply and Earthing Arrangements 4.11.8
Fuse Analysis 8 4.11.9
Lever Lock and Circuit Controller Analysis 8 4.11.10
Contact Analysis 5.2, 8 4.11.11
Cable Termination Rack Layout 6.4 4.11.12
Cable Termination Analysis 5.2, 6.4, 6.5, 8 4.11.13
Temporary Approach Control and Route Dis 8 4.11.14
Link Analysis
Remote Control and Train Describer Interface 5 4.11.15
Circuits
Interlocking, Control and Associated Circuits 5 4.11.16

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Conventions Content
Documentation NR/GN/SIG/ NR/GN/SIG/
11701 Part M 11701 Part N
Alarm and Indication Circuits 5 4.11.17
Signalling Control and Display System Circuits 5 4.11.18
Fusing and Looping Arrangements 6.1 4.11.19
Maintainer's Monitoring Panel Circuits 5 4.11.20
Level Crossing Schematics 4.11.21
System Schematics (external) 5.3 4.11.22
Lineside Location Circuit Diagrams 5, 6.3 4.12
Location Circuit Diagrams: Frontsheet 3 4.12.1
Location Circuit Diagrams: Case or 7 4.12.2
Equipment Room Layout
Location Circuit Dgms: Power Supplies & 8 4.12.3
Busbar Analysis
Location Circuit Diagrams: Train Detection 5, 6.3 4.12.4
Circuits
Location Circuit Diagrams: Signal Circuits 5, 6.3 4.12.5
Location Circuit Diagrams: Point Circuits 5, 6.3 4.12.6
Location Circuit Diagrams: Miscellaneous 5, 6.3 4.12.7
Circuits
Location Circuit Diagrams: Analysis 6.4, 8 4.12.8
Electronic System Details 4.13
Train Describer System Details 4.13.4
Signalling Control and Display System Details 5.1
Lockout Device Diagram 3 5.2
Isolation Overlays 5.3
Signaller’s Route Lists 5.4
Operating Notice Diagrams 3 5.5
Safety Diagrams 3 5.6
Figure D3 Types of Drawings from the Signalling

Design Handbook
2 Plans
Plans are usually drawn to scale. They show an overall
view of a particular site or area of work.
All plans carry a title block. The information that this
contains is similar to that shown in Figure D13 except
that for a Scheme Plan the version reference is a single
letter, the original being “A”, the next “B” etc.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
The symbols used on plans are given in

NR/GN/SIG/11004, Symbols for Plans and Sketches
Used in Signalling Applications. A copy of this should be
available for reference when necessary.
Any symbols shown dotted (but uncoloured) on a
signalling plan means that the equipment has been
physically removed, but the circuitry for it remains in the
interlocking. Note that wiring symbols shown broken
mean something different (see section D023).
Standards have changed over the years, so some
symbols used on old plans may be different to those
presently in use.
Plans typically include:
2.1 Scheme Plan
Shows the general signalling arrangements for the
completed scheme. It also shows the equipment to
be removed.
2.2 Signalling Plan
Shows the current signalling features and identities.
2.3 Location Area Plan
Shows the position of lineside location cases and
rooms. Gives their identities and areas of influence.
2.4 Cable Route Plan
Shows the position and details of the cable route. It
is sometimes combined with the Location Area
Plan.
2.5 Bonding Plan
Shows track circuit details such as insulated rail
joints, connections, jumpers, traction bonds, cross
bonds, structure bonds.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Some bonding plans for electric traction areas are

prepared jointly by the organisations responsible for
designing the signalling system and the
electrification infrastructure. They include details of
track circuit bonding, but also electrification
requirements that will be installed by others.
Generally, track circuit bonding is shown with thin
lines and traction bonding with thick lines.
However, for single rail track circuits, the insulated
rail is depicted with a thick line and the common (or
traction) rail with a thin line. Alternatively, the track
circuit bonding and insulated rail may be coloured,
using different colours to distinguish between
adjacent track circuits.
A typical Bonding Plan is shown in Figure D4.
2.6 Cable Schematic
Shows the signalling cables required between
cases and rooms.
2.7 Power Cable Schematic
Shows the power supply distribution.
2.8 Level Crossing Ground Plan
This is a scaled and dimensioned drawing showing
the position of all equipment, utilities and associated
features in the vicinity of the level crossing, and the
detail necessary for engineering, operating,
maintenance and statutory requirements.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Date: April 2006
Page: 6 of 10
Typical Bonding Plan

Issue: 02
Figure D4
NR/GI/D021
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
3 Circuit Diagrams
Circuit diagrams are detailed drawings showing the
wiring connections between items of equipment. The
layout of the equipment is also shown, together with
various analysis sheets.
The diagrams are usually supplied in book form. They
are divided into sections, each of which applies to an
installation, such as one apparatus case or equipment
room.
Diagrams for each installation include the following:
• Index
• Approvals & Issue Record (this shows the job
description and version reference for all the
alterations that have taken place in that area).
• Equipment layout for each room, rack and frame.
• Wiring between all the pieces of equipment.
• Tabulations showing the usage of various contacts,
terminals, fuses and links. This is known as the
“Analysis”.
Wiring symbols are described in section D023.
4 Analysis
These summarise which relay contacts, terminals, and
links are in use. Some of the analysis sheets also show:
• the sheet number of the wiring diagrams where
each contact appears.
• how many wires are connected to each termination.
Figures D5 and D6 give typical examples, together with
notes on their interpretation.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
5 Signal Sighting Forms

Sighting Forms are designed to be easily self-
explanatory. Care must be taken to distinguish between
metric and imperial measurements when positioning and
fixing signals.
6 Control Tables
Control Tables can be very complicated documents
requiring more explanation than can be given here.
Training in how to understand them will be given where
needed.
7 Other Engineering Details

These are provided as necessary to the work. A
common example is:
Control Panel or Signal Box Diagram details are
drawings of the actual apparatus. They will show the
final or alteration arrangements. If coloured to show new
or recovered work, the colouring will follow the method
used for circuit diagrams.
Further Information
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Typical Relay Contact Analysis

Date: April 2006
Page: 9 of 10
Issue: 02
Figure D5
NR/GI/D021
Typical Fuse and Cable Analysis
Date: April 2006
Page: 10 of 10
Issue: 02
END
Figure D6
NR/GI/D021
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Circuit Diagrams - Colouring
Diagrams are mainly printed in black on a white

background, but colours are used to indicate particular
things:
• Equipment or wiring shown in RED means that it is
NEW.
• Equipment or wiring shown in GREEN means that it
is to be RECOVERED.
Where the colour code would apply to the whole diagram
sheet there is an alternative method. A normal black on
white diagram is supplied with:
• an endorsement in red, “ALL NEW WORK” if it is
new
• a green cross through the whole sheet if it is to be
recovered.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
In some drawings both new and recovered work are
shown on the same sheet. In this case the wires to be
removed are marked with small crosses as well as being
coloured green.
There are occasions when two copies of each drawing
will be issued. These are:
• First Copy showing the wiring and equipment to be
removed – in green.
• Second Copy showing the new wiring and
equipment – in red.
The way in which relays and their contacts are coloured
red or green can also show if they are to be re-used or
renamed.
Further Information
END

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Circuit Diagrams - Symbols and Nomenclature
1 Wiring Symbols
Signalling circuits use symbols to represent the various
pieces of equipment, which are mandated in
NR/GN/SIG/11205. A copy of this should be available
for reference when necessary.
Staff must be able to read and understand the diagrams
in order to carry out their work. An outline of the basic
principles is given here. Any non-standard
abbreviations, symbols, or notes will be fully defined on
every sheet used. If further assistance is needed to
understand a diagram, it should be requested from the
supervisor.
The wiring is drawn in a standard way. In general, the
following rules apply to modern circuits:
• Wires are shown as full lines connecting one
termination to another.
• Functional apparatus is represented by rectangular
blocks, usually with broken lines.
• Broken lines are also used to show grouping or
containment, for example, the boundary of an item
of equipment or terminal block. Broken lines are
also used to show wiring or equipment in outline as
a reminder or their existence, with full details given
elsewhere. However, if a broken line is coloured
green, it means the item is to be removed (see
section D022).
• Contacts (of relays, plungers etc.) are always
shown as “made” (i.e. drawn on the line) even if
that is not their normal position. For polarised
relays, reference should be made to
NR/GN/SIG/11205, since these symbols are more
complex.
• If possible, the whole of a circuit is shown on one
sheet. This means that the termination points or
contacts for one item of equipment (e.g. a relay)
may be spread over numerous sheets.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
2 Apparatus Names (Identities)

Apparatus is described on the circuit diagrams by a
number and letter code. An example might be “101 GR”:
• The last letter describes the type of apparatus.
In this case “R” indicates that the apparatus is a
relay.
• The preceding letter describes the apparatus.
“G” indicates that the relay applies to a signal.
• The “101” indicates that the signal is numbered
101.
The letter code therefore tells both what the item of
apparatus is and what it does. See the tabulation in
Figure D7.
If a description is needed which is not in the list, then
some fairly obvious abbreviation is used. If the
abbreviation needs to be kept separate for clarity, then it
is put in brackets. For example:
143G(OFF)R 143 Signal “off” relay.
West(PO)R West “power off” relay.
The “description” letters indicate how the termination is
used. For example:
Letter Description
B Positive feed of a DC supply.
N Negative feed of a DC supply.
BN Intermediate connection on a DC supply.
BX Feed end of an AC supply.
NX Return end of an AC supply.
BNX Intermediate connection on an AC supply.
E Earth connection.
Numbers added after the “Description” letter indicate the
voltage.
Numbers after the “Apparatus” letter indicate the number
within a group of items. For example:
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
B12 f indicates the positive 12 volts fuse.

BX110 t6 indicates the sixth terminal on the feed
side of the 110 volts AC supply.
N24 f6 indicates the sixth fuse on the 24 volts
negative supply.
If there is a need to give further descriptions, additional
letters may be added after the voltage numbers. For
example:
B50 (X) f5 indicates the fifth fuse on the B50
external supply.
N50 (L) t4 indicates the fourth terminal on the
N50 local supply.
BX110A f3 indicates the third fuse on the feed
side of the 110 volts “A” supply.
If there are several external or local supplies, a number
is added after the “X” or “L” to identify them, e.g. B50
(X2) f5 refers to fuse 5 on the second external B50
supply.
The current rating of the fuse is shown close to the fuse
symbol (e.g. “20A” indicates a twenty amp rating).
Descriptive Term Apparatus

(preceding letters) (last letter)
A Approach; Automatic; A Axle Counter
Relay Contact - Arm
B Block; Bolt; Relay B Block Instrument
Contact - Back
C Checking or Proving; C Contact
Coding
D Clear (green); Decoding; D not used
Relay Contact - De-
energised
E Light; Lamp; Heat E Light; Lamp; Earth
(externally applied);
Emergency; Earth
F Fog; Flashing; Feed; F Detonator Placers
Relay Contact - Front
f Frequency f Fuse
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Descriptive Term Apparatus

(preceding letters) (last letter)
G Signal G Signal Apparatus
g not used g Lightning Arrestor
H Caution (yellow) H Capacitor
HH Preliminary Caution HH not used
(double yellow)
I AWS I Inductor
J Time (delayed action) J Rectifier; Diode
K Indicating or Detecting K Indicator Electro-
mechanical
L Locking; Left L Lock
M Marker; Magnetic M Motor
N Normal N Release; Hand Operated
Switch; Push Button or
Key
O Retarding O Resistor; Heater
P Repeating P Lever Latch or Trigger
Contact
Q Treadle or Bar Q Local Coil of a Double
Element Relay; Treadle;
Bar
R Reverse; Right; Danger R Relay or Contactor
(red)
Rx Receiving Rx Receiver
S Stick S not used
T Track Circuit T Transformer
t not used t Terminal
Tx Transmitting Tx Transmitter
U Route U Unit
V Trainstop (including V Trainstop (including
TPWS) TPWS) Apparatus
W Points W Point Operating
Apparatus
X Audible Annunciator; X Audible Annunciator
Level Crossing; Wrong (bell, buzzer, horn, etc.)
Direction
Y Slotting or Disengaging Y Slotting or Disengaging
Apparatus
Z Special (to be explained Z Special Unit (to be
on diagram) explained on diagram)
Figure D7 Meaning of Equipment Code
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
3 Terminal Names
Terminals which act as power supply terminations have
been dealt with in the previous section.
For other terminals and links a general system is used,
as follows. A group of terminals or links is indicated by a
capital letter. A particular item within a group is indicated
by a number. For example, written below the symbol for
a link might be “H19”:
H19 indicates the nineteenth in group “H”.
In recent drawings, a leading zero is used if there is only
one number, for example:
E05 indicates the fifth in group “E”.
If more complicated descriptions are required, letters
and numbers are alternated. For example, written beside
the “dot” symbol for a tunnel type screw terminal might
be “A25R18”:
A indicates rack “A”.
25 indicates the twenty-fifth row of terminals on
that rack.
R indicates the terminals are on the rear of the
rack. (“F” would indicate the front.)
18 indicates the eighteenth terminal in the row.
In case of doubt, the supervisor should be asked for
advice.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
For the naming of telecom type tag blocks and

connectors see Telecoms Equipment standards.
4 Termination Numbers
Many pieces of apparatus have a number of terminals.
Examples include relays and transformers. In these
cases the circuit diagrams will also show which terminal
is which.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
This is done with more numbers and/or letters. These

are written beside the termination symbol in the wiring
diagram. The numbers and letters correspond with
whatever is shown on the actual apparatus. See Figure
D8 for examples.
5 Lever and Switch Contacts

These are shown on wiring diagrams by a circular
symbol. The letter (or letters) inside the circle indicate
the portion of the movement that the contact is made.
Figures D9 and D10 show how the lettering system
works. Note that a different lettering system is used
depending on whether the normal position of the
lever/switch is at the end (N-C-R) or the middle (F-M-T)
of the movement.
Lever locks and controllers have more positions
available, which are generally used for the purposes
described in Figures D11 and D12. In miniature lever
frames, additional contact positions X (between A & B)
and Y (between D & E) are provided, such that NX
contacts are used in lieu of NA and RY instead of RE.
Further Information
NR/GN/SIG/11205 Symbols for Signalling Circuit Diagrams
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Termination Numbering Examples

Note: Circuits shown only as examples of numbering.
Date: April 2006
Page: 7 of 11
Issue: 02
Figure D8
NR/GI/D023
Push Button and Switch Contacts

Date: April 2006
Page: 8 of 11
Issue: 02
Figure D9
NR/GI/D023
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Circuit Controller Contacts and Lever Lock Positions

Date: April 2006
Page: 9 of 11
Issue: 02
NR/GI/D023
Figure D10
Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Lock Selection Electrical Interlocking

(where provided)
NR Tight lock: for track locking
mechanically operated
points that are not fitted
with an FPL.
AE (often known as NR) Interlocking that locks a
For locking points normal lever in either position
or reverse. ( B W ).
ABDE (known as NBDR)
Points equipped with
indication locking, the (B)
and (D) locks preventing
the lever from completing
the stroke until detection is
made.
A (often known as N) Interlocking that locks
For locking signals normal another lever normal, i.e.
with no backlock where one lever locks

(mechanically operated another, is released by
signals should be adjusted another, is locked by
to be on and the wire another between stroke
relaxed, with the lever in (converse of B W ), counter
this position).
FPLs that stand normally conditional, or sequential
in. locking.
AB (often known as NB)
Signals requiring a
backlock (mechanically
operated signals should be
adjusted to be on and the
wire relaxed, with the lever
in the B position).
Ground frame and level
crossing releases.
E (often known as R) Interlocking that locks a
For locking FPLs reverse lever reverse, i.e. where
that stand normally out. one lever releases another
(converse of released by),
or counter conditional
locking.
Figure D11 Typical Lock Positions

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Contact Selection Electrical Interlocking

(where provided)
N Contact proves lever normal beyond the (A) lock position, used in block Contact proves lever normal beyond the (A) lock position (the fine contact
circuits, or sequential locking (the fine contact proves a forced drop lock proves the forced drop lock effective).
effective).
NA Contact proves lever normal beyond the (B) lock position, as used in
selection circuits, e.g. to prove signal normal in signal stick and route stick
circuits, to call points normal, for correspondence proving, or a free light for
an (A) lock.
NX Proves lever normal beyond the (B) lock position, to call points normal
(miniature lever frames only).
NB Contact proves lever normal beyond the (C) lock position, to call points
normal in connection with indication locking.
ND, or FPL of mechanical points with electrical detection, where FPL stands
NE normally out.
A Contact made as lever being reversed approaches the (A) lock position, to Contact made as lever approaches the (A) lock position, to economise the
economise the (A) lock. (A) lock.
BC, or Contact made as lever being normalised approaches the (B) lock position, to
BD initiate backlock timers and economise the (B) lock, or free light for a (B)
lock.
DC Contact made as lever being reversed approaches the (D) lock position, to
economise the (D) lock.
E Contact made as lever being normalised approaches the (E) lock position, to Contact made as lever approaches the (E) lock position, to economise the
economise the (E) lock. (E) lock.
AE Contact made as lever approaches the (A) or (E) lock positions, to Made as lever approaches the (A) or (E) lock positions, to economise the
economise the (AE) lock. (AE) lock.
RA, or FPL of mechanical points with electrical detection, where FPL stands
RB normally in.
RB Contact proves lever has not passed the (B) lock position, used in simplified
backlock stick circuits (not for new work).
RD Contact proves lever reverse beyond the (C) lock position, to call points
reverse in connection with indication locking.
RY Proves lever reverse beyond the (D) lock position, to call points reverse
(miniature lever frames only).
RE Contact proves lever reverse beyond the (D) lock position, as used in
selection circuits, e.g. to call points reverse, or for correspondence proving.
R Contact proves lever reverse beyond the (E) lock position, used for signal Contact proves lever reverse beyond the (E) lock position (the fine contact
operation, or release to ground frame or level crossing proves the forced drop lock effective).
Figure D12 Typical Circuit Controller Contact Positions

END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Circuit Diagrams - Wiring
1 Wire/Cable Types
Present design standards require the installation
drawings to show the sizes of all wires and cables, but
older drawings may not do so. Some drawings only
included the details of non standard wire or cable size
and type.
Therefore, if the wire or cable is not specified on the
drawing, the standard type must be used. The standard
wire/cable for a particular application is detailed in the
Signalling Installation Handbook. A summary of the most
commonly used standards for safety signalling circuits is
given in sections 2 to 5.
Wire and cable type for non safety signalling circuits
varies considerably according to the application. If the
type to be used is not specified on the drawings, the
supervisor should be asked for advice.
2 Internal Wiring
The following are typical applications:
a) Single wires internal to an equipment room, location
case, or signal box (but not associated with signal
lever, locking frame, or block shelf areas) - not in
touch with metal surfaces and run within all plastic
trunking or conduit, separate from any cables, and
which cannot be damaged by sharp edges or
corners:
2
• 0.75mm wires to NR/PS/SIG/00005 Type A1,
black, rubber insulated, for circuits fused at 3A;
2
black, rubber insulated, for circuits fused at 5A
to 15A.
• 24/0.20mm wires to DEF STAN 61-12 Part 6,
Type 3, white, PVC insulated, for circuits in SSI
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
installations fused at 2A or 3A;

• 32/0.20mm wires to DEF STAN 61-12 Part 6,
Type 3, pink, PVC insulated, for circuits in SSI
installations fused at 5A to 15A.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
b) Single wires internal to an equipment room, location

case, or signal box, not conforming to environment
a):
2
black, for circuits fused at 3A;
2
black, for circuits fused at 5A to 15A.
b) Multicore cables internal to an equipment room,
location case, or signal box:
• Cables to NR/PS/SIG/00005 Type A3, black,
2
with 0.75mm cores.
3 External Wiring
a) External single wires (for signal repeaters, ground
frames, etc.) but not on track:
2
• 2.5mm wires to NR/PS/SIG/00005 Type B1,
black.
b) External multicore cables within cable route
protection and not on track:
• Cables to NR/PS/SIG/00005 Type B2, black,
2 2
with 0.75mm cores (1.5 or 2.5mm cores are
non preferred alternatives).
c) External cables for on track use:
• Flexible cables to NR/PS/SIG/00005 Type C1
(single core) or Type C2 (multicore), black, with
2
2.5mm (f) cores.
4 Power and Earthing Cable

Signalling power or earth bonding cable may be:
a) Cable to NR/PS/SIG/00005 Type B1 (single core) or
Type B2 (2 core) for copper conductors with rubber
insulation. The conductor size will be specified on
the drawings.
b) Cable to BS 6004:2000 Table 4 for single core
copper conductors with PVC insulation, e.g. for
earth bonding. The conductor size will be specified
on the drawings.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
c) Cable to BS 6346:1997 Table 8 for two core

aluminium conductors. The conductor size will be
specified on the drawings.
5 Fuses
Where fuse ratings are not shown on a diagram, the fuse
analysis sheet must be checked. If no value is shown, a
3A cartridge fuse to BS 714 may be assumed. For
electronic systems, a different default value may be
specified.
6 Exceptions
Exceptions to the above standards will have the
conductor size, wire/cable type, or fuse rating:
• written alongside the wire to which it applies
(sometimes in the form of a symbol referring to a
footnote), or
• given as a general note on a particular wiring sheet
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
or reference sheet, or
• given as a cable size and type, where the wires are
part of a cable (see below).
Wires shown on signalling installation diagrams are
assumed to be single wires (not part of a twin or
multicore cable) unless otherwise indicated. Exceptions
will have the cable size and type indicated:
• by a special note adjacent or arrowed to the wires
to which it applies, or
• by a balloon round the affected wires, with the
cable description added (examples are shown in
Figure D8), or
• by a description or note on the link, terminal, or
cable analysis sheet.
Further Information
NR/PS/SIG/00005 Railway Signalling Cable

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006

BS 714 Cartridge fuse-links for use in railway
signalling circuits
BS 6004 Electric cables. PVC insulated, non-
armoured cables for voltages up to and
including 450/750V
BS 6346 Electric cables. PVC insulated, armoured
cables for voltages of 600/1000V and
1900/3300V
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Version Control of Diagrams
Each diagram of alterations carries a title block as

shown in Figure D13. The block includes the name and
a number for identification and also gives a version
reference in the Version box beneath the Sheet Number.
The original diagram for the first job is called Version
“AA1” and each subsequent change to this version will
increase the last digit - to give “AA2”, “AA3” etc. The
next alteration to that diagram (i.e. the next job) will have
a different alteration letters, e.g. “AB”, giving a version
reference “AB1”, with subsequent changes to that as
“AB2”, etc. The version reference in Figure D13
indicates that the sheet applies to alteration “AB” and
change “2”.
The Update Block, shown on the left of the title block,
may give a clue as to what has happened previously.
The alteration letters of jobs that have been completed
previously will be seen, but note that jobs do not always
happen in alphabetical order. The version of the current
job will not appear here until the drawing is re-issued
after the records have been updated. If different
versions of the same drawing are causing confusion, the
supervisor should be asked for advice.
Once updated, the new maintenance records will bear
the same version reference in the Update Block as in the
Version box.
Further Information
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Version Control of Diagrams
Figure D13 Circuit Diagram Title Block
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Presentation of Partially Commissioned
(or Out of Use) Design Details
1 Circuitry
If the circuitry for the final arrangement is to be installed
on one occasion, but commissioned in stages, circuit
diagrams for the final arrangement may be used for each
stage, endorsed to identify circuitry not in use at that
stage. Only diagrams issued for the first time will be
endorsed 'ALL NEW WORK' in red. Circuit diagrams will
show all not yet commissioned (and all redundant)
circuitry and equipment in situ.
Partially commissioned (or redundant) circuitry will be
identified on the production diagrams by the use of notes
with arrows, or symbols which will be defined on each
sheet. These will generally be coloured red.
Where a whole drawing, or discrete parts of a drawing,
depict partially commissioned (or redundant) circuitry,
the drawing, or the discrete parts bounded by a border,
will be endorsed with the appropriate note.
The following notes may be required:
a) Where a busbar fed circuit is not in use, the fuse will
be shaded over in green, with the note "DUMMY
FUSE" in red.
b) Relays will have the note "NOT IN USE" beside the
coil.
c) Incoming and outgoing circuits will have the note
"NOT IN USE" beside the circuit name.
d) Conductors to be disconnected will be identified with
the standard symbol from NR/GN/SIG/11205.
e) Where looping cannot be identified from the circuit
diagrams, where necessary to maintain the integrity
of the looping, it will be marked "TO BE
DISCONNECTED, THROUGH-CRIMPED AND
INSULATED".
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
f) Where cables have not yet been installed or

terminated, the notes "NOT INSTALLED" or "NOT
TERMINATED" will be added. Cables should not be
partly terminated.
g) Temporary stagework circuits, or jumpers, should be
run in colour coded conductors (see section D014).
h) If a circuit is to be disconnected at a termination link,
the link will be shaded over in green, with the note
'lNSULATED BATTEN - LINK REMOVED" in red.
i) Where stagework cables are connected to one side
of disconnected links in order to form single post
terminations, a note such as "RED DOMED NUT"
will also be added to remind installers to fit
precautionary devices to the terminals.
j) Where power supplies are not yet in use the note
"TO BE LABELLED 'FUSES/LINKS
DISCONNECTED - DO NOT RECONNECT’" will be
provided beside the BS 88 fuses and links and the
note "TO BE PADLOCKED OFF" beside any
lockable fuse switches.
Compliance with the Electricity at Work Regulations shall
be ensured. (See series X sections.)
These notes will be repeated on the appropriate analysis
sheets and cable core plans. The term "spare" will only
be used of equipment, cable cores, or levers where there
is no wiring or locking attached, although "through
spares" which are jumpered through may sometimes be
found (this is not permitted for new work).
When a note is no longer applicable at a subsequent
stage, it will be crossed out in green. Certain notes will
be included on the maintenance records after each
update. For instance, equipment "NOT IN USE" will be
clearly marked on the drawings, until the equipment is
commissioned, at which time the note will be removed.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
A full issue of installation and testing details and

maintenance records, including analysis, shall be made
for each stage in accordance with NR/SP/SIG/11201.
2 Other Design Details

Signalling plans will show installed trackside equipment
not yet commissioned (and redundant trackside
equipment that has been left in situ) with a solid symbol
and a note "NOT IN USE", or “C&P”. Not yet installed
(and recovered) trackside equipment, with circuitry in the
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
interlocking, will be shown with a dotted symbol.
Identities corresponding with the interlocking will be
shown. Note that wiring symbols shown broken mean
something different (see section D023).
Control tables will show the final controls where the
circuitry is in the interlocking, but not yet commissioned,
(or the original controls where circuitry in situ has been
made redundant) with appropriate notes, such as "NOT
IN USE", FALSE FED', or TRACK CIRCUITS
COMBINED". Redundant controls, where the
mechanical locking is left in the interlocking, will be
shown similarly, with levers required to be worked to
maintain the locking identified with the note
“INTERLOCKING LEVER". Where old and new identities
are different, a conversion chart should be provided.
Signaller's route lists will reflect what the panel or
diagram shows.
3 Partially Operational Equipment on Site

For warning notices to be displayed on site relating to
partially operational equipment, and other marking, see
section D014.
4 Requirements for Recovery of Redundant

Assets
For work associated with the recovery of redundant
assets, see section E053.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Further Information
NR/GN/SIG/11205 Symbols for Signalling Circuit Diagrams
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Site Records
1 Temporary Records
Maintenance records on site shall be maintained up to
date with the current state of the infrastructure at all
times. When it is necessary to endorse a previous
maintenance copy with a modification (or correlation
correction, or maintenance alteration as in section D011)
in order to provide a temporary maintenance copy, this
shall be replaced with a final record copy within an
appropriate timescale.
2 Final Records
Final maintenance records, including the source record,
signed master record, and approvals and issue record,
shall be provided to the records custodian within 6
weeks of stageworks or final commissioning, unless
otherwise agreed in the design specification.
Maintenance copies of final records for apparatus cases,
the underportions of signal boxes, and where otherwise
specified by the infrastructure controller, shall be
supplied on a durable material that is capable of being
written on with a permanent ink pen.
3 Version Control of Site Records

Version control is specified in NR/SP/SIG/11201.
If there is reason to doubt that the site records are the
latest version, the supervisor should be asked to confirm
the status with the Network Rail Records Group.
Further Information
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Site Records for Testing Purposes
The section is mainly concerned with Signalling

Maintenance Testing, but also describes when Signalling
Works Testing procedures must be used instead. It is
based on the assumption that equipment is correctly
wired and correctly documented before work
commences. Complete and accurate site records shall
be available at each installation.
1 Testing with Site Records

The installation shall be checked against the diagrams
before work is started and again after work is complete
to check that the installation is correct. The extent of this
correlation activity may be defined in the Method
Statement or Test Plan.
2 Testing where Site Records have been Amended

If, when needed for fault rectification or renewal work,
diagrams are available but have an unsigned and
undated amendment which affects that work, the work
shall STOP until advice has been sought from the
supervisor and authority to resume been given. This
shall also apply to any diagrams found marked
‘Installation Copy’.
The action to be taken shall be as follows:
i) If the diagram shows amendments it shall be
thoroughly checked to the wiring on site. If the
diagrams are clear and in agreement with the wiring
the supervisor may allow work to continue.
Arrangements shall be made to obtain revised
diagrams within six weeks. If revised diagrams
cannot be supplied within six weeks, the Area
Signal Engineer shall be advised and suitable
arrangements made to ensure that any risks are
reduced to as low as reasonably practicable. In both
cases a note shall be included with the record of
test.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
ii) If the diagrams are unclear, or if a discrepancy with

the wiring is found, the supervisor shall arrange for
the discrepancy to be resolved and determine an
appropriate method for the work to be completed.
Design assistance to produce any revised diagrams
shall be arranged.
Diagram amendments reported which are unrelated to
the work shall be dealt with using the local procedures
for arranging revised diagrams.
3 Testing where Site Records Differ from Wiring

If a difference is discovered between the wiring being
worked on and the diagram, the work shall STOP until
advice has been sought from the supervisor and
authority to resume been given.
The action to be taken shall depend on the extent of the
difference. In all cases where the diagrams are related to
the work in hand a note shall be included with the record
of test and arrangements made to obtain revised
diagrams within six weeks:
i) If the difference only involves the looping
arrangement or contact / terminal allocation detail
and is otherwise electrically identical, the supervisor
may permit the work to proceed. The diagram shall
be suitably amended, signed and dated in red.
ii) If any other discrepancy is found the supervisor
shall arrange for the discrepancy to be resolved and
determine an appropriate method for the work to be
completed. Design assistance to produce any
revised diagrams shall be arranged.
Diagram discrepancies reported which are unrelated to
the work shall be dealt with using the local procedures
for arranging revised diagrams.
4 Testing where there are No Site Records

If site records are missing, the work shall STOP until
advice has been sought from the supervisor and
authority to resume been given.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
The action to be taken shall depend on the work being

done. Where work is permitted to continue, as outlined
below, the appropriate SMTH Test Plan(s) shall be used.
In all cases a note shall be included with the record of
test and arrangements made to obtain revised diagrams:
i) If the equipment being changed is a pin coded plug
in component, the supervisor may allow the work to
proceed omitting any requirement to check to the
wiring diagram.
ii) If the component is a simple piece of equipment not
involving control circuitry, the equipment may be
changed on the authority of the supervisor who
shall take into consideration the experience of the
staff doing the work and testing. A sketch drawing
shall be produced showing the wiring connected to
the equipment which shall then be used in lieu of
the proper diagram. The sketch shall be left on site,
signed and dated in red. Transformers and
lampholders are typical of the equipment that can
be dealt with in this way.
iii) If the equipment involves control circuitry, such as a
shelf type relay, additional testing resource shall be
involved in the change. Design assistance to
produce any revised diagrams shall be arranged.
The work shall be tested using the Signalling Works
Testing Handbook, NR/GN/SIG/11730.
5 Test Records
The Maintenance Tester shall complete a record of the
testing carried out and forward it to the supervisor at the
first opportunity after the end of the shift.
The supervisor shall check and retain the record of test
in a way that permits the location of specific records at a
later date.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
A system shall be in place to routinely check returns

from each team as well as a more thorough check at
least once every three months. This check shall
determine that the appropriate Maintenance Test Plans
have been used and that sufficient detail has been
recorded. Deficiencies shall be followed up by
appropriate corrective action such as monitoring or
retraining. The record of test shall be retained for the
lifetime of the installation.
Further Information
NR/GN/SIG/11730 Signalling Works Testing Handbook
Handbook
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
NR/GI/E001 Page: 1 of 14
Electrical Interference
1 Types of Interference
Electrical interference can arise in various ways
including:
• traction current contamination,
• induction from parallel a.c. or high frequency circuits,
• direct contact with earth or rails through insulation
damage,
• high frequency contamination of electronic systems,
• electrical surges, such as lightning strikes,
flashovers from the traction supply and switching
transients, affecting solid state components,
• magnetic interference between low current devices.
Background information on electromagnetic compatibility
is given in Part D of NR/GN/SIG/11600.
The majority of S&T electronic equipment is immune to
all but exceptional levels of radio frequency (rf) signals.
This includes telecommunication systems, remote
control systems, panel processors, electronic track
circuits, SSI, IECC and CCTV equipment. At worst,
exceptional levels of radio interference will cause a safe
shutdown of the systems concerned. This can occur
where long component leads or cables exist within
equipment housings and a radio signal is generated
alongside.
2 General Precautions
Electronic equipment shall have leads as short as
practicable, which may be screened or consist of twisted
pairs, and not be located close to known interference
sources, such as HVI track circuit equipment. Where
surge protectors or filters are provided, the ‘clean’ side
wiring shall be segregated from the ‘dirty’ side and from
unfiltered power supplies.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Equipment likely to produce electromagnetic disturbance

in apparatus housings, such as base station
transmitters, shall have the associated cabling screened
and earthed, and any aerial shall be mounted externally.
Restrictions on the use of mobile telephones, vacuum
cleaners, power tools or any other form of transmitting
communication equipment are given in section E003.
Fast transient earths and EMC shielding are considered
in section E021.
Where special restrictions apply to positioning or wiring
of equipment, this should be clearly shown in the design
records (see NR/GN/SIG/11701), so that the restrictions
are readily apparent to staff. Otherwise, manufacturer's
product instructions should be consulted for installation,
operation and maintenance purposes. Supervisors
should ensure that these are available where necessary.
The proximity constraints given in this section may be
regarded as being satisfied if each relevant item of
equipment is CE marked and provided with an EMC
declaration of conformity that addresses the particular
proximity problem. Such declaration should be
referenced in the design records.
There may be additional restrictions on the use of
equipment operating at certain frequencies on lines with
route acceptance for traction units likely to emit
electromagnetic interference, including trains with three
phase or induction motor drives. See section E002.
A comprehensive set of rules is provided here, but those
that are related to the detailed design will feature in the
engineering details supplied for the work. Technicians
should particularly note the wiring restrictions to protect
against parallelism or cross-talk.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
3 Audio Frequencies - General

3.1 Axle Counters
Relay coils in axle counter circuits may require
suppressing to prevent electromagnetic interference
to axle counter evaluators by connecting a reverse
biased diode across the coil. Where axle counters
and audio frequency track circuits are installed in
the same vicinity, it is preferable for the track circuit
receiver, rather than the transmitter, to be adjacent
to the axle counter section. Axle counter heads (rail
contacts) shall not be installed as follows:
a) within 100mm of a TASS (or TCS) balise, guard
rails, point drive equipment, lubricator, ramp or
other metalwork;
b) within 1m of an AWS (or APC) inductor, or
TPWS loop;
c within 2m of another rail contact;
c) within 5m of a track circuit tuned zone;
d) within 15m of an end termination unit;
In addition, 30kHz axle counter heads shall not be
installed:
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
e) in the vicinity of any equipment operating in the
frequency range 27.4 kHz to 31.3 kHz.
SEL 5kHz axle counter heads shall not be installed:
f) within 100m of TI.21 frequency E or G
transmitter (1549 Hz or 1848 Hz), or a Z type
transmitter of 1580 Hz or 1850 Hz; nor
g) within 200m of a TI.21 frequency A transmitter
(1699 Hz), or an Aster U type/SF15 transmitter
of 1700 Hz.
3.2 Track Circuits, etc.

Restrictions to prevent the mutual interference of
track circuits may be found in NR/SP/SIG/11752
and the associated specifications for individual track
circuits.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
To avoid intermodulation effects, the following audio

frequency equipment shall be separated from each
other by a minimum of 150mm, i.e. one row clear:
a) reed track circuit, point detection, or FDM
equipment;
b) Aster track circuit equipment;
c) TI.21 track circuit equipment;
d) FS2600 track circuit equipment; and
e) HVI track circuit equipment.
Their wiring shall not run parallel in the same
ducting. A final power supply unit shall not be
common to more than one system and shall only
feed one transmitter or receiver of a given
frequency.
HVI wiring is also prohibited from running in the
same ducting as SSI wiring (section 7).
FS2600 wiring shall not run in the same ducting as,
nor parallel to (within 1m of) any other wiring.
3.3 TPWS
TPWS loops shall not be installed:
a) above SSI cables, or close to TI.21, Aster, or
power cables.
b) within 1m of a high current traction cable, an
AWS (or APC) inductor, a reed track circuit
loop, Aster Z-bond, an impedance bond, an
axle counter rail contact, electronic treadle,
guard rail, point drive equipment, lubricator,
ramp or other metalwork;
c) within 2m of ATP loop ends or transpositions, a
th
4 rail gap, a LUL CSDE antenna, or another
TPWS loop;
d) within 5m of a track circuit tuned zone;
e) within 10m of HABD equipment, an uneven load
detector, or a wheel impact load detector;
f) within 15m of an Aster U type/SF15 or TI.21
centre feed;
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
g) within 75m of GATSO camera inductive road

loops.
h) within 100m of 10kHz rail circuits, Hima-Sella
TrackLink selective door controls, or an
automatic vehicle identification beacon.
TPWS control modules shall not be installed within
the same apparatus case as, or in an equipment
building within 2m of, FDM equipment, nor within
20m of an electrical substation, feeder station, track
paralleling hut or sectioning cabin.
3.4 CCTV equipment

CCTV equipment and audio frequency equipment
shall not be housed:
a) in the same apparatus case, nor
b) in an equipment building within 2m of each
other.
3.5 Convertors
D.C./D.C. converters shall not be housed adjacent
to, nor fed from a battery supplying, any audio
frequency signalling equipment.
3.6 Audio Nuisance

Care shall be taken when locating equipment, such
as TI.21 transmitter tuning units, emitting an audible
frequency, so as not to cause a nuisance to local
residents. If necessary, sound proofing shall be
specified on the design details.
4 Reed Systems
The following restrictions apply to reed track circuits,
point detection and FDM. For restrictions between reed
and other equipment, see section 3.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
a) All connections to reed filters, and other reed

system wiring longer than 400mm, shall be run in
approved twisted pair cable and segregated from
2
other wiring. Within housings, 0.75mm twisted pair
Type A to NR/PS/SIG/00005 is preferable for all
reed equipment wiring.
b) The positioning of equipment shall be carefully
designed, so as to keep the wiring as short as
reasonably practicable, particularly the transmission
line and power supply line. The wiring shall not
laced or placed in trunking, but kept separate from
wire runs for other reed systems (also from Aster
and TI.21 track circuits and other audio frequency
equipment).
c) Twisted pair twin cable shall be used wherever
practicable for the transmitter switching circuit,
particularly if it is external to the equipment housing
or exceeds 2m in length. (This is not applicable to
point detection since it is strapped out.)
d) Non-safety a.c. relays shall not be used to provide
input contacts for reed transmitters as they could
give rise to a.c. harmonics on the line. A d.c. repeat
relay is required.
e) Reed power supply units must not feed more than
one transmitter or one receiver of the same
frequency, nor equipment belonging to different
systems. They must only feed equipment within the
equipment housing concerned.
f) To avoid mains based interference, reed power
supply units must not be mounted within 150mm of
reed receivers or transmitters, i.e. one row clear.
g) Reed receiver filters shall not be mounted within
300mm of a track filter of a different frequency, nor
a constant voltage transformer.
h) Reed receiver filters shall not be mounted within
50mm of any power amplifier or reed follower relay.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
i) All reed equipment must be installed with their

terminals on the wiring side of the racking.
Equipment layout should be designed so as to keep
the transmission line and power supply line as short
as possible, subject to other requirements.
j) Reed follower relays (or power amplifiers) must not
be mounted within 50mm of reed receivers, but may
be mounted adjacent in the row above or below.
k) Track circuit receiver filters (or constant voltage
transformers) must not be mounted within 300mm
of reed receivers, i.e. two rows clear.
l) Reed filters must not be mounted in the same
apparatus case as, or in an equipment building
within 2m of, other reed equipment of the same
frequency or a harmonically related frequency.
Consequently, transmitters and receivers of the
same frequency must not be located in the same
case. (This does not apply to track circuit
equipment, so long as it follows the layout given in
the reed track circuit specification.)
5.1 Reed Track Circuits

Restrictions to prevent the mutual interference of
reed track circuits may be found in
NR/SP/SIG/11752 and the associated specification
for reed track circuits.
5.2 Frequency Division Multiplex (FDM)

These systems were designed to operate
satisfactorily in the presence of interference
containing any odd harmonic of a fundamental in
the range 48.5 to 50.5Hz, up to 100V per harmonic.
Vital systems shall also make allowances for
traction supply faults, e.g. including even harmonics
and induced voltages up to 1,000V a.c. However,
due to a relaxation in mains frequency tolerance,
the range is now 47 to 50.5 Hz. This can be
accommodated by further restricting the permissible
frequencies.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
The following restrictions apply in addition to those

given in section 4:
a) FDM systems may be carried in conventional
signalling cable to NR/PS/SIG/00005, provided:
i) the direction of lay alternates for successive
core layers;
ii) each system uses a pair of adjacent
conductors in the same layer; and
iii) additional systems in the same cable are
separated as far as practicable and do not
use a conductor adjacent to another
system.
b) Through crimps shall be used between internal
wiring and cables rather than disconnection
links; also where cables join.
5.3 Vital Reed

The following restrictions apply in addition to those
given in section 5.2:
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
a) Type RR vital reed channels 410, 411, 414,
415, 416 are not affected by the relaxation in
mains frequency tolerance. New work shall
consequently be restricted to these five
frequencies.
b) New vital FDM systems shall be carried in an
approved twisted pair signalling cable.
c) Otherwise, within conventional signalling cable,
each vital channel shall only be used once.
Alternate pairs shall be transposed midway
between line isolation points (see point h).
d) Non-vital systems shall not be run in the same
conventional signalling cable, unless it can be
ascertained that no channels with similar
frequencies, and no channels exceeding an
operating value of 700mV, are used.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
e) Regular earth testing is to be carried out to

detect first earth faults (see adapter in section
U042). This should be stated on drawings for
O&M purposes.
f) Twisted pair twin cable shall be used between
the power supply unit and the first transmitter or
receiver. This must not exceed 3m in length.
g) Twisted pair twin cable shall be used between
each reed receiver and its follower relay. This
must not exceed 20m in length. Any
correspondence contacts in this loop shall not
be broken, other than transiently, when the
receiver is energised.
h) Earthed twisted screened cable shall be used
between a master transmitter and its associated
transmitter repeater units. The outputs of
successive TRUs shall be connected in
antiphase.
i) Where line length exceeds 2km, a line amplifier
is to be provided at both ends. Intermediately,
alternately isolating transformers and line
amplifiers are to be provided every 2km (where
necessary two line amplifiers may be provided
consecutively).
j) In a.c. and dual electrified areas, a filter unit is
to be provided at each line amplifier and an
appropriate immunisation unit is to be provided
at each vital reed receiver filter.
k) The only lightning protection devices that may
be fitted to vital systems are those that are
specifically approved, such as the amplifier
choke. No such device shall be permitted to
have an earth connection, due to the risk from
multiple earth faults.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
l) High and low frequency type R reed

transmitters shall not be housed in the same
apparatus case, or in an equipment building
within 2m of each other, so as to avoid over
amplifying lower frequency signals and
subsequent false operation of adjacent
channels.
5.4 Reed Point Detection

This system uses vital reed (FDM) transmitters and
receivers, so follows the FDM rules in section 5.3,
but in addition it is preferable for each channel to
use a separate pair in the cable, rather than
multiplexing.
5 Time Division Multiplex (TDM)

TDM systems are susceptible to electromagnetic
interference and are not generally suitable for safety-
critical applications, unless specifically designed to have
the required integrity, in conjunction with an appropriate
medium for transmission. See NR/PS/SIG/00801.
In a.c. and dual electrified areas, TDM transmission
circuits shall use balanced pairs in telecoms cables.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Earth free terminations shall be used, preferably with a

maximum unbalance ratio in excess of 200. The TDM
system shall be approved for this particular environment
and designed to operate satisfactorily in the presence of
10mV induced interference.
See NR/WI/TEL/00113 for TDM systems in telecoms
cables and section E041 for the use of third party
telecommunications systems.
6 Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) Transmission

Systems
For proximity restrictions between CCTV and other
equipment, see section 3.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
In a.c. and dual electrified areas, lengths of co-axial

transmission lines for CCTV level crossings vulnerable
to dangerous levels of induced voltages shall be
screened. A 10 M ohm resistor shall be provided
between each conductor and earth at each termination
to prevent the build up of static charge.
7 Solid State Interlocking (SSI)

a) HVI track circuit transmitters, feed transformers, or
cable connecting them, shall not be housed in the
same apparatus case as, or in an equipment
building within 2m of, as Mark I or Mark II TFMs
(signal and points modules), DLMs (data link
modules), or LDTs (long distance terminals). SSI
interlockings and HVI track circuit equipment shall
not be installed in close proximity to each other. The
requirements of this paragraph do not apply if each
relevant item of equipment is provided with an EMC
declaration of conformity that addresses the
particular proximity problem.
Mark III TFMs are not susceptible to HVI
interference, but must not have Mk I or Mk II TFMs
substituted when in proximity to HVI equipment.
b) Wiring between DLMs (or LDTs) and their
associated repeater DLMs and TFMs shall be in
twisted pair cables and limited to a length of 5m.
Where SSI DLMs and TFMs are housed in the
same equipment room, the TFMs connected to
each pair of DLMs shall be mounted in a related
group, so as to avoid confusion.
c) Wiring from tail cables shall be segregated from the
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
data and power wiring (see section E005). It is also

preferable for track circuit tail cables to be routed
separately from other tail cables directly connected
to a TFM. Segregation between individual data link
cables is not, however, necessary.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
d) To avoid electrically induced noise, SSI cabling

shall be kept as short as practicable. All SSI circuits
shall be subject to the requirements of SSI 8500,
particularly those relating to length restrictions and
double cutting. External inputs shall be double cut.
However, due to the highly coded nature of SSI, any
corruption will not affect safety, but only
dependability. Generally SSI systems are extremely
tolerant to interference and a length of external loop
input to TFMs of 2,000m (4,000m loop) is permitted,
but it is preferable to limit this length to 200m (400m
loop) for inputs from on-track equipment. This
length should be further reduced on d.c. electrified
lines, to avoid premature ageing of the TFM
transzorbs, and the cabling should be routed away
from conductor rail ramps.
e) TFM outputs that require double cutting shall be
buffered with an interface relay, isolating
transformer, or transformer rectifier, as they are not
double cut by the module. (Lever locks require an
interface relay.)
f) Interface relays for connection across TFM signal
module outputs shall be 110V a.c. BR 966 F7 style.
Where voltage-free contacts are required from a
standard TFM output feeding equipment, such as
signal lighting, a lamp proving relay (BR 941 style)
may be used in series between the TFM and the
load, in the supply leg (not in the return leg).
g) To minimise the impact of lightning strikes and
interference induced on data links, a Data Link
Isolation Transformer (DLIT) shall be provided at
least every 2km in a.c. and dual electrified areas
and at the mid-point of every data link elsewhere.
This requirement applies only to new work, since
DLITs are liable to attenuate the line and affect the
data link design.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Where they connect to DLMs and DLITs, trackside

data link cables shall be immunised with surge
protection units (to GS/ES1937 for new work). So
far as is practicable, the clean wiring shall be
segregated from the unclean wiring. See SSI 8503
for details.
h) Power supplies shall be protected by an approved
transient protection device. This can be at the
primary stage of the main supply transformer (650V
or 400V as applicable) or at the secondary stage of
each 110V and 140V transformer, or at high
lightning risk sites both options can be applied.
External inputs and outputs of TFMs can also be
protected from transients by a device that has
specific approval for the application in question.
Such a device must be used in accordance with any
conditions or restrictions applicable. More than one
protection device per TFM shall not be earthed, due
to the wrong side failure potential of multiple earth
faults.
i) To prevent damage to TFMs from back EMF, relay
contacts that can de-energise the output load shall
not be introduced into the circuit between the TFM
and its load. However, contacts used for down
proving or cross proving are acceptable.
j) For restrictions on the use of mobile telephones and
other transmitting equipment, see section E003.
Test equipment shall only be connected in
accordance with section U033.
8 Panel Multiplexers (PMUXs)

Panel multiplexers are vulnerable to electromagnetic
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
interference and the following safeguards are required:
a) for new panels and where practicable for existing
panels, subject to point c), the panel multiplexer
shall be located within the panel framework; or
otherwise in a cubicle as close as reasonably
practicable to the panel.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
b) the panel multiplexer to panel cabling shall be

screened cable, the screen of which shall be
earthed at one end only. The inputs and outputs
shall be in separate cables. See section E005.
c) the proximity of adjacent equipment and cables
shall be considered so as to minimise possible
electrical interference, especially when routing the
panel multiplexer to panel cabling.
Further Information
S.I.1992/2372 Electromagnetic Compatibility
Regulations 1992 as amended by:
(Amendment) Regulations 1994
BS EN 50121 Railway applications - EMC
BS EN 61000 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
GM/RC1500 EMC between the Railway and its
Neighbourhood
GE/RT8000 Rule Book
NR/GN/SIG/11600 Signalling and Operational Telecoms
Design: Technical Guidance
BR13422 50 Hz Single Phase A.C. Electrification -
Immunisation of S&T Systems Against
GS/ES1937 SSI Trackside Data Link Surge Protection
Module
NR/SP/SIG/10029 Operation and maintenance of non-
intrusive earth leakage test adapter for
reed FDM systems
NR/SP/SIG/11752 Train Detection
NR/PS/SIG/00801 Requirements Spec for TDM Systems
NR/PS/SIG/11763 Reed Type RT Track Circuits
NR/WI/TEL/00113 Wiring of Copper Telecoms Terminations
SSI 8500 Design of SSI Schemes
SSI 8503 Earthing and Bonding of SSI Equipment
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Electromagnetic Compatibility with Rolling Stock
A route may be associated with infrastructure systems

susceptible to electromagnetic interference (EMI), such
that:
• existing vehicles with route acceptance require
higher susceptibility levels from the infrastructure;
• new or proposed vehicles require higher
susceptibility levels from the infrastructure; or
• certain infrastructure systems or configurations
have a susceptibility lower than any standard
susceptibility levels which have been defined for
that type of equipment.
The details of any such enhanced or deficient route
susceptibility should be supplied by the Rolling Stock
Acceptance Board for incorporation into the appropriate
standards. On lines with route acceptance for new
traction units likely to emit electromagnetic interference,
including trains with three phase or induction motor
drives, there may be supplementary restrictions on the
use of equipment operating at certain frequencies. If
there is any doubt as to the susceptibility level applicable
to a particular route, the details shall be ascertained from
the supervisor before commencing work.
The following list gives examples of infrastructure
systems and equipment which could have their safety
performance reduced as a consequence of EMI:
a) train detection systems (including track circuits and
axle counters);
b) interlocking systems (including TDM and FDM
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
remote control systems);

c) signals and point operating equipment and their
controlling circuits;
d) train warning and protection systems;
e) telecommunications systems (including voice and
data transmission, and supervisory control and data
acquisition (SCADA) systems);
f) radio systems (including voice and data
transmission, fixed and mobile systems).

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Further Information
Regulations 1992 as amended by:
BS EN 50121 Railway applications - Electromagnetic
compatibility
BS EN 61000 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
GM/RC1500 Electromagnetic Compatibility between
the Railway and its Neighbourhood
GE/RT8015 Electromagnetic Compatibility between
Railway Infrastructure and Trains
GE/RT8270 Route Acceptance of Rail Vehicles
including changes in Operation or
Infrastructure
NR/GN/SIG/50001 Methodology for demonstration of
electrical compatibility between rolling
stock and infrastructure
compliance with single rail reed track
circuits on the AC Railway
NR/GN/SIG/50003 Methodology for Demonstration of
Electrical Compatibility with Double Rail
Reed TCs on the DC Railway
NR/GN/SIG/50004 Methodology for the demonstration of
Electrical Compatibility With DC (AC-
Immune) Track Circuits
compatibility with 50 Hertz single Rail
track circuits
compatibility with HVI Track Circuits
compatibility with TI 21 Track Circuits
compatibility with FS2600 track circuits on
the DC Railway
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006

compatibility with TPWS Trackside
Equipment
compatibility with interlockings
Compatibility with Lineside Equipment
compatibility with Reed FDM Systems on
the AC and DC Railways
compatibility with Telecoms Systems
NR/GN/SIG/50018 Methodology for determination of
interaction with neighbouring Railways
BR13422 50 Hz Single Phase A.C. Electrification -
Immunisation of S&T Systems Against
see also IEE Guidance Document on EMC and
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Functional Safety: Annex F - Railways

available from:
http://www.iee.org/Policy/Areas/Electro/
END

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Use of Mobile Telephones, Radio Transmitters
and Un-Suppressed Portable Devices
1 Susceptible Electronic Equipment

The following items shall not be used within 3 metres of
apparatus cases (with doors open) or equipment racks, if
there is susceptible electronic equipment present which
is not protected as required by Rule Book module T1A:
• power tools,
• vacuum cleaners,
• mobile telephones and pagers,
• any other form of transmitting wireless
communication equipment.
Susceptible electronic equipment includes:
• vital/non-vital reed receivers,
• audio frequency track circuits,
• axle counter equipment,
• ATP and TPWS equipment,
• TDM and other multiplexers,
• SSI and other computer based interlocking
equipment.
These lists are indicative and not exhaustive.
Note: When CE marked, such products may be
regarded as only being susceptible up to one
metre, or otherwise as stated in the declaration
of conformity.
Note: Type RR reed receivers with radio frequency
suppression have a type number suffix 'B' or 'C'.
It is recognised that members of the public and railway
staff, other than S&T staff, can use radios, portable
telephones and power tools near S&T equipment. This is
unlikely to cause a problem providing that apparatus
case and equipment room doors are kept shut.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Use of Mobile Telephones, Radio Transmitters
and Un-Suppressed Portable Devices
2 Explosive Atmospheres
Mobile phones and other electrical devices must be
switched off if there is a known risk associated with an
explosive atmosphere, such as when refuelling
equipment or vehicles with petrol.
3 Distractions
Mobile phones and pagers offer many benefits but they
can distract those carrying out safety-critical tasks such
as driving, operating plant, acting as lookout, or whilst on
or near the line. It is essential that people involved in
these activities turn off their phones to give full attention
to their duties.
When calling a mobile phone, always ask if it is safe for
the other person to talk, and offer to call back if it is not.
It is illegal to use a hand-held mobile phone when
driving, even when you are stopped at traffic lights or in
a queue of traffic. This includes making or receiving
calls, pictures, text messaging or accessing the Internet.
4 Warning Signs
Wherever susceptible electronic equipment is located, a
"switch off mobile phones" warning sign (see section
P015) shall be affixed to the outside doors of equipment
rooms and apparatus cases.
Further Information
RSSB Mobile Phone Protocol
S.I.2003/2695 Road Vehicles (Construction and Use)
(Amendment) (No.4) Regulations 2003
DfT leaflets Think! mobile phones and driving - from:
http://www.thinkroadsafety.gov.uk/mobile/pdf/mobile.pdf
indg331 Petrol Handling - The Dos and Don'ts
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Safe Handling of Electrostatic Sensitive Devices
The following precautions apply to personnel who are

required to handle, store, transport, install or repair any
equipment containing Electrostatic Sensitive Devices
(ESDs).
1 General Background
Static electrical discharge can cause damage to micro
devices at all stages of handling. An electrostatic charge
can easily build up on personnel, and the subsequent
rapid discharge to earth via the device can cause severe
damage. The severity of this damage depends on the
size of charge dissipated. In many cases the damage is
not total, and the device may continue to work at a
reduced performance level, but its in-service life may be
affected.
Unless adequate precautions are taken, ESDs can be
damaged by static discharge at any time. A Printed
Circuit Board (PCB) offers only limited protection to the
components. Devices within sealed modules are also
vulnerable, as contact with an unprotected connector
can provide a discharge path.
Complete systems are not usually at risk from the
dangers of inadvertent electrostatic discharge, as steps
are taken at the design stage to shield the ESDs with
enclosures and covers which protect the ESDs from
damage. It is when connectors are exposed that ESDs
are most likely to be damaged by electrostatic discharge.
References in this Code of Practice to modules and sub-
assemblies assume that they have ESDs fitted.
2 General Considerations Regarding Electrostatic

Discharge
2.1 Training
No personnel shall handle ESDs until suitably trained
and assessed as competent in the techniques for the
safe handling of ESDs. An auditable record of training
must be retained.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
2.2 Precautions
Precautions to prevent static damage shall be taken
whenever handling equipment containing ESDs, such as
printed circuit boards (PCBs). in particular to avoid
unnecessary touching of the edge connectors.
Equipment incorporating ESDs shall not be subject to
sudden discharges from stored energy devices such as
electromagnetic coils and capacitors.
Equipment incorporating ESDs shall be protected
against the risk of static discharge caused by personnel
who may become electrostatically charged in the normal
course of their duties, for instance:
• Moving a chair across the floor.
• Friction caused by walking across the floor
• Brushing clothing against another surface or
against other clothing, especially where clothing
contains man-made fibres. Removing paper from
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
plastic envelopes or separating plastic envelopes

that have stuck together.
• Handling freshly-produced photocopies.
• Applying identification labels which may become
charged when separating two surfaces.
2.3 Handling Area

ESDs shall only be handled in an electrostatic Safe
Handling Area (SHA). 'This is an area which prevents
the inadvertent discharge of static electricity through
vulnerable devices.
2.4 Packaging
ESDs must be transported in static shielded containers
and packaging to prevent the build up of static charges.
protect against electrostatic fields, and to prevent
mechanical damage during storage and transportation
(see section 5).

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
2.5 Marking
The actions of labelling and removal of a label at
component, PCB or module level may cause static
damage. This process must only be undertaken in a
controlled de-ionised environment which is produced by
the use of an air-ionisation blower or a similar device.
Suitable markings, identifying the presence of ESDs
shall be attached to racks, cabinets, data sheets,
storage bins, cupboards and protective wrapping
materials.
All sites designated as SHAs shall be dearly identified
with suitable posters and labels.
All electrostatically sensitive apparatus shall be labelled
using distinctive markings in accordance with
BS EN 61340-5-1.
3 Transportation and Storage

3.1 General
It is necessary to ensure that equipment containing
ESDs is suitably packaged and correctly labelled during
transportation and storage.
Labelling must be undertaken in a controlled, de-ionised
environment.
Individual ESDs, PCBs and sub-assemblies must be
shielded against electrostatic discharge by screening
provided by the packaging, which must also prevent
mechanical damage during transportation and storage.
Suitable protective packaging for ESDs includes:
Transparent electrostatic shielding bag

The identification details shall be entered on the
label used for sealing the bag. The label must, at a
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
glance, differentiate between serviceable and non-

serviceable items. This label must seal the bag, and
the contents of an unsealed bag are considered to
be unserviceable.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Transportation containers
These are made from conductive material, with
cushioning and separation to prevent damage to the
devices held within them. A container shall be fitted
with a 10mm stud for connection via a resistive 1 M
ohm Common Point Ground (CPG) lead to an earth
point before the case is opened. Only devices
known to be serviceable shall be held in the
container. Devices may be contained in a shielding
bag or placed directly into the container. Where a
shielding bag is used, then the label must be intact
and the bag sealed.
A device must only be removed from the transit
packaging in a SHA (see paragraph 5).
3.2 Transportation
All new components and parts shall be delivered in anti-
static packaging, and shall be so stored until required.
All transportation containers (including field servicing
kits) shall be bonded to the SHA before being opened.
Modules shall be checked to ensure that the conductive
connector covers are fitted prior to dispatch.
Note: These covers are only to be fitted in a SHA.
3.3 Storage
There must be a specific, clearly marked area set out for
the storage of ESDs, PCBs, sub-assemblies and
modules. Access to this area shall be restricted to
suitably trained personnel instructed in the precautions
required for the handling of ESDs.
Storage racks for ESDs, PCBs and modules shall be
made of metal, and shall be bonded to a common earth
point.
All containers or bins used on such racks shall be of
metal or conductive plastics construction.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
ESDs shall be kept separate, and never stored with

other components, in order to prevent the risk of
protective procedures being overlooked in subsequent
handling.
All ESDs packed individually in the manufacturer's
protective packing, or packed in bulk in metal or anti-
static plastic tubes, shall be stored in the original
packing.
Where individual ESDs are removed from the
manufacturer's protective packing and stored, then the
following shall apply:
• PCBs shall be stored in sealed shielding bags,
which may themselves be contained in protective
packaging. PCBs shall only be removed from the
bags in a SHA.
• Integrated Circuit chips (lCs) and other small static
sensitive devices shall be stored in anti-static
containers.
• EPROMs (Erasable Programmable Read Only
Memories) shall be stored in either a conductive IC
storage box, or in a conductive storage tube.
• Modules shall be supplied and stored with
conductive covers fitted over the connectors.
4 Special Precautions for EPROMs

EPROMs shall only be removed from the protective
wrapping in a SHA. EPROMs shall not be transported in
storage bins.
No EPROM shall be removed from the SHA before it is
packaged in a suitable ant-static container.
EPROMs shall only be programmed in a SHA.
EPROMs shall only be inserted into, or removed from, a
PCB or module in a SHA; after removal from a PCB or
module, the EPROM shall be placed in an appropriate
temporary conductive storage bin or suitable IC storage
box or case.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
5 Safe Handling Areas

5.1 General
A SHA is a working area, where individual ESDs (as well
as boards. sub-assemblies and sealed modules) may be
handled safely without damage being caused by the
discharge of static electricity.
A SHA shall be created at each working site. The SHA
may be permanent or portable and, if within touching
distance of other equipment, shall be bonded so that the
equipment is included within the protection afforded by
the SHA.
All equipment racks and metalwork shall be properly
bonded.
Any mains power supply within the SHA shall be
supplied via a Residual Current Circuit Breaker (RCCB)
complying with BS EN 61008. The maximum sensitivity
of the RCCB shall not exceed 30 mA.
5.2 Permanent Safe Handling Area

See Figure E1 for an example of a permanent SHA
layout. Each permanent SHA site shall consist of a
combination of items, as listed below, to ensure safe
handling of ESDs:
• Clear markings, identifying the site as a SHA.
• A work bench with a dissipative mat placed on the
work surface, and a conductive floor mat which
shall be equipotentially connected using a 1 M ohm
CPG lead to an equipment earth or ground point,
and the mains supply earth (via the 10mm stud on
a 13 Amp dummy plug).
• A chair with conductive covers and 10mm studs.
Conductive bins for the storage of ESDs.
Any personnel carrying out work on equipment shall be
grounded via a 2 M ohm resistive lead and wrist strap.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Figure E1 Example of a Permanent

Safe Handling Area
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
5.3 Portable Safe Handling Area

See Figure E2 for an example of a portable SHA layout
A portable SHA site uses a dissipative mat, including
integral 10mm stud, which can be rolled up for
transportation, and included pockets to hold leads, wrist
strap, clips and connectors. The mat is the working area
and any personnel carrying out work on equipment shall
be grounded via a 2 M ohm resistive lead and wrist
strap, and also connected via clips/connectors to:
• 1 M ohm resistive CPG lead(s) to bond the
dissipative mat to a CPG,
• An equipment earth bonding point,
• The mains supply earth (via the 10mm stud on a 13
Amp dummy plug).
5.4 Additional Requirements

If ICs need to have labels changed, then an air-
ionisation air blower or similar item shall be provided.
6 Apparatus
In general, all apparatus and racks incorporating ESDs
shall be fitted with 10mm studs for connection of a wrist
strap and leads, conductive floor mat, or portable SHA
CPG lead. As a minimum, there shall be one 10mm stud
on each working face of each rack or module.
The studs shall be labelled with a suitable earth bonding
point label to indicate the connection point.
See Figures E1 and E2 for examples of typical
interconnections necessary to provide adequate
protection to ESDs at a SHA.
7 Static Control
To ensure the effectiveness of any static control
precautions, the special items shall be checked
regularly. The frequency of checks of each individual
item will depend on the nature of that item, its frequency
of use, and the risk of damage or deterioration.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Figure E2 Example of a Temporary

Safe Handling Area
Equipment to test the integrity and correct functioning of

the SHA items, and the correct operation of air-ionisation
blowers shall be readily available. This test equipment
shall be forwarded to an approved service/calibration
centre at appropriate intervals.
Records shall be kept showing PASS/FAIL status and
any remedial actions taken. These shall be retained as
quality records for audit purposes.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Further Information
BS EN 61008 Specification for residual current operated
circuit-breakers without integral
overcurrent protection for household and
similar uses (RCCBs)
BS EN 61340-5 Electrostatics. Protection of electronic
devices from electrostatic phenomena.
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Segregation of Wiring
Wires and cables may need to be installed in separate

runs for one of more of the following reasons:
1 Cross-Contamination
In order to avoid contamination leading to insulation
degradation, separate cable routes should be provided
to maintain physical separation between copolymer or
PVC insulated conductors and those with PCP or rubber
insulation. However, modern rubber wire, e.g. Type A1
to NR/PS/SIG/00005, does not use PCP and is not
affected by PVC contamination, although mixing is not
generally desirable. Segregation should be maintained
unless it can be ascertained that all wire is PCP free.
2 Internal and External Wiring

Internal type cables (Type A) are not permitted in the
same wiring route as external (Type B) or on-track type
cables (Type C), nor in unprotected metal trunking.
Note: If it is desired to use the rules for internal circuits
(i.e. single cutting and internal power supply) for
circuits extending between adjacent equipment
housings, a fully enclosed protective non-
conducting duct should be used.
3 Protection from Traction Faults

It is important in electrified areas that cables connected
to the rails, e.g. track cables, are kept separate from
internal wiring and fitted with enclosed terminations to
protect equipment and personnel from traction faults.
In d.c. electrified areas, many equipment buildings use
in-line fusing for all external circuits to protect internal
equipment.
4 Input and Output Integrity

Where there is a particular risk of wrong side circuit
faults arising from cable damage, inputs and outputs
should be allocated to separate cables.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Examples include point detection tail cables and cables

to panel multiplexers (section E001).
5 Transient Protection
Inputs and outputs from system protection surge
arrestors and line isolating transformers should be
segregated to keep "clean" and "dirty" signals apart.
6 Fast Transient Earth Bonding (section E021)

An FTE conductor requires the shortest practicable route
to earth. It may conduct surges, such as lightning, so
should not be run in trunking with other wiring.
7 Electromagnetic Interference (EMI)

Section E001 gives many examples of audio frequency
and other susceptible systems, the wiring of which must
be kept separate in order to prevent cross-talk. Such
cabling should also be kept as short as possible, often in
twisted pairs and not ducted.
Wiring from tail cables should be segregated from the
data and power wiring for electronic systems. It is also
preferable for track circuit tail cables to be routed
separately from other tail cables directly connected to
electronic units, such as a TFM.
With some electronic systems, separation is achieved by
diverse routing.
8 Thermal Effects
Cable overheating may be exacerbated by the bunching
of wires in a duct. BS 7671 gives tables showing the
relative effects of running cables by different methods.
It may be beneficial to reduce the heating effect of
current flowing, particularly in normally energised circuits
and power supply cables, by not tightly filling ducts.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
9 Voltage Separation
The insulation of any cable should be sufficient as to
enable the cable to withstand the applied voltage and
any foreseeable transient over-voltages. The insulation
should also be sufficient to withstand the applied voltage
within any other cable with which it comes into direct
contact, in particular where mixed with power cables.
There are three common options (see BS 7671):
i) each cable in a cable route or ducting is insulated
for the highest voltage present in the route,
ii) a separate compartment is provided for each
voltage system present, e.g. over or under 175V, or
iii) each susceptible cable has an earthed metallic
covering.
For telecommunication circuits, data transfer circuits and
similar, consideration shall be given to electrical
interference, both electromagnetic and electrostatic.
Telecommunication circuits shall be segregated in
accordance with BS 6701 as appropriate.
NR/SP/ELP/27224 requires cable routes for high voltage
cables to be separated by a minimum of 1m and,
wherever practicable, routed on the opposite side of the
track from cable routes for signalling and telecoms
cables.
Note: Except for cables connected to equipment
attached to a running rail, such as point
machines, cables energised at a nominal voltage
of more than 110V should not be routed on the
surface across the track.
10 Fire Protection
Fire alarm and emergency lighting circuits shall be
segregated from all other cables and from each other in
accordance with BS 5839 and BS 5266.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Further Information
Guidance
NR/SP/ELP/27224 Specification for the installation of cable
routes, cable laying, testing and jointing
of cables forming part of the traction
distribution
BS 5266 Emergency lighting
BS 5839 Fire detection and alarm systems for
buildings
BS 6701 Telecommunications equipment and
telecommunications cabling.
Specification for installation, operation
and maintenance
BS 7671 Requirements for electrical installations
(IEE Wiring Regulations 16th Edition)
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
END

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
New Product Guidelines
1 Equipment and Substances

It is a statutory requirement that all equipment and
substances are designed, developed, manufactured and
supplied so as to be safe and without risk to health. This
places a duty upon the manufacturer, developer and
designer, as well as the importers and suppliers, of
articles and substances for use at work, whether used
exclusively at work or not.
Any person who designs, develops, manufactures,
imports or supplies any article or substance for use at
work must ensure that it will be safe and without risk to
health. For articles this applies while being installed, set
or adjusted, used, cleaned, maintained, tested and
examined. For substances this applies while being used,
handled, processed, stored, transported, tested and
examined.
Any person who designs, develops, manufactures,
imports or supplies any article or substance for use at
work must ensure that the users have adequate
information about the uses for which the article or
substance has been designed/developed, the tests
required, any conditions necessary to ensure safety and
any training that may be needed.
2 Product Check List

2.1 Acceptance
Is there a CE marking and declaration of
conformity?
If so, which directives are covered and are there
restrictions?
Is there an acceptance certificate?
What, if any, special restrictions are included?
Have catalogue numbers been allocated?
Is there a new product brief?
Is the product data available?
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
2.2 Training
What training manuals are required for design,
installation, maintenance and faulting?
What instruction notices or warning signs are
required, and where (section P015)?
How are staff to be trained in the delivery,
installation, maintenance and faulting?
2.3 Design
Is there a product specification?
Is there an application manual?
Can alterations/modifications be designed in-
house?
Is there a data preparation manual/training course?
2.4 Installation
Are there installation instructions?
Does it require lifting handles, lifting eyes etc.?
Can it be moved to the required position?
How is it to be installed/fixed?
How can a safe system of work be ensured?
2.5 Testing
Is there a works test specification?
What needs to be tested? How?
Is there an SMTH test plan?
What should be tested in the event of a WSF?
2.6 Maintenance
Is there a Signalling Maintenance Specification?
Is there a fault finding guide?
Is there safe access for maintenance?
Are plug-couplers available/recommended for easy
replacement?
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
2.7 Electrical Requirements

Have typical application circuits been prepared?
What is the maximum power consumption?
What is the correct fuse rating for protection?
Is allowance for inrush current necessary?
What size/type of cable is required?
Are all terminals shielded if above 50v?
Are all live parts insulated?
What are the voltage levels in fault conditions?
Can the supply switches be locked off?
Is an emergency stop facility required?
Does it require earthing, or is it double insulated?
Is there electrical continuity between accessible
conductive parts?
Are the essential characteristics for safe use
marked on the equipment, or does it require an
accompanying notice?
Are "danger electricity" labels required? Where?
2.8 EMC (section E001)

Is it CE marked?
Are the manufacturer's instructions/restrictions
available?
Has it been EMC tested?
Is it susceptible to EMI, including mobile phones?
Will its emissions disturb other equipment?
2.9 Interoperability
Is it an interoperability constituent?
Is it a sub-system covered by a TSI?
Does it require Notified Body approval?
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
2.10 Guards
Are all moving parts guarded?
Do guards have to be moved for maintenance?
Interlocks?
What ensures the guards are re-fitted?
2.11 Noise
How much noise is emitted?
Are warning labels (e.g. for ear defenders)
required?
What is the safe distance?
2.12 Emitted Substances

What is being emitted? Fumes, dust?
Is the emission covered by COSHH?
Should it be covered by COSHH?
2.13 Disposal
Are disassembly instructions provided?
What arrangements are required for disposal?
Which components require special treatment?
Further Information
1974 c.37 Health and Safety at Work etc. Act 1974
1987 c.43 Consumer Protection Act 1987
S.I.1994/2328 General Product Safety Regulations 1994
S.I.2002/3045 Sale and Supply of Goods to Consumers
Regulations 2002
S.I.1991/1620 Construction Products Regulations 1991
S.I.1994/3051 Construction Products (Amendment)
Regulations 1994
Regulations 1992
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
S.I.1992/3073 Supply of Machinery (Safety) Regulations

1992
S.I.1994/2063 Supply of Machinery (Safety)
S.I.1994/3260 Electrical Equipment (Safety) Regulations
1994
S.I.2001/1701 Noise Emission in the Environment by
Equipment for use Outdoors Regulations
2001
S.I.2001/3958 Noise Emission in the Environment by
Equipment for use Outdoors
SI2002/2677 Control of Substances Hazardous to
Health Regulations 2002
SI2004/3386 Control of Substances Hazardous to
Health (Amendment) Regulations 2004
Downloadable guidance material on the EU Directives and
corresponding UK Regulations from the
DTI:
http://www.dti.gov.uk/strd/
EU Guide to the Implementation of Directives based on the New
Approach, and website:
http://www.newapproach.org/
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Product Approval Status
1 Product Status
Before installing a product on Network Rail
infrastructure, it must be ensured that it has been
accepted for its intended use.
The PADS database gives a definitive list of products,
with their acceptance status and is accessible on
subscription at: http://www.raildata.co.uk
The database also includes the PADS Number
(Catalogue No.), Product Acceptance certificate (which
includes any restrictions in force) and whether
Grandfather Rights apply.
Lists of approved tools and materials commonly used for
maintenance purposes are given in SMS parts A05 &
A06.
2 Grandfather Rights
Products that were in successful use on the railway prior
to 1 April 1994 are deemed to have 'Grandfather Rights'
by virtue of their introduction and use by the BR Board.
In effect, they are deemed to have been accepted for
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
their particular application.

'Grandfather rights' become invalid if the product is
changed or is proposed for a new or modified
application. It is then subject to acceptance as outlined
above.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Product Approval Status
Further Information
GI/RT7002 Acceptance of Systems, Equipment and
Materials for Use on Railtrack Controlled
Infrastructure
GE/GN8565 Guidance on the Retention of Design
Information for the Validation of Technical
Change and Configuration Management
NR/SP/SIG/10071 Approval of Signalling Equipment
Specifications
NR/SP/ACC/029 Product Acceptance
AS/A/GUIDANCE/001 Guidance for cross-acceptance of
products onto Railtrack controlled
infrastructure
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`-

Issue: 03
Date: Dec 2016
Rectification of Earth Faults Protected by Automatic
Disconnection on Power Supplies below 175V a.c.
1 Background
Signalling power supplies have traditionally been
designed to float without reference to earth. This
enables them to be tolerant of a first earth fault and is
recommended for signalling circuits in Company and
Railway Group Standards.
Prior to 1990 when the Electricity at Work Regulations
(EAWR) came into force, signalling power supplies were
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
often installed in non-earthed environments, such as an
apparatus case with no connection to an earth
electrode, and therefore offering no protection to staff
from electric shock in the event of more than one fault.
Although signalling equipment is exempt from
compliance with the IEE Wiring Regulations (the
accepted national standard that demonstrates
compliance with EAWR) the sixteenth edition does allow
for a floating supply, which it calls an "IT" system.
However, the regulations require such systems to be
earth-protected (i.e. the surrounding metalwork shall be
connected to earth) and monitored for earth faults.
Although not retrospective, new power supplies will be
designed and installed with earth protection, so as to
give automatic disconnection when a second earth fault
appears.
For rectification activities on signalling power distribution
equipment above 175 V a.c.,the requirements contained
within NR/L2/SIGELP/50000 shall be followed.
2 First Earth Fault on Signalling Power Supplies
Some power supplies have indications of earth faults to
both signaller and technician. The technicians will be
able to use the Bender Earth Leakage Detector
equipment to help with fault finding up to 110Va.c. and
120V d.c. This is important, because earth faults will
need to be quickly located.

Not for
IHSResale, 09/19/2018 05:07:35 MDT
Issue: 03
Date: Dec 2016
Traditionally, earth faults on signalling power

supplies have not prevented the operation of the
railway signalling system. When an earth failure
is found, therefore, the signallers see no
operational advantage in the repair. They have,
at times, have been reluctant to allow staff
access to the equipment because they have
considered the running of traffic more important
than a failure having no operational effects.
Signallers and Operational Control Staff have
been requested to give every assistance to
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
technicians, with access to clear the first earth
fault on the new systems before a second earth
fault disconnects the power supply. Power
disconnection can disrupt train movements
more than allowing access for the technician to
locate the first earth fault.
3 Clearing the First Earth Fault

Where the new signalling systems are installed,
Technicians shall attempt to find and clear the
fault immediately, if practicable. If rail traffic
makes this impractical, a fault team shall return
to investigate the fault within 48 hours of access
being refused.
Recognising that these faults can be difficult to
find, further attempts may need to be made as
convenient to Operations Control and Signallers.
The fault shall normally be rectified within 10
working days.
If this is not possible, the power supply is liable
to be signed over to live working procedures
(see section 4) until the failure is located. The
S&TME may grant an extension of up to a total
of 4 weeks.
Not for
IHSResale, 09/19/2018 05:07:35 MDT
Issue: 03
Date: Dec 2016
If the failure is not rectified at the end of this time, 4

weeks after discovery, the power supply shall be treated
as defective and live working techniques applied to all
activities on equipment fed from the affected power
supply.
4 Live Working Procedures

(also known as "Hot Working")
When a power supply has an earth fault present for
longer than 4 weeks (see section 3), any work on the
power supply or on equipment fed from it (other than
rectification of the earth fault) shall be subject to the live
working techniques given in section X002.
Further Information
GI/GN7517 Guidance on Signalling and Safety-
Related Telecommunications Power
Supplies and Circuits
S.I.1989/635 Electricity at Work Regulations 1989
BS 7671 Requirements for electrical
installations (IEE Wiring Regulations
16th Edition)
PA05/02354 Product acceptance certificate for
Bender Earth Leakage Detector
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Not for
IHSResale, 09/19/2018 05:07:35 MDT
Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Signalling Circuits in Telecommunication Systems
1 General
In some installations, signalling functions are transmitted
via telecommunication systems.
Telecoms systems are provided by the Telecoms Bearer
Steward, who has responsibility for maintenance and
faulting of all circuits/ services contained within the
systems.
The Telecoms Bearer Steward must obtain authorisation
from the signalling maintenance function before
commencing work on a telecoms system that may, or is
known to contain signalling circuits.
The signalling maintenance function is responsible for
ensuring that any signalling circuitry is isolated from the
telecommunications system (or under possession)
before work starts. Certain specified tests may be
permitted without the disconnection of signalling circuits.
This instruction defines the procedures that shall apply
to work on telecommunications systems that carry
signalling circuits and enables compliance with
GK/RT0105. It complements telecoms specification
NR/SP/TEL/30067. Unless information is available to
the contrary, all signalling circuits should be regarded as
being safety-related.
2 Telecoms Cables Carrying Signalling Functions

Telecoms cables reserved solely for signalling circuits
shall be identified and treated as signalling cables. They
are the responsibility of the signalling maintainer. All
work on such cables shall comply with Signalling
Maintenance Testing or Signalling Works Testing
procedures as appropriate.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Telecoms cables carrying both telecoms and signalling

circuits are the responsibility of the Telecoms Bearer
Steward. All work on such cables is subject to
agreement between the Telecoms Bearer Steward and
the signalling maintainer, in accordance with
NR/SP/TEL/30067. This includes bearer circuits
transmitting coded signalling functions compliant to BS
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
EN 50159.
3 Definitions
Telecoms Bearer Steward
The organisation or group with responsibility for
day-to-day maintenance of Network Rail owned
telecommunications bearer systems or equipment.
Signalling Circuit
A circuit carrying information used for the operation
of the railway signalling system associated with the
safe movement of trains. These circuits may be
provided using bearer circuits provided in
operational telecoms cables.
Electrification control systems are the responsibility
of the Electrification Engineer.
Operational Telecommunications
All fixed and radio based telecommunication
systems that are associated with the safe
movement of trains, including signal post
telephones, block telephones, level crossing
telephones, RETB, GSM-R and cab secure radio.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Network Termination Point (NTP)

The termination point at which a signalling circuit
enters or exits the telecommunications cable or
system, for example:
NTP NTP
Telecoms
transmission
system
Telecoms
Sig. system Sig.
Signalling circuit
An NTP is only valid (from a signalling perspective)

if an authorised disconnection point is provided, e.g.
2BA links.
Note: There may be more favourable places to
make disconnections (section 4), e.g. at the
modem for a TDM system.
Through crimps and Krone blocks are not permitted
as NTPs, since there is no disconnection point.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
4 Telecoms Cables and Systems Carrying Both
Telecoms and Signalling Circuits
Before work is started on a telecoms cable or system,
the Telecoms Bearer Steward must confirm the absence
of signalling circuits in that cable by consulting up to
date records.
Note: Some signalling circuits do not carry d.c. voltage
or a.c. signal until they need to be operated.
If there is any doubt, or where signalling circuits are
confirmed to be present, the Telecoms Bearer Steward
must consult with the local signal engineer.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Before authorising work to start, the local signal engineer

must identify the circuits involved and arrange
disconnection (or diversion) of any signalling circuits
from the telecommunications system. Disconnection is
not required in the following circumstances:
a) where work is restricted to measuring voltage,
b) where work is restricted to disconnection of
telecommunication circuits (i.e. circuits that are not
classed as signalling circuits) by slipping links and
where jumper wires are not to be provided or
removed between any NTPs,
c) where work involves the change of use of telecoms
pairs or channels already in service, providing it
does not involve re-jumpering the cable and does
not involve signalling circuits.
All work on such systems must be compliant with
GK/RT0105, NR/SP/TEL/30067 and this section E041.
Diverted circuits shall be subject to the temporary design
procedure (given in section D011) and Maintenance
Testing (see section 5).
Disconnection of equipment in connection with Rule
Book module T1A is the responsibility of the signalling
function.
5 Diversion of Circuits in Telecommunication

Systems
If it is necessary to temporarily divert a circuit:
i) Existing wiring which is to be diverted shall be
clearly labelled.
ii) New wires shall be of single core wire, installed in
trunking and labelled in accordance with
NR/WI/TEL/00113. They shall also be clearly
visible.
iii) Alternative cable cores shall be labelled at each
termination point in the diversion.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
iv) Where multiple cable core diversions are required,

each shall be completed and successfully tested
before commencing the next core diversion.
v) A cable core diversion shall only be applied to the
terminations at each end of the faulty core.
vi) All affected maintenance records shall be endorsed
in red, signed and dated.
vii) The local telecom bearer steward manager shall
maintain a record of cable diversions and
associated dates.
viii) A full insulation and continuity test shall be carried
out within 48 hours of the diversion (72 hours where
no existing cable diversions are present on the
same cable). Where possession of the cable is not
possible, the full test may be deferred subject to a
10% minimum test of cores being carried out (see
Telecoms Maintenance Test Plan CAB006).
ix) The local telecom bearer steward manager shall
ensure that all temporary diversions are rectified as
soon as practicable. All temporary wires and labels
shall be recovered and drawings updated as
necessary.
x) All diversions over one month duration shall be
subject to risk analysis by the local signal engineer
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
to determine the ongoing testing regime.
6 Managing Work on Telecommunications Cables

or Systems that Contain Signalling Circuits
Before Telecoms work may start:
i) The Telecoms Bearer Steward shall advise the
local signal engineer of the following:
• List of cables and systems to be affected,
• Scope of work,
• Date / time work is to take place,
• Time required to complete the work,
• Point of contact.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
ii) A competent signal engineer must review the

proposed work. Liaison with the Telecoms
Bearer Steward may be necessary at this stage.
iii) The local signal engineer shall arrange a
maintenance disconnection or diversion of
affected signalling circuits at the NTPs, as
necessary, to a programme of work agreed with
the Telecoms Bearer Steward. A full list of all
disconnected and diverted circuits shall be
returned to the supervisor with the maintenance
testing documentation.
Note: Refer to disconnection exemptions in
section 4.
iv) Following disconnection of all necessary
signalling circuits, the signalling technician (or
local signal engineer) shall complete and jointly
sign the Authority to Work Certificate (Figure
E4), with the Telecoms Bearer Steward. The
copy shall be returned to the local signal
engineer, together with Maintenance Testing
documentation, etc. Where no disconnection of
circuitry is required, this may be done by return
correspondence.
v) Telecoms work can only commence after
handover of the Authority to Work Certificate to
Telecoms Bearer Steward.
Where the signalling technician and Telecoms
Bearer Steward's representative are present, the
certificates, items iv) and vii), can be signed in
person. Otherwise, the form shall be dictated and
read back before being verbally endorsed. Paper
copies shall subsequently be forwarded or faxed.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
After Telecoms work has been completed:

vii) The Telecoms Bearer Steward shall complete a
duplicate Cable/ System Restoration Certificate
(Figure E5), to be jointly signed with the
signalling technician (or local signal engineer);
top copy to be retained by Telecoms Bearer
Steward, the other copy to be returned to the
local signal engineer. The certificate shall
include detail of the testing done on each circuit
prior to handover, including the following test
results, where practicable, for recording on the
fault management system (see Telecoms
Maintenance Test Plans CAB001 to CAB006,
as appropriate):
• Continuity test,
• Loop resistance test,
• Insulation test (core to core and core to
earth).
Note: This applies to only the affected pairs.
See SMS part Z for preferred test
values.
viii) When satisfied that the appropriate tests have
been completed, the signalling technician may
restore the disconnected and diverted circuits.
Before being returned to service, each
signalling circuit must be CABLE FUNCTION
TESTED in accordance with Signalling
Maintenance Testing procedures. Reference
shall be made to the disconnection list to assist
in this process.
Note: Where it is safe and practicable to
accept a partial restoration of cables /
systems, precise details of which
cables/ cores/ systems/ sub-systems
are being offered back must be
documented on the certificate and
tested as suitable for signalling use.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
A separate plan must be implemented

to return the remaining circuits to
service to include all necessary
handover and testing as above.
7 Records
i) The following forms for use with this procedure
are provided below:
Figure E4 Authority to Work Certificate, and
Figure E5 Cable/ Systems Restoration
Certificate.
ii) The following records must be retained:
• Maintenance Test Plans and Completed
Test Log Sheets,
• Completed Authority to Work, and
• Cable / System Restoration Certificate.
Further Information
GE/RT8000 Rule Book
GK/RT0105 The Transmission of Safety Related
Information
Handbook
NR/SP/TEL/30067 The Transmission of Safety Related
Information
NR/SP/TEL/31001 Telecommunications Maintenance
Testing and Failure Investigation
NR/WI/TEL/00113 Wiring of Copper Telecoms Terminations
BS EN 50159-1 Railway applications. Communication,
signalling and processing systems.
Safety related communication in closed
transmission systems
BS EN 50159-2 Railway applications. Communication,
signalling and processing systems.
Safety related communication in open
transmission systems
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006

Authority to Work Certificate
The following signalling circuits have been
disconnected **
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(continued overleaf **)
I hereby give permission for work to commence on
the following cables/systems:
Granted by:
Signed: …………………… Date: ………………
(for Signal Engineer) Time:………………
Accepted by:
Signed: ……………………. Date: ……………
(for Telecoms Bearer Steward)
**Delete as necessary
Figure E4 Authority to Work Certificate

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006

Circuit Restoration Certificate
I hereby confirm that I have completed work on the
following circuits and that they have been tested as
follows:
(continued overleaf **)

Correlated **
Wire Counted **
Continuity Tested **
Insulation Tested **
Other **
The following circuits are not yet restored to service:
Completed by:
Signed: …………………… Date: ………………
(for Signal Engineer) Time:………………
Accepted by:
Signed: ……………………. Date: ……………
(for Telecoms Bearer Steward)
**Delete as necessary
Figure E5 Cable/ System Restoration Certificate
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Alterations to Existing Signalling
1 Compliance with Engineering Diagrams

Alterations to signalling equipment shall only be made in
accordance with the engineering details supplied for the
work, except that where the engineering details do not
give precise requirements for installation (e.g. the exact
position of equipment within an apparatus case, or the
precise voltage setting for a power supply), it is
permissible for staff to make decisions about those
details, provided that:
a) any relevant setting up procedures are applied; and
b) the decisions are made within the scope/limits
permitted by the engineering details (e.g. a voltage
is selected to be within the minimum and maximum
allowable values).
Where important for safety, precise positions, voltages
and other parameters determined on site shall
subsequently be recorded on the infrastructure records.
In the case of non-conceptual design (section D011), the
alterations may be superimposed on record diagrams,
but still require independent checking.
Those parts of existing installations that are actually
being altered shall generally comply with the
requirements for new installations, except as permitted
below.
2 Conflicting Standards
It is undesirable to mix different standards within the
same installation where the installation was designed in
conformity to previous standards and the partial use of
current standards would result in confusing information,
or levels of protection, being presented to personnel.
In such cases the following options are available:
a) upgrade the whole installation to current standards;
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
b) undertake the alterations in accordance with the
standards of the original installation; or

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
c) tolerate a mix of standards, with the alterations to

current standards and the existing unchanged.
The choice of option shall be subject to risk assessment,
which shall also consider the period of time for which the
alteration is to remain. Examples of standards whose
perpetuation is generally acceptable include:
• Existing numbering rationale.
• Existing rules for lines circuits (except earth
returns).
• Perpetuation of older relay types, subject to any
conditions imposed in NR/SP/SIG/11129.
• Meshed circuits.
• Negative fusing.
• Geographical circuitry, but altered in a consistent
manner.
• Obsolescent signals, e.g. lower quadrant.
• Omission of point re-drive.
Further details are given in Appendix B1 of
NR/GN/SIG/11600.
Note that option (b) requires a derogation to be obtained
(see NR/SP/STP/045) against those standards to which
it is proposed the alterations will not conform.
3 Retrospective Work
A further factor that must be considered is the existence
of certain safety hazards within the existing installation,
which may have no bearing on the proposed alterations.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
This may justify the upgrading of the whole installation to

certain new standards, even if options (b) or (c) are
selected. Examples of such hazards include:
• Non-safety contacts in circuits.
• Approach locking without sequence proving.
• Incorrect use of back contacts.
• Delayed signal replacement with hazardous failure.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
• Swinging overlaps giving preselection of points.

• Single post terminations.
• Unshrouded terminals.
• Incorrectly wired BR 998 detector boxes.
• Level crossing modifications not undertaken.
• Transmission of safety-related controls over a
single channel.
• Replacement indications for automatic signals not
proving signal alight.
• Deficient absolute block controls.
• Sub-standard overlaps.
• Signals with SPAD risks.
• Sub-standard track circuit clearances.
• Track circuit joints allowing joint hopping.
• Track circuit residual voltage problems.
• Non-compliance with statutory requirements.
Further details are given in Appendix B2 of
NR/GN/SIG/11600.
Proposals that do not directly address any of these
hazards shall be subject to risk assessment. Particular
attention shall be paid to instances where the change in
standard was made with a view to improving safety or
dependability, or where retrospective action is required
to be considered when alterations are made.
4 Temporary Work
Certain other relaxations are generally acceptable for
temporary work, in order to facilitate the introduction of
some final arrangement, by agreement with the
infrastructure controller. Examples of these relaxations
are given in section D012. The period for which these
may remain in force shall be considered in the risk
assessment report.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Further Information
GK/RT0208 Installation of Signalling and Operational
Telecommunications Equipment
Guidance
NR/SP/SIG/11129 Life Management of Signalling Relays
NR/SP/STP/045 Managing the Process for Non-
Compliance Authority
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Insulation of Unterminated Wires
1 Insulation of Unterminated Wires

Alterations to signalling equipment shall only be made in
accordance with the engineering details supplied for the
work (see section E051).
The termination methods described below must be used
whenever wires are run or disconnected on any
signalling equipment that contains working circuits
(including relay racks, apparatus cases, lever locks,
circuit controllers, signal heads, point machines and
level crossings, etc.).
Before any such signalling equipment is brought into
use, any wires that are not terminated must be insulated
(as described below), or terminated.
Note: In this section, 'spade' includes any connector
such as relay spade, ring tongue terminal, eye
etc.
2 Running New Wires

Wires which cannot be terminated must be run, labelled,
checked and then made safe by insulating the ends and
securing them in a safe position. In the case of a single
wire which cannot be terminated, it should have its
connector fitted before insulation.
Wires which are to be attached to an existing wire, or
which are to be interchanged with an existing pair of two
wires, are not to have any connector fitted. They are to
be labelled, checked, insulated and made safe until the
commissioning. The wire end must not be stripped
before insulation.
Under no circumstances must any wiring be attached to
working circuits (including power supply bus-bars and
looping) until the new circuits are commissioned under a
proper testing and commissioning plan.
The type of insulation required for new wiring is given in
the flow chart in Figure E6.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Figure E6 New Wiring

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
3 Unterminated and Disconnected Wires

These must be fully disconnected from working circuits
at both ends. If a redundant wire cannot be completely
removed, it must be immediately disconnected, insulated
at each end and secured so that it cannot make contact
with working circuitry. The methods of insulation are
listed below:
BOMB TAILS (see section 4) may be used as a
permanent insulation with the wire cut away from any
apparatus.
The following temporary insulation methods may be
used for a maximum of 12 weeks:
• Bomb Tails, wire not cut away (see section 4),
• Squeeze on Sleeves (see section 5),
• Expandable Sleeves (see section 6).
The type of insulation required for redundant wiring is
given in the flow chart in Figure E7.
4 Bomb Tails
Suitable for use on wires. Two sizes available. An AMP
tool with handles coloured to match the bomb tail colour
crimps the tail onto the wire. This method may be used
as permanent insulation.
Components
Cable Connector, Plastic, Closed End.
2 2
Wire Sizes 0.25mm to 2.5mm , purple, AMP36964
Catalogue no. 54/119005
(use Hand Crimping Tool AMP 45216), or
Cable Connector, Closed End.
2 2
Wire Sizes 4mm to 6mm , yellow. AMP 34308
(use Hand Crimping Tool AMP 59239-4).
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Figure E7 Disconnection of Redundant Wires
Tools
TOOL, CRIMPING, HAND, AMP 45216 (purple
connector)
TOOL, CRIMPING, HAND, AMP 59239-4 (yellow
connector)
Method
1 a) Permanent insulation: Cut the wire end
away from any apparatus and strip the
wire by no more than 10mm.
b) Temporary insulation:
Strip the wire by no more than 10mm.
2 Choose a bomb tail and its matching tool.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
3 Insert the bomb tail in the tool.

4 Insert the wire in the bomb tail
5 Grip and squeeze the tool.
6 Ensure that the bomb tail and its insulation are
captive on the wire.
See section U014 for further details on use and
maintenance of crimping tools.
5 Squeeze on Sleeves
Suitable for wires fitted with BR 831 relay spades or
0BA/2BA ring connections, but should not remain in use
longer than 12 weeks.
Component
Full Tube, Silicon Rubber, Translucent.
6mm ID x 2mm Thick x 65mm Long. Truseal.
Catalogue no. 55/121902.
Method
1 Crimp the wire to a spade.
2 Squeeze the tube between fingers.
3 Insert spade until it is in the middle of the tube
and release the sleeve.
4 Ensure that the spade is captive by trying to pull
the spade out of the tube by its wire. (Grip the
tube at the open end away from the spade.)
6 Expandable Sleeves
Suitable for use on wires, cables, relay spades and flat
connectors by choosing the correct size sleeve, but
should not remain in use longer than 12 weeks. A tool is
needed to expand the sleeve before fitting.
The nominal internal diameter (N/D) and maximum
overall diameter (Max) are chosen to suit the wire or
connector to be insulated.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Components
Sleeve, Cable, Expandable, Black, Neoprene.
1.2, 1.5 or 2 N/D x
2.4, 3 or 4 Max Dia of Cable x 20 Std Length.
BS 3858 (Types 1&2). Hellerman H12, H15 or H20.
Catalogue nos. 54/063351, 54/063352, 54/063357.
Use Tool Prong Type 1(SS). or
3 N/D x
6 Max Dia of Cable x 25 Std Length.
BS 3858 (Types 1&2). Hellerman H30.
Catalogue no. 54/063358.
Use Tool Prong Type 2(S). or
5 or 7.5 N/D x
10 or 15 Max Dia of Cable x 25 Std Length.
BS 3858 (Types 1&2). Hellerman H50
Catalogue nos. 54/063359, 54/063360.
Use Tool Prong Type 3(K).
Tools
A tool for expanding the sleeves, and complete with
all prong types and lubricant is available as:
TOOL, SLEEVES, INTERCHANGEABLE PRONGS,
D KIT
A simpler tool with fixed prongs is available to suit
1.3 and 2.5mm sleeves only:
TOOL, SLEEVES, FIXED PRONGS 2.5 Max
Method
1 Choose a sleeve and tool to suit the wire's outer
diameter.
2 Cut the wire square and leave as a blunt end.
3 Fit the sleeve onto the prongs of the tool.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
4 Squeeze the handles of the tool.

5 Push the wire 3/4 of the way into the tube.
6 Release the handles of the tool and using your
other hand squeeze the end of the sleeve onto
the wire. Ease the tool out of the sleeve.
7 Ensure that the end of the wire is 3/4 of the way
into the tube.
8 Ensure that the sleeve is captive by pulling the
open end of the sleeve and the wire.
7 Finally
Always make a careful inspection of the wire/connector
after fixing the insulation. All bare metal must be well
covered, with the insulator undamaged and secure to the
wire. If there is the slightest doubt about the quality of
the insulation, cut the insulator off and insulate the wire
again.
After insulating the wires/connectors, make them secure
by fixing them away from the working equipment. Also
ensure they cannot become caught in moving parts. Use
wiring ties or insulation tape to secure the wires out of
the way.
Insulation tape must not be used as the principal
insulation, but may be used in addition to one of the
above methods if necessary for reinforcement or
security. Do not re-use insulation tape; discard any that
has been used once and subsequently removed.
Further Information
BS 3858 Specification for binding and identification
sleeves for use on electric cables and
wires
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Recovery of Redundant Assets
For treatment of redundant material and strategic

spares, see section W002.
1 Types of Recovery
In order to maintain the integrity of circuit principles,
circuits and relays made redundant by the abolition or
change of facilities will generally be shown to be
removed in full on circuit diagrams.
Spare terminals and fuses may be left in situ, providing
their existence is correctly shown on circuit diagram
layouts and analysis. Where cable cores become spare
as a result of circuit alterations, disconnection links at
intermediate locations and their associated jumpers shall
be left in situ (subject to circuit length limitations due to
induction).
The only permitted relaxation to this rule is for certain
specific temporary alterations (section D012):
i) stagework (section D014);
ii) at installations with a very limited life; and
iii) at installations with degraded or fragile wiring.
The proposed extent of recoveries shall be established
with the Area Signal Engineer, considering:
• the need to maintain the integrity of circuit
principles; and
• whether it is safe to disturb the existing wiring.
The recovery work shall then be categorised as follows:
a) retrospective work to be undertaken to recover
assets previously made redundant;
b) assets made redundant by the current alteration to
be recovered;
c) assets to be recovered at the next major alteration;
or
d) no recoveries to be undertaken until the installation
is renewed.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Categories (a) and (b) shall accord with permanent

design procedures and are not subject to the following
relaxation, but (c) and (d) are temporary expedients that
require justification by risk assessment (see section
D012 and GK/RT0039).
2 Relaxation
When the relaxation for temporary work given in section
D012 is applied to the recovery of redundant assets, the
following rules will have been considered in the design.
Work must only be undertaken in accordance with the
engineering details supplied (see section E051).
For non-conceptual design, see section D011.
2.1 General
All out of use equipment, fuses and links shall be
permanently labelled as such. A note to that effect
shall be provided on the design details.
2.2 Trackside Equipment

Generally, all equipment shall be recovered, but the
following special requirements apply:
a) Points. See section E054 for securing points out
of use.
b) Point mechanisms. Track equipment and tail
cables shall be recovered. Operating circuits
shall be isolated by the removal of fuses and
links in the adjacent apparatus housing.
c) Point detection (entire abolition of a set of
points). Detection circuits shall be isolated by
the removal of fuses and links in the adjacent
apparatus housing and false fed at the
interlocking.
d) Point detection (abolition of one end of a set of
multiple ended points). Detection circuit and
point end lettering shall be altered to the final
arrangement.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
e) Ground frames. Track equipment and tail

cables shall be recovered. Incoming and
outgoing circuits shall be isolated by the
removal of fuses and links in the adjacent
apparatus housing. If partially in use, the track
fittings shall be removed and levers fixed
normal.
f) Signals and AWS. Track equipment, tail cables
and disconnection boxes shall be recovered.
Incoming and outgoing circuits shall be isolated
by the removal of fuses and links in the
adjacent apparatus housing. If part of the signal
remains in use, the profile on the sighting form
shall be altered.
g) Route indicators. PLJIs and route indicators
shall be recovered. Redundant feeds to partially
operative route indicators shall be
disconnected. PLJIs shall be rearranged, if
necessary, for remaining routes.
h) Track circuits. Tail cables and disconnection
boxes shall be recovered. Bonding shall be
altered. Adjacent track circuits may require
adjusting. Remaining track circuits shall not be
altered, unless they can be rationalised by
abolishing TRs and combining TPRs at the
interlocking.
2.3 Lineside Locations

Generally, tail cables, fuses and links shall be
removed, but the internal wiring and equipment may
be left in situ. False feeding in locations shall only
be considered where no other solution is
reasonably practicable. In such cases, the false
feeds shall be crimped, wired and labelled to
permanent standards. Wherever possible, busbar
fuses shall be removed and dummy fuses inserted.
Main cables may be left in situ, in which case they
shall remain terminated with the links removed and
red dome nuts fitted.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
2.4 Signal Boxes And Interlockings

Work shall be undertaken as follows:
a) Lever frames. Levers and locking shall be left in
situ. Levers retained solely to maintain locking
and which have to be pulled to release other
levers shall be plated “Interlocking Lever”, or
otherwise according to existing regional
practice, subject to any risk assessment
required by GK/RT0039. Levers that are
temporarily fixed normal to maintain locking
shall be plated “Not in Use”. (Exceptionally, if a
lever needs to be fixed reverse this must be
agreed at scheme plan approval, or equivalent.)
Levers that are free of all locking shall be
painted all white and fixed levers (and those
worked to maintain locking) shall be painted top
half white, in accordance with GK/GN0525, or
otherwise according to existing regional
practice.
Redundant locks shall be recovered and
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
looping restored. Locking charts shall be
accurately updated.
b) Free wired interlocking. Wherever possible,
busbar fuses shall be removed and dummy
fuses inserted. Otherwise power shall be
removed from redundant parts of the circuitry by
disconnecting wires in accordance with section
E052. Out of use latched lock relays shall be
removed and their bases plugged and labelled
to prevent the insertion of a relay latched the
wrong way. Points free relays (WZR or
equivalent) are thus de-energised. Other
redundant relays shall be treated similarly. Any
false feeds or straps used to maintain working
circuits, including point detection, shall be
crimped, wired and labelled to permanent
standards. A controlled signal with only one
route remaining (and no conflicting routes) may
be considered for conversion to an automatic
signal.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
c) Geographical interlocking. To be similarly

treated, but by fitting dummy relays, or
reconfiguring straps, generally on plug-
couplers.
d) Solid State Interlocking. No relaxations are
permitted.
e) Signal box diagram. An overlay may be used for
a minor alteration, otherwise a new diagram
print shall be provided. Redundant track circuit
lamps shall be removed. Redundant points shall
be marked "C&P" qualified by “RHSC” (right
hand switch closed) or “LHSC” (left hand switch
closed), as appropriate.
f) Signal box block shelf. Redundant repeaters,
indicators and block instruments, etc., shall be
removed.
g) Control panel. An overlay may be used for a
minor alteration, otherwise permanent artwork
shall be provided. Redundant track circuit lamps
shall be removed. Redundant points shall be
marked "C&P" as above. Redundant push
buttons, switches and train describer displays
shall be removed, replaced with blank tiles and
strapped as necessary.
h) VDU control system. For a minor alteration, an
overlay shall be applied to the fixed diagram
(including the original point numbers, if these
still appear on the VDU). A technician's
inhibition shall be applied to the interlocking
(plus any disconnections required by the Rule
Book) and a reminder/inhibition indication
applied to the VDU. Where practicable, the hit
area shall be removed from the screen and the
points annotated "C&P" as above.
j) Train describers. These shall be altered to
reflect the actual situation as far as practicable.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
3 Partially Operational Equipment on Site

For warning notices to be displayed on site relating to
partially operational equipment, and other marking, see
section D014.
Further Information
GK/GN0525 Guidance Note: Signalling Control
Centres
GK/RT0039 Semaphore and Mechanical Signalling
Guidance
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Securing Points Out of Use
1 Provision of Facilities for Securing Points

All points shall include a means of manually securing
both open and closed point ends relative to their
respective stock rails or equivalent. The means of
securing the points shall be independent of the point
operating mechanism. It shall allow for:
• points temporarily secured (for example, to permit
single line working; when the point operating
mechanism has failed; for unsignalled movements);
• points secured out of use for extended periods (for
example, where the wear and damage on the
switch or stock rail exceeds permissible limits;
when not connected to a controlling signal box or
ground frame operation - see section 3).
A device (for example, a padlock) shall be provided to
prevent unauthorised removal of the means of securing
the points.
Where point clips are used to secure points, the points
shall be designed to permit the clips to be fitted as close
to the toe of the points as possible.
Where mechanical points are provided with a facing
point lock and the points are to be secured out of use for
extended periods, the locking mechanism shall be
secured in the locked position. (This also applies to
machines with external FPLs.)
1.1 Securing Switches

Switch securing blocks with padlocks shall be
provided to secure switches on concrete bearers.
It is permissible to provide switch securing blocks
with padlocks to secure switches on timber bearers.
Where these are not provided, scotches and point
clips with padlocks shall be provided as an
alternative and the following additional measures
shall be taken when the switches are to be secured
out of use for extended periods:
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
• closed switch rail to be further secured by a fish

plate screwed to the bearer by two screws or
fang bolts;
• open switch rail scotch to be screwed to the
bearer or otherwise secured.
RT60 designs with hollow steel bearers and roller
baseplates shall be secured with a padlocked clip
and lockable scotch.
1.2 Securing Switch Diamonds

Switch securing blocks with padlocks, or scotches
and point clips with padlocks, shall be provided to
secure switch diamonds.
Both half sets of the switch diamond shall be
secured.
1.3 Securing Swing Nose Crossings

Point clips or equivalent devices with padlocks shall
be provided to secure swing nose crossings.
The associated switches shall be secured together
with the swing nose crossing.
2 Connection of Points to a Controlling Signal Box

or Ground Frame
When points are installed, they shall be connected to the
controlling signal box or ground frame (and, where
applicable, detected in signals reading over them) as
soon as reasonably practicable after installation.
Redundant points shall be removed as soon as
reasonably practicable after they have been
disconnected from the controlling signal box or ground
frame (or the detection removed).
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
The interval between installation and connection or

disconnection and removal shall not usually exceed six
months. Where the interval between installation and
connection or disconnection and removal exceeds six
months, the reasons for the extended interval shall be
fully documented, together with details of the measures
taken to reduce any risks arising.
3 Securing Points Out Of Use when Not

Connected to a Controlling Signal Box or
Ground Frame
Switches, switch diamonds and swing nose crossings
which are in a running line (but which are not connected
to a signal box or ground frame because they are new
ones not yet connected, or redundant ones waiting to be
removed) must be secured in a safe position by scotch,
clip and padlock, or by fitting a switch securing block to
both the closed and open switch blades.
Switches and switch diamonds shall be secured out of
us, as described above, when their associated crossings
have been removed (plain lined).
Swing nose crossings shall be secured out of use, as
described above, when their associated switches have
been removed.
The track supervisor is responsible for making the points
safe in one of these ways, but S&T technicians must
ensure that the track supervisor is advised of the need to
do so. Technicians must not disconnect redundant
points unless they have been made safe in that manner.
If the points do not have a facing point lock, the fixings
provided by the track supervisor should make them
secure. There may, however, be special cases where
the S&T technician will be requested to fit the points with
a temporary facing point lock mechanism until they are
either brought into use or removed.
If the out of use point has supplementary drives, these
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
must remain connected.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
The signalling maintenance supervisor must be advised

of any out of use points that have been installed or
disconnected and which are fitted with signalling
equipment. This is so that they can ensure the
equipment is regularly checked and serviced.
If the out of use points are equipped with a facing point
lock, the S&T technician must make the lock effective,
as described in sections 3.1 to 3.4.
Note: Always replace any covers and padlocks to
prevent anyone tampering with the equipment.
3.1 Mechanical Points

Bolt the lock plunger to a bracket screwed to the
wooden sleeper or the plunger may be screwed
directly to the sleeper.
3.2 Clamp Locks

Secure the mechanism with a pin (to Figure E8)
inserted up through the hole at the closed tongue
end of the drive lock slide. The head of the pin will
need to be filed so that it fits flush with the end of
the clamp lock body. Fit and secure an RKB221
padlock through the hole in the top end of the pin.
Early versions of the clamp lock did not have
provision for securing the drive lock slide with a pin
and padlock. In such cases, the mechanism must
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
be secured by replacing the closed switch side
actuator with a special locking rod.
3.3 Point Machine

Rotate the machine by hand crank until the lock dog
is fully home. Disconnect and insulate the control
wires (if fitted) and remove the control circuit fuses.
3.4 HPSS
Proceed as follows:
1 Power operate the points to either the normal or
reverse position as required, ensuring that the
switches are fully moved.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
2 Disconnect all fuses and remove power supply.

3 Clip and scotch the points.
4 Check that point covers are secure and locked.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Figure E8 Clamp Locks: Mild Steel Pin for Securing

Out of Use

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
5 If the HPSS is secured out of use temporarily

prior to the testing and commissioning process,
it is recommended that the set up procedure
detailed in NR/GN/SIG/11400 is repeated prior
to handover to testing.
4 Use of Points when Not Connected to a

Controlling Signal Box or Ground Frame
Points which have been secured out of use because
they are not connected to the signal box or ground frame
operation shall remain at all times in the position in
which they are secured.
If, in exceptional circumstances, it is necessary for the
points to be used in the other position, a possession of
the line concerned shall be taken. Once the points have
been used, they shall be secured in their original position
before the possession is given up.
Further Information
GI/RT7004 Requirements for the Design, Operation
and Maintenance of Points
NR/GN/SIG/11400 HPSS Equipment Handbook
Guidance: Appendix P1
NR/GN/CIV/008 Model Clauses for Specifying Engineering
Works
NR/PS/SIG/2001 Requirement for Powered Point
Operating Equipment
RE/PW/759 Switch Securing Block (for Securing
Switches Out Of Use)
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
NR/GI/M001 Page: 1 of 3
Signalling Maintenance
1 Purpose of Maintenance
It should be clearly understand that the object of good
maintenance is to prevent failures by intelligent
anticipation rather than to wait until they happen.
Prevention is better than cure.
Network Rail requires its signalling equipment to be
maintained sufficiently to run train services safely,
reliably and economically. Signal Maintenance
Specifications in the NR/SMS series (or risk-based
maintenance work instructions, where authorised)
describe the minimum maintenance required. Each
SMS contains technical information and the tasks
required to maintain the equipment.
2 Failures
In case of failure of signalling apparatus, technicians
shall attend, deal with the apparatus and rectify failures
as quickly and as safely as possible.
The technician, on completion of the work, must
examine and test the apparatus to ensure that it is in
order. Where it is necessary to replace an item of
signalling equipment, or temporarily divert a circuit, it
must be independently tested, in accordance with the
Signalling Maintenance Testing Handbook (SMTH).
Any member of staff finding a defect or failure in
signalling apparatus, which is attributable to another
discipline, shall bring it to the attention of the person
concerned in accordance with local procedures.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Wrong Side Failures must be reported immediately to

the supervisor or signaller by the member of staff finding
it. If required, the supervisor must attend as quickly as
possible. An incident investigator, without disturbing the
fault, will attempt to find the cause of the failure using
part 5 (Failure and Incident Testing) of the SMTH. Any
defective apparatus is to be held at the investigator's
depot, suitably labelled, until it can be disposed of in
accordance with NR/SP/SIG/10013.
Every failure necessitating attendance (including
accidents and derailments) must be reported to the
supervisor. It is essential that full, but concise and
accurate, information is given.
Every effort must be made to find the cause of a failure
using part 5 of the SMTH. If no cause is found a special
investigation may be necessary.
3 Working on Operational Equipment

See section A017 for general requirements and section
B001 for work that can be carried out between trains.
Equipment shall be isolated before any work
commences that could affect the operation of the
equipment and only restored to service when working
correctly. Details are given in section B002.
4 Restoring to Service
The final operation after any maintenance activity shall
be a test by operation from the signalbox to observe that
the apparatus functions correctly.
See section B003 for special restoration requirements.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Further Information
NR/SP/SIG/10013 Investigation of Signalling Equipment and
Associated Trainborne Equipment
Specifications
NR/SP/SIG/10661 Signalling Maintenance Task Intervals
NR/SP/SIG/10662 Process for the Introduction of New or
Revised Maintenance Regimes for
Signalling Assets
Handbook
NR/SP/MTC/088 Responsibility for Maintenance of
Changed Assets
NR/GN/SIG/10099 Risk Based Maintenance –
Implementation Guidance
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Seasonal Precautions
1 Preparation for Winter

1.1 Mechanical Adjustments
Consideration should be given to the need for
adjustment to points, rodding, etc. prior to major
changes in the forecast temperature, i.e. during the
autumn.
Signal wires which can be regulated under the
signal box must be examined to ensure that they
are in correct adjustment for winter use.
It should also be ensured that both signal wires and
cross rods are kept clear of ballast which may
freeze.
1.2 Anti-frost Lubricants

To reduce the effects of freezing temperatures on
the correct operation of point equipment, an anti-
frost lubricant, similar to grease, such as “Kilfrost”,
should be applied to all external parts of mechanical
fittings, detector slides, FPL slides, signal wires,
pulley wheels, points, and cranks, etc.
The lubricant can be applied by brush or grease
gun as appropriate. To assist penetration of some
mechanisms, oil may be mixed with the grease to
reduce its viscosity. The anti-frost lubricant should
be applied in autumn. Repeat applications may be
necessary during the winter months according to
the operational environment, severity of the
prevailing conditions and dilution, if any, to assist
application.
The anti-frost lubricant can also be used to lubricate
other equipment / components associated with
mechanical signals, such as cranks and signal arm
spindles. It is not recommended for use on the
internal components of point machines or level
crossing barrier equipment which may require a
lighter grade of lubricant.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Petroleum jelly should be used on contact surfaces

on outside equipment, such as detectors, point
machines, etc. It must not be allowed to come into
contact with wire insulation.
See SMS part A06 for material ordering details.
The technician must ensure that any anti-frost
agents used by the track engineer do not affect the
correct functioning of track circuits and other
signalling equipment.
1.3 Terminals
All equipment terminals and terminal blocks in
lineside apparatus cases and ground equipment
(but not in heated equipment rooms) must be
cleaned and then protected against corrosion, by
application of an approved protecting agent (see
SMS part A06) with a soft non-conductive brush.
Protection should not be applied to lever locks and
controllers, nor to any contact faces.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
CAUTION: If using volatile cleaning solvents,

PVC gloves and eye protection
should be worn and the work carried
out in a well ventilated area. No
smoking is permitted and staff should
be familiar with the appropriate Safety
Data Sheet.
1.4 Heaters
The technician must ensure that all heaters in
ground equipment and apparatus cases are
operative from early October to the end of the winter
period, usually the end of April.
The base of apparatus cases should also be sealed
to prevent unwanted ingress.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
1.5 Gaskets
Gaskets of point machines, electrical detectors and
other ground equipment must be checked to ensure
they effectively sealed. All worn and damaged
gaskets must be replaced immediately to ensure
that water penetration will not cause a problem,
particularly if it freezes.
1.6 Drainage
Where drain holes are provided at the bottom of
point machines, electrical detectors, impedance
bonds and other ground equipment, they must be
frequently inspected and kept clear during the
winter months.
1.7 Cable and Overhead Lines

Depots should ensure that there are suitable
quantities of cable available in their cable stocks for
use in cases of emergency.
1.8 Electro-Pneumatic Installations

Air main pipe runs and reservoirs must be drained
regularly. If an undue amount of water is drained
from the system, the plant supervisor should be
advised.
1.9 Signal Post Telephones

Telephone cupboard door fastenings should be
inspected, to ensure the doors will remain in the
closed position, door gaskets should be renewed, or
doors replaced if an ineffective weather seal cannot
be maintained.
1.10 Stand-By Supplies

Where stand-by supplies are provided a check must
be carried out at regular intervals to ensure that
they are in good working order should they be
required.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
1.11 Motor Transport

Vehicles should be prepared for winter conditions
as necessary.
2 Preparation for Summer

2.1 Mechanical Adjustments
Consideration should similarly be given to the need
for the regulation of signal wires and adjustment to
points, rodding, etc. during the spring, before
summer temperatures set in.
2.2 Heaters
During the summer (April to September) apparatus
case heating must be switched off. (Heat is the
main cause of cable degradation.)
However, it should only be switched off if it can be
guaranteed to be switched back on before October.
2.3 Foliage
Lineside foliage must be kept under control to
ensure adequate visibility of the lineside signs and
signals. This is especially important during the
summer months when trees and bushes are in full
leaf. Where visibility of signs and /or signals is
obstructed by lineside foliage, the civil engineering
supervisor must be informed so that suitable
remedial action can be arranged.
Roadside foliage at level crossings must similarly
be kept under control to ensure adequate visibility
of the crossing.
3 Preparation for Autumn

Seasonal TCAIDs should be prepared and batteries
renewed, as described in SMS part TC91, before the
start of leaf fall season.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
4 Hour Changes
Remember that level crossing timer clocks must be reset
during the spring and autumn to correspond with the
British Standard Time and Greenwich Mean Time
adjustment made at the beginning and end of the
summer months. Preferably the adjustment should be
carried out on the night of the time change so that the
crossing continues to comply with the Level Crossing
Order. Where this may not be practicable, due to the
number of crossings to be attended, every effort should
be made to complete the time change within one week
(either side) of the national time adjustment.
Further Information
Specifications
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
NR/GI/P001 Page: 1 of 6
Painting of Signalling Equipment
1 Painting Frequencies
Signal structures and trackside apparatus cases due to
their exposed locations are the items that will require re-
painting most often. A guide to the frequency of re-
painting is as follows:
• Items in coastal areas, every two years
• Items in industrial areas, every five years
• Items in other areas, every ten years
These frequencies are a guide only; they do not overrule
any local instructions.
2 Paint Application
NR/SP/CIV/039 and NR/GN/CIV/002 give detailed
instruction on surface preparation and application, the
basic rules are as follows:
• Surfaces to which the paint will be applied must be
sound and free of rust, old paint which is flaking or
other contaminates (e.g. oil or grease). Surfaces
can be rubbed down with wire wool or glass paper,
contaminates can be removed by an appropriate
de-greasing cleaner
• Bare metal (or wood) must first be primed, and then
an undercoat applied before the topcoat is applied.
CAUTION: Before any painting work is undertaken,
hazard instructions supplied with the paint
and other applicable materials shall be first
read and understood. In case of doubt, the
supervisor should be consulted before
proceeding. Appropriate PPE must be worn
when painting (e.g. gloves, face mask).
Paint that has been applied before 1970 may
contain high amount of lead and other
materials that could be hazardous to heath.
If there is doubt about any old paint the
supervisor should be consulted before
removing it.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
3 Colours
Equipment should generally be painted to Network Rail's
requirements, as stated in NR/GN/CIV/002, GK/RT0031
and GK/GN0525. Where colours are not specified,
equipment shall be painted to a scheme consistent with
the existing equipment. Preferred top coat colours are
listed in section 4. This guide does not supersede any
instructions in the above documents.
Some former regions may have different colours for
certain types of older equipment; in this case, both
options are shown. If there is any doubt as to the correct
colour, the supervisor should be consulted.
4 Maintenance Painting – Top Coat Colours
Mechanical Signal Boxes

--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Levers GK/GN0525 applies

Quadrants Black finishing paint
Black finishing paint
Gate Wheels
Brown finishing paint
Single Line Tokens
Red finishing paint
Configuration code A
Single Line Tokens
Blue finishing paint
Configuration code B
Single Line Tokens
Green finishing paint
Configuration code C
Single Line Tokens
Yellow finishing paint
Configuration code D
Locking frame ironwork
Silver or grey
Locks and controller covers
Signal Structures
Silver or Grey and Black OR
Post Silver or Grey and White
(semaphore signals)
Brackets and Gantries Black (see section below)

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Silver or Grey OR
Handrails etc
Black
Fixtures and Fittings
Black
Number Plate Backgrounds
Signals
CLS Heads: Front Matt Black (see section below)
CLS Heads: Rear Silver or Grey
(see section below)
Semaphore Arms (wood) GK/RT0031 applies
Semaphore Arms (enamel) Do Not Paint
Trackside and Track-Mounted Equipment

Ramps or Cover Plates
Silver or Grey
Point Machine Covers
Trackside Apparatus Cases and Disconnection Boxes

Silver or Grey OR
Steel or Wood
Silver
Level Crossing Mechanical Gates

Gate Columns Black
Gates, Fittings and Fencing White finishing paint
Target Boards GK/RT0031 applies
Enamel Target Boards Do not paint
Level Crossing Lifting Barriers

Barrier Cages and Units Grey finishing paint
Barrier Booms, Edge Facing Alternate Red and White
Road (all types) Vertical Bands 61cm (24”) in
length, Red tip
Barrier Booms, Edge Facing White
Track (all types)
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Barrier Skirting (all types, both Red and White to Follow

sides) Bands on Boom OR
White
Note: Reflective and Retro-Reflective surfaces must
NOT be painted.
Level Crossing Road Lights
Road Lights, Hoods and Matt Black
Backboards (front & Rear)
Road Light Posts and Caps Grey finishing paint
Note: Reflective and Retro-Reflective boarders must
NOT be painted.
5 Painting of Colour Light Signals

A colour light signal head, including allied route and
junction indicators and subsidiary position light signals,
shall have the front surfaces (as seen by approaching
drivers on the line to which the signal applies) painted
matt black.
The remainder of the signal head and structure shall be
silver or grey, as shown in Figure P1.
Other parts of the signal:
• Silver or grey - signal posts, vertical supports of
brackets and gantries, ladders, rear of number
plates.
• Blue - the surround or back board of a SPAD
indicator.
• Matt black - remainder of brackets and gantries,
railings, safety hoops, signal bases, signal hoods.
Position light ground signals and any other form of signal
(such as driver’s crossing indicators and points
indicators, etc.) shall be treated in a similar fashion.
Silicone Alkyd Finishing Paint (Catalogue item: Paint
Silver 5 Ltr Container) may be used.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Newly galvanised surfaces are a satisfactory silver/grey

colour, and shall not be painted unless necessary for
other reasons, and only then after the surface has been
suitably weathered or specially treated to ensure
satisfactory adhesion of the paint coatings.
Further Information
GK/RT0031 Lineside Signals And Indicators
GK/GN0525 Guidance Note: Signalling Control
Centres
NR/SP/CIV/039 Specification R.T.98 - Protective
Treatments for Railtrack Infrastructure
NR/GN/CIV/002 Application and Reapplication of
Protective Treatment to Railtrack
Infrastructure
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Typical Surface Colours of Signal Heads and Structures

Date: April 2006

Page: 6 of 6
Issue: 02
END
NR/GI/P001
Figure P1
Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Labelling Internal Equipment
This section covers equipment within buildings and

location cases.
An all purpose labelling kit is available which includes
the necessary equipment to produce labels as described
below:
1 Label Colour
Equipment at less than 175V white with black lettering.
Equipment at 175V or more white with red lettering.
All internal equipment and terminations carrying 175V or
higher must be labelled with a “Caution, risk of electric
shock” 25mm safety sign, as described in section P015.
A legend should be added, stating the maximum voltage
present if exceeding 250V.
2 Label Material
The approved system uses high quality pressure
sensitive adhesive plastic labels produced with an
electronic labelling system such as the Kroy 210 or
Brother PT2000. Mechanically punched (“Dymo” type)
labels shall not be used.
3 Lettering Size
This must be chosen to suit the label size and position,
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
to make the label easily legible. The preferred lettering

height is at least 5mm and normally the double height
setting should be used on the electronic labelling
systems referred to above. Slightly less than 5mm is
allowable provided a clear type style (such as Rhetoric
10) is used. The overriding requirement is legibility.
4 Label Position
Where possible, a label should be fixed to the racking
closely adjacent to the equipment to which it refers.
Labels may be fixed directly to equipment only if it rarely
changes.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
As far as possible, position the labels to be obvious to a

person of average height.
Labels must be placed on the front and back of
equipment where this will assist installation, testing or
maintenance.
In new installations, fix the front and back labels for plug-
in relays below the relay to which they refer. The
preferred method is to mount the labels on 25mm x
25mm plastic angle strip fixed to the betaduct with
plastic headed bolts and dome headed nuts. In existing
installations, follow the previous labelling arrangement to
avoid a confusing mixture of standards.
Labels for double relays (two relays in one case), should
be made up or fixed so that the two relay names are one
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
below the other. The upper name should be the left hand
relay as viewed when reading the label.
If equipment carrying a label does have to be changed,
make sure that the label is also changed or a new one
fitted. Remove all redundant or superseded labels.
5 Fixing the Labels

Provided the surface is clean and free from grease, the
pressure sensitive adhesive on the labels prepared by
the approved electronic system will satisfactorily adhere
to most smooth surfaces including stainless steel. If the
surface is insufficiently smooth or large, a rigid white self
adhesive backing label is available and this may be
secured to the equipment or racking first and the
descriptive label then attached to the white one.
In exceptional cases, non-standard labels may be
required to suit special equipment or match an existing
arrangement. Choose a method of fixing to suit the type
of label and the surface to which it is to be fixed.
Examples are:
• A high quality permanent adhesive (e.g. Araldite).
• A good quality double sided adhesive tape.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
• Bolts, nuts or “pop” rivets - where suitable fixing

brackets and holes are provided.
If adhesives are used, make sure the surfaces are clean
and grease free before applying the label. Where
adhesion is difficult, for example on some stainless steel
or aluminium, special rails or supports for the labels may
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
be needed.
Pressure sensitive adhesives are not generally suitable
for surfaces that will become warm. Check with the
manufacturer’s instructions before using in these
situations.
Adhesives are only effective if used on firm surfaces. Do
not stick labels to flaking paint.
Certain types of equipment will have their own in-built
labelling system where special types or positions of label
will be necessary. Follow the in-built system where it is
sensible to do so.
Further Information
GK/RT0009 Identification Of Signalling And Related
Equipment
END

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Service Labelling
All service labelling for an item of equipment shall be:

• easily legible;
• permanent;
• securely fixed;
• suitably durable for its intended application
environment.
1 Minimum Requirements
As a minimum, all serviced signalling equipment shall
either be labelled with the original equipment
manufacturer's (OEM’s) original label plus a servicing
label or where the OEM labelling is missing, a
replacement label. Servicing labels shall identify:
• the serviced date;
• the initials or recognised mark of the Servicing
Agent identifiable to service centre level.
2 Illegible or Missing Labels

Where an item of equipment has a label which is either
illegible or missing the Servicing Agent will generate a
new label with details consistent with the OEM label for
that type of equipment.
3 OEM and Replacement Labelling

Where a failure occurs to an item of signalling equipment
and that type of failure is peculiar to a particular
manufacturer, it is sometimes necessary to recall that
equipment for modification/servicing. It is therefore
important that where equipment is re-labelled OEM
identification is maintained.
It is appreciated that often when equipment is received
for servicing the original labelling can be missing or
illegible in which case it would be improper for it to be
retained.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Service Labelling
However on a number of occasions technical

investigations of failed signalling equipment have
revealed the Servicing Agent has routinely replaced
OEM labelling. This is often unnecessary and sometimes
the replacement label has not incorporated fully the
OEM’s manufacturing data.
Where it becomes necessary to renew the casing of an
item of equipment, the Servicing Agent shall ensure that
the original labelling details are recorded so that they
may be transferred onto the new label on the
replacement casing.
Care shall be taken when re-labelling relays to ensure
that relay types scheduled for withdrawal/destruction are
not released into service.
CAUTION: Specific relays are identified in
NR/SP/SIG/11129 as to be destroyed when
removed from service. It is vitally important
that these particular relays are not serviced
and subsequently released back into
service. Also, all components from these
relays shall normally be destroyed and not
used to service other relays, unless
specifically authorised.
4 Small Items
Servicing Agents shall endeavour to label all equipment
in accordance with this standard however for small items
this may not be practical where space is limited. To cater
for this it will be permissible for the Servicing Agents to
identify the servicing date using the date coding system
defined in this standard.
Note: Identification methods such as coloured dots
shall be avoided.
5 Colour-Coded Equipment
Certain equipment, e.g. hydraulic rams, uses a system of
colour-coding to aid identification. Where such items are
serviced, it is important that the applicable colour-coding
is maintained.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Service Labelling
6 Mechanical Signalling Equipment

Wherever practicable mechanical equipment will have
the Servicing Agent’s name, initials or recognised mark
stamped or cast upon it. Where an item of equipment or
a component has been subject to a modification, it shall
stamped with coded lettering, as defined in this
standard, which when translated will enable traceability
of that item in terms of month and year of servicing.
Wherever practical, modification states for a particular
item of equipment will be identified by means of coded
lettering as defined in this standard.
7 Label Positioning
Labels shall be positioned on the equipment so that they
are readable when the equipment concerned is
operating in its intended environment. When new labels
are applied, the label’s size shall be consistent with its
original label. For visual indicators, labels shall not be
positioned anywhere on the indication face. New labels
shall not obscure the operation of an equipment’s
function, e.g. a label placed on the side of a relay
making it difficult see the operation of the relay.
8 Serviced Date Coding

Where it is impractical to label an item of equipment
because either the item is too small or it is a mechanical
component, it shall be permissible to use a 3-digit
alphanumeric date code comprising three characters,
where the first letter identifies the month and the second
and third characters identify the year. The letters and
numbers shall run sequentially and examples of this
coding are given below:
A03 January 2003
C05 March 2005
L05 December 2005
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Service Labelling
It is not intended that this be applied where an existing

form of date coding is already used, therefore for
practical purposes and to maintain consistency, items
that already use an alternative method of date coding, as
recognised by the maintainer, shall continue to use that
method.
9 Traceability
All serviced equipment shall be marked with:
i) the date or date code that identifies when an item of
equipment was last serviced;
ii) the Servicing Agent’s name or recognised mark.
Servicing Agents will ensure that traceability of the
service history for an item of equipment is achievable via
the serial number and servicing date. The service history
for an item will include as a minimum:
a) the servicing processes applied;
b) applicable production batch;
c) where an item of equipment has been subject to
any modification, the specific modification state
shall be traceable via the servicing date. Other
means of modification identification state may also
be used where they have been previously applied;
d) details of any special modification or servicing
procedures to be carried out as a result of
corrective actions defined in SIGWENs or other
servicing instructions.
10 Sealing
Where required, security seals shall be fitted to serviced
equipment and marked with the applicable Servicing
Agent’s identification mark.
Monograms or other designs used for this purpose shall
be registered with Network Rail headquarters. They shall
also enable traceability to service centre level where a
Servicing Agent has multiple service centres.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Service Labelling
Further Information
GK/RT0009 Identification Of Signalling And Related
Equipment
NR/GN/SIG/19265 Labelling of Signalling Equipment
NR/SP/SIG/11129 Life Management of Signalling Relays
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Labelling Telephones
1 Introduction
Operational telephones have many functions, including:
• General Extension Trunk Dialling (ETD) telephone.
• Emergency ETD telephone.
• Direct line to Signal Box.
• Local Private Automatic Exchange (PAX) with no
emergency access.
• Electrification telephone.
• Level Crossing telephone.
• Signal Post Telephone (SPT).
• Control or local direct line telephones.
Labelling on telephones may be required to:
• Draw attention to the telephone’s presence.
• Indicate for whose use it is intended.
• Indicate the telephone’s name or number.
• Describe the telephone’s location.
• Tell the user how to operate it.
Some of the above may be in-built to the telephone (e.g.
“Press”), or unnecessary (e.g. if for everyone’s use).
Telephones for public use require more precise
information than those only used by railway staff.
Operational lineside telephones (including signal post)
usually show the National Grid Reference to aid
descriptions to emergency services.
2 General
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Telephones must be correctly labelled by the time they

come into operational use.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Labelling Telephones
Telephones which are out of use or await commissioning

must be covered or adequately labelled to indicate that
they are not to be used. If the public have access to
such telephones (e.g. at level crossings) they must be
completely and securely screened from sight to avoid
confusion in an emergency.
3 Labelling
Identification signs for operational telephones are
illustrated in GI/RT7033. Other safety requirements for
signing and labelling are given in GE/RT8048 and
NR/SP/TEL/30032.
Details of the correct labels for different types of
telephone are available from the telecoms service
provider.
Further Information
GE/RT8048 Positioning and Labelling of Lineside
Telephones
GI/RT7033 Lineside Operational Safety Signs
NR/SP/TEL/30032 Positioning and Labelling of Lineside
Telephones
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Safety Signs for S&T Installations
1 Introduction
Safety signs are there for information and protection.
They should never be altered or removed without the
authority of a supervisor.
2 Regulations
The Health and Safety (Safety Signs and Signals)
Regulations require employers to use a safety sign
where there is a significant risk to health and safety that
has not been avoided or controlled by the methods
required under other relevant law, provided use of a sign
can help reduce the risk. Safety signs are not a
substitute for those other methods of controlling risks,
such as engineering controls and safe systems of work.
The Regulations apply to all workplaces and to all
activities where people are employed. The Regulations
also require, where necessary, the use of road traffic
signs in workplaces to regulate road traffic.
3 Fitting of Signs
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Signs conforming with the Regulations must be provided
as shown on the engineering diagrams supplied for the
work. Typical applications to S&T installations are
shown in Figures P2 to P5.
All signs should be of the self-adhesive type (sizes
25mm, 100mm or 150mm), with the exception of the
larger workshop signs (300mm or 600mm) which may be
of plastic laminate construction.
When applying self-adhesive signs the surface must be
dry, smooth, and free from oil, grease, corrosion or dry
powdery deposits. The surface should be abraded to a
smooth finish and cleaned using a cleaning pad, or
abrasive powder, and a detergent solution. The surface
should then be wiped dry with a clean cloth. The sign
o
should be applied at a temperature above 10 C by
removing the backing paper, positioning carefully and
then, from the centre working outwards, pressing down.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
External safety signs for apparatus cases are to be fitted

on the normal approach side door.
The maintenance of safety signs is to be undertaken
during normal maintenance routines.
Further Information
GI/RT7033 Lineside Operational Safety Signs
L64 Safety Signs and Signals. Guidance on
regulations (HSE Books)
S.I.1996/341 Health and Safety (Safety Signs and
Signals) Regulations 1996
BS 5499-5 Fire safety signs, notices and graphic
symbols. Signs with specific safety
meanings
BS 8501 Graphical symbols and signs. Public
information symbols
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
BS 8502 Graphical symbols and signs. Creation

and design of public information symbols.
Requirements

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
100mm size:
Applied to the outside of all doors of
equipment rooms.
100mm size:
Applied to the outside doors of
equipment rooms, battery rooms
and apparatus cases containing
secondary cells
(alternative to “No smoking” sign).

equipment rooms and apparatus
cases containing susceptible
electronic equipment.
See section E003.
See NR/SP/OHS/069 for “No safe

access” sign.
See NR/SP/ELP/21131 for signs on
electrified lines.
Figure P2 Prohibitory Signs and their Application
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Applied to location heaters and

resistors, etc.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
25mm size:
Applied to equipment (incl. test
equipment), terminations, covers
and enclosures associated with a
potential of 175V or over (with a
statement of the maximum voltage
present, if exceeding 250V).
100mm size:
power supply rooms, cubicles &
locations.
See also NR/GN/SIG/11600
(see NR/SP/ELP/21131 for signs on
electrified lines).
Applied to other hazards, such as
the presence of PCBs:
Figure P3 Warning Signs and their Application

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
To identify the location of first aid

facilities.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
See GI/RT7033.
Figure P4 First Aid Signs and their Application
100mm size:
battery rooms and apparatus cases
containing secondary cells.
Applied to chain saw and disc

cutting machinery, etc.
Applied to lead work apparatus.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006

Temporary sign applied on
construction sites where risk of
falling objects.


--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
100mm size:
battery rooms and apparatus cases
containing secondary cells.
Figure P5 Mandatory Signs and their Application
END

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
NR/GI/T001 Page: 1 of 1
Testing -General
1 General
When testing the operation of signalling apparatus the
technician must observe the provisions of the Rule Book,
module T1A, and must have a clear understanding with
the signaller as to the nature of the work involved.
After repairs or alterations to signalling apparatus the
equipment must be tested. Testing must be in
accordance with either the Signalling Maintenance
Testing Handbook or Signalling Works Testing
Handbook. Assurance that signalling apparatus is in
order must not be given to the signaller until it has been
tested and found correct.
2 Signalling Works Testing Handbook

Signalling Works Testing Handbook (SWTH) procedures
must be used for all signalling works that have been
carried out to new or amended signalling design
drawings or control tables.
3 Signalling Maintenance Testing Handbook

The Signalling Maintenance Testing Handbook (SMTH)
procedures only apply to testing after the like for like
replacement of equipment, the temporary diversion of
circuits and the replacement of missing equipment.
Further Information
Handbook
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
NR/GI/U001 Page: 1 of 1
Tools, Measuring Instruments and Calibration
1 Correct Equipment
Only the correct tools, gauges, test equipment etc., must
be used for the work. Tools must be well cared for and
all measuring instruments carefully handled and
maintained in good condition.
See SMS part A05 for approved maintenance tools.
A detailed list of test instruments can be found via the
supervisor.
For competency requirements, see section A012.
2 Calibration
When using a test or a measuring instrument (gauge,
meter, insulation tester and so on), it must be ensured
that the instrument has been calibrated to be accurate, is
within date and is fit for purpose.
A valid calibration certificate is required before using a
measuring instrument to record test results. Instruments
must be returned to the service/calibration centre for re-
calibration at the specified intervals, or whenever there is
any reason to suspect the accuracy of the readings.
If an instrument is not calibrated (labelled on the
instrument), the seal is broken or the instrument is faulty,
the test will not be valid. Where there is any doubt about
a meter or test instrument, the supervisor must be
consulted before use.
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Inspection and Safety of Tools, Plant
and Protective Equipment
1 Live Working
All tools used for voltages in excess of 175 volts or
where the current capacity exceeds 25 amps must be
approved for the task (see SMS part A05).
Rubber gloves, mats and shields shall undergo an
insulation test to 1000V. (Gloves must be examined
before use to ensure that they have been tested within
the previous 12 months.)
2 Percussion Tools
On each occasion before use every punch, chisel and
hammer must be inspected for signs of damage.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Damage or defective items must not be used (see
section U006). Only the correct type of punch or chisel
shall be used.
Eye, ear and hand protection must always be used.
3 Powered Plant
Typically includes:
• Bonding machine,
• Drilling machine,
• Disc cutters,
• Angle grinders,
• Chain saws,
• Cartridge propelled stud fixing,
• Hot work processes.
All equipment must be uniquely numbered and
registered for ownership and maintenance purposes. It
shall be maintained in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Welding, flame cutting, burning or cleaning equipment

must be inspected before use and serviced every three
months. See section W004 for hazards with lead and
cadmium.
Only trained operators with an appropriate powered plant
proficiency certificate may use this equipment. The use
of powered plant requires a safe system of work to be
defined and implemented. Hazards from burns, fire,
explosion, eye damage, hose rupture, manual handling,
flying objects and noise must be addressed, as
applicable. Care must be taken not to expose other staff
and members of the public to danger.
Head, eye, ear, foot and hand protection must be used
as appropriate.
This plant is subject to statutory reporting procedures in
the event of an accident or dangerous occurrence.
4 Ladders
Every portable ladder and pair of steps must have a next
test date marked on them, after which they shall not be
used. Ladders must be inspected at least 6 monthly.
See section W005 for working at height.
5 Protective Equipment for Working at Height

Safety belts and harnesses must be used if there is a
risk of falling, e.g. from signal posts (section W005).
On each occasion before using any such protective
equipment, the user must make a visual inspection to
see that it is in a safe and serviceable condition. Not
less often than annually all the equipment must be
examined by the user's supervisor and withdrawn from
service if found to be damaged. If any safety harness,
belt, lanyard or industrial line has been used to arrest a
fall it must be withdrawn from use for examination and
possible disposal.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
6 Loose Lifting Tackle

Loose lifting tackle shall be marked with a unique
identification number and Safe Working Load, which
must not be exceeded. Swivels and shackles, etc. must
be kept clean and oiled at all times. Ropes and slings
must be kept in a cool, dry and well ventilated
environment. The use of loose lifting tackle requires a
safe system of work to be defined and implemented.
All ropes and slings must be thoroughly examined at
least three-monthly. Other loose lifting tackle must be
inspected at least 6 monthly.
7 Inspection
The equipment in sections 1 to 6 must be formally
inspected and maintained and shall be identified by an
inspection label. An inventory shall be kept. The tools
shall be inspected at least annually (unless otherwise
stated above) by the supervisor responsible for them and
a record kept of the inspection.
Staff must check that the equipment is within the
serviceable date before use. Defective tools and
equipment must be returned to the issuing point and
must not be used. Arrangements should be made for
their prompt replacement.
Further Information
S.I.1998/2306 Provision and Use of Work Equipment
Regulations 1998
(see S.I. 2002/2174 amendments)
L22 Safe use of work equipment. ACoP
(HSE Books)
indg229 Using Work Equipment Safely
(HSE leaflet)
GM/RT1040 Safe Working On or Near Electrical
Equipment
GM/RT1403 Use of Plant and Work Equipment
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Fixings: Nuts, Bolts, Screws, Washers, etc.
1 Types
Examples of various patterns and types of nuts, bolts,
screws and washers are shown in Figures U1 to U5.
They also come in different materials, and may be plated
to avoid corrosion.
Use the specified type, material, and plating.
2 Threads
Modern practice calls for the use of Metric threads.
Several others are still in use. Examples include:
• Whitworth (Whit)
• Unified Fine or Coarse (UNF or UNC)
• British Association (BA).
Spanners for most Metric and Unified thread nuts and
bolts are sized by their “across the flats” (A/F)
dimension, and this will be shown on the spanner. A
Metric size is given as a number of millimetres relating to
the body of the bolt (e.g. 15mm) and a Unified thread as
a number, or fraction, of inches across the flats (e.g.
5/8).
Whitworth spanners are marked with their size as a
number, or fraction, of inches followed by “W” (e.g. 3/4
W).
BA spanners are marked with a number. Sizes “0” and
“2” are often used for cable and link terminals, but
smaller sizes (e.g. “4” and “6”) may be found on older
electrical and electronic equipment.
Note: The 0BA nut used in signalling is actually larger
than the standard one.
Make sure that the nuts and bolts you are using match
each other. If in doubt, try screwing them together gently
by hand before using tools.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Figure U1 Bolts and Nuts
3 Tools
Use only tools of the correct type and size. A spanner
that only loosely fits is not good enough, and will
damage the flats of the nut.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Ensure that fixings are tight, but not overtight. If a torque

is specified, then use a torque wrench. (See section
U005.)
Do not use pliers for tightening nuts, as this damages
any protective plating on the nut.
Box or ring spanners are preferable to open ended ones.
If possible, rotate the nut and keep the screw or bolt
fixed, rather than the other way round.
When a single nut is used, at least two turns of screw
thread must project through the nut.
4 Washers
Various types of washers are shown in Figure U3.
Flat washers are used to protect surfaces, wires and
tags from damage.
Washers also improve electrical contact.
See section 5 for information on locking washers.
5 Locking Methods
5.1 Locking Nuts
Refer to Figure U2. Locking nuts have inserts of
plastic or metal, or are specially shaped, to give a
high friction between thread surfaces.
Use only the specified type of nut. The bolt thread
must project at least one full turn through the
locking nut.
Locking nuts shall not be used more than once. If
an all metal type nut has been removed, the bolt
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
shall be inspected before fitting a new locking nut.
Bolts showing signs of damage shall not be re-
used.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Note: Alternative arrangement with split pin rotated through

90o is permissible.
Figure U2 Self Locking and Slotted Nuts
5.2 Lock Nuts

After one nut has been screwed down fully tight, a
second nut may be tightened against it. The second
nut is known as a lock nut. Where one nut is thicker
than the other, unless otherwise specified the
thinner nut should be the lock nut on the outside.
The arrangement with Hardlock nuts is different
(see section U004).
Lock nuts must be tightened to the correct torque.
See the appropriate SMS, such as PF01.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
5.3 Lock Washers

Refer to Figure U3. There are three basic types of
lock washer:
• Crinkle (or wavy) washers
• Grover (or spring) washers
• Tab washers.
The first two of these increase the friction between
threads. In vital situations they shall not be re-used.
When tightening down make sure that the lock
washer is fully compressed, but do not overtighten.
Washers with tabs are also used to prevent nuts
turning. The nut is tightened down. Then the washer
tab is bent over one of the nut flats and an edge of
the fitting. Do not re-use tab washers.
Shakeproof washers have internal or external teeth.
They are sometimes used for ensuring electrical
contact on painted or aluminium surfaces in non-
vital situations. Because they do damage to the
surfaces either side of them, they shall only be used
where specified.
5.4 Slotted (or Castellated) Nut and Split Pin

Refer to Figure U2 for an example of a slotted nut.
Make sure that the pin will sit adequately into the
slot.
Use the specified diameter and length pin. It shall
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
be a free (but not slack) fit in the hole and shall not
be excessively long.
For outside use, grease the pin before insertion.
This will allow easy extraction when necessary.
After insertion, open up both legs of the split pin.
5.5 Locking Compounds

These are special adhesives applied to the screw
thread before assembly. An example is Torqueseal.
Use locking compounds only where specified.
Follow the instructions precisely as to how much to
use and where to apply it.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Figure U3 Washers
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Figure U4 Screws
6 Split Pins
Split pins in all signalling apparatus must always be
properly opened out so that they are tight and cannot be
moved from end to end.
If withdrawn they must not generally be reused. An
exception applies in the case of locking frames and other
equipment where it is difficult to obtain replacement split
pins, in which case only broken pins need be replaced.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
When split pins are used as a retaining device for crank

or similar pins (as at connections between cranks and
rodding), the split pin shall be greased before passing it
through the hole in the end of the pin and then the legs
of the split pin shall be opened equally to make an angle
of between 60 and 90 degrees.
7 Fixing to Hollow Surfaces

When fixing to hollow surfaces, special fixing methods
are available (See Figure U5). Shown are examples of a
spring toggle and a collapsible anchor.
They are available in bolt sizes from 3 to 6mm, and in
different lengths to suit the wall thickness.
It is usually better to use the hollow wall fixing device to
secure to the wall a batten or rail which will then carry
what needs to be fixed.
Always make sure that the wall to which the fixing is
secured can withstand the weight or pull of the fixture.
Plasterboard is not a very strong material and will only
support a light weight.
Beware of hidden cables and pipes when drilling into
hollow surfaces. Hand held detectors can be obtained to
help seek out any unknown metalwork, cables, or
partition studding.
Relocatable Equipment Buildings are designed with
special inserts to carry fixings for standard equipment
rails. Refer to the building drawings for details.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Figure U5 Cavity (Hollow Surface)

and Concrete Fixings
8 Fixing to Concrete
Ideally, fixings shall be built in at the production stage of
the concrete. This is done for most standard fixings to
concrete sleepers.
Concrete bases for signalling equipment shall have rag
bolts set into the correct positions at the concrete
pouring stage.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
When existing concrete needs to have fixings added,

two common types are illustrated in Figure U5.
The masonry anchor (commonly known as a Rawlbolt) is
used for heavier fixings. The concrete is drilled with the
correct size hole (sometimes marked on the anchor
itself) and the anchor inserted. Tightening the bolt
secures the anchor in the concrete. Manufacturer’s
literature will give the required tightening torque and
maximum load for each size of anchor.
The hammer screw is for light fixings (e.g. cable clips on
concrete sleepers).
After drilling the correct size hole, the insert is placed in
it. The screw part of the fixing is then hammered in to fix
down the cable clip. The screw can only be removed
with a screwdriver.
When drilling concrete, the positions of any reinforcing
wires or bars must be known so that they can be
avoided. Never attempt to drill pre-stressed concrete.
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

NR/L3/SIG/10064 General Instructions to Staff Working on S&T Equipment
NR/GI/U004
Hardlock Nuts
Issue No. 03
Issue Date: 05/06/10
Compliance Date: 04/09/10
1. Hardlock Nuts Fitted to Point System Stretcher Bars

For Hardlock nuts fitted to fixed stretcher bars on point systems, the information in
NR/L3/TRK/1202 (S+C systems - Flat bottom full depth switches - Management of
fixed stretcher bar assemblies, lock stretcher bars fastenings and the associated
defects) shall be followed.
For Hardlock nuts fitted to adjustable stretcher bars on non HPSA point systems, the
information in NR/L3/SIG/10179 (The Set Up and Maintenance of Adjustable
Stretcher) shall be followed.
2. Hardlock Nuts not fitted to Point System Stretcher Bars

Caution: This information is for hardlock nuts that are NOT used on point
system stretcher bars, for details of the use of these nuts on
stretcher bars see section 1.
It has been found that concave Hardlock nuts are being tightened to normal torque
values for standard nuts causing the threads to strip during installation and
maintenance. This instruction specifies the torque values that should be applied for
the different sizes of outer (female/ concave) hard-lock nuts for all points and point
fittings as shown below:
Hard
Torque Value for Outer
Lock
Nut (Lock Nut) Nm
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Nuts
M6 4 to 5
M8 9 to13
M10 18 to 24
M12 27 to 39
M16 70 to100
M20 120 to 200
M30 270 to 440
1¼” 270 to 440
Note: M30 is yellow finish for adjustable bar only. All other Hardlock nuts
are Zinc Plated Finish.
Page 1 of 2
NR/L3/SIG/10064 General Instructions to Staff Working on S&T Equipment
NR/GI/U004
Hardlock Nuts
Issue No. 03
Issue Date: 05/06/10
Compliance Date: 04/09/10
Figure 01: the inner (male/convex) and outer (female/concave) Hardlock nut.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
3. Installation Procedure for Hardlock Nuts not fitted to Point System Stretcher
Bars
Caution: This information is for hardlock nuts that are NOT used on point
system stretcher bars, for details of the use of these nuts on
stretcher bars see section 1.
The installation procedure of hardlock nuts for generic applications i.e. where they
are used to tighten to a solid work
01 Pass the bolt through the components to be attached and screw the Inner nut
onto the bolt.
02 Tighten the Inner nut against the component with a torque wrench using the
torque value for the required application as specified.
03 Screw the outer nut onto the bolt by hand.
04 Hold the inner nut with a spanner. With a torque wrench, tighten the outer nut
onto the inner nut using the relevant torque value from the table in section 2
for the appropriate nut size. This will completely lock the nuts.
It is important that both nuts are tightened to their appropriate torque values.
End
Page 2 of 2
Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Torque Wrenches
1 Torque
In certain applications, fastenings need to be tightened
to an accurate torque. If the fastening is under torqued it
will be insecure and may fail in service, if over torqued it
could result in damage by distortion and may shear
under operating conditions. To ensure that a fastening is
correctly torqued, tools known as torque wrenches and
torque drivers are used. These devices are able to be
pre-set to the required torque and will 'click over' when
used, to indicate that the correct torque has been
reached.
Most of the applied torque is used up in overcoming
friction: at the bearing face of the nut and between the
mating threads. Only about 10% of the torque is used in
applying an axial load to the bolt. You must therefore use
only clean and undamaged nuts, bolts, and washers as
dirt or damage will greatly affect the friction and thus
alter the desired load in the bolt.
If accurate torque control of fastenings is required, the
figure that a particular fastening needs to be tightened to
will be specified in design drawings, installation
instructions or maintenance documents. Note that this is
the figure to which the torque wrench should be set with
reasonable visual accuracy; it is not a measure that has
to be obtained to a very close tolerance. Torque is
measured in units of either Newton metres (N m) or
pounds feet (lbf ft). If torque is specified in any of these
instructions then you will need to obtain a calibrated tool
suitable for the torque range required and ensure it is
fitted with the correct sized bit or socket.
2 Use of Torque Wrench

To tighten a nut to a particular torque:
1 Ensure that the torque wrench to be used covers
the correct range for the torque required.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Torque Wrenches
2 Set the torque wrench to the torque specified in the

instruction. (The exact method of setting the torque
may vary with different types of wrench, but
generally involves rotating a section of the handle
until the required torque is indicated on a scale.
Often a locking device has to be released before
adjustment and then re-locked afterwards.) To
enable the setting of the torque, adjustable torque
tools have a graduated scale on them. Ensure when
setting a torque tool that the correct units (Nm or lbf
ft) are used. Once set the tool is ready for use.
3 Fit the correct size of socket to the drive shaft of the
wrench to fit the nut to be tightened.
4 Place the wrench over the nut. Pull the wrench
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
steadily in the appropriate direction to tighten the
nut until the wrench clicks.
When using torque tools, ensure that you stop turning as
soon as the 'click' is felt, this is most important at low
torque settings as the click may be missed and the
fastening over torqued. After completion of the task, it is
important to reset the torque tool to its lowest setting.
This will ensure that the internal spring does not become
set and the accuracy of the tool impaired.
Periodically (at least annually), torque tools shall be
calibrated (section U001) to ensure they are working
accurately and producing the correct tightening torque.
They may also need re-checking if the tool is damaged
at any time. If you have any reason to doubt the
accuracy of the setting, return the torque wrench
immediately for checking.
Some torque wrenches may not be graduated in both
metric Newton metres (Nm) and Pounds force Feet (lbf
ft). A table approximate equivalents of imperial and
metric units of force is given in Figure U12.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Torque Wrenches
Newton Pounds Newton Pounds

metre force Feet metre force Feet
(N m) (lbf ft) (N m) (lbf ft)
1 0.7 21 15.5
2 1.5 22 16.3
3 2.2 23 17.0
4 3.0 24 17.7
5 3.7 25 18.5
6 4.5 30 22.2
7 5.2 35 25.8
8 6 40 29.5
9 6.7 45 33.2
10 7.4 50 36.9
11 8.2 55 40.6
12 8.9 60 44.3
13 9.6 65 48.0
14 10.4 70 51.7
15 11.0 75 55.3
16 11.8 80 59.0
17 12.6 85 62.7
18 13.3 90 66.4
19 14.0 95 70.0
20 14.8 100 73.8
Figure U12 Units of Force Conversion Table
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Bond Punches
Defective Punches
Some Bond Punch 'Starters and Finishers', made from
an unsuitable grade of steel, broke the first time they
were struck. In one instance, the punch head shattered,
resulting in an injury to a member of staff.
Both types of punch are now being made from a suitable
grade of steel and are stamped with the appropriate
Catalogue Number, identification letters and date of
batch manufacture.
The new punches can be identified as follows:
Starters 39/48830 B+H, SFT 'date'
Finishers 39/48835 B+H, SFT 'date'
Any punch which does not bear the above markings
shall be considered unsafe to use and shall be removed
from all tool kits, including those held in stores.
It is important that suspect punches are disposed of in
an approved manner to prevent their being inadvertently
returned to use.
Punches are subject to inspection before use in
accordance with section U002.
Only the correct type of punch may be used.
Eye, ear and hand protection must always be used.
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Checking Gauges
Approved gauges are listed in SMS part A05.
1 FPL Setting Gauge

The gauge widths and the length to the shoulder of the
narrow end of the gauge are for lock notch sizes cut for
use with mechanical facing point locks.
Figure U13 FPL Setting Gauge (BRS-SM 225)
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Checking Gauges
2 Clamp Lock Limit Switch Gauges

The 1.5mm and 2mm microswitch gauges are shown in
Figure U14. Full details of use are given in SMS Test
14.
1.5mm Microswitch Gauge
2mm Microswitch Gauge
Figure U14 Clamp Lock Limit Switch Gauges

(BRS-SM 528)
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Checking Gauges
3 Clamp Lock Detection Setting Gauges

The 2.5mm and 4mm detection gauges are shown in
Figure U15. Full details of use are given in SMS Test
14.
4mm Detection Gauge
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
2.5mm Detection Gauge
Figure U15 Clamp Lock Detection Setting Gauges

(BRS-SM 527)
Further Information
Specifications
END

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Under-Rail Rail Bonding Unit
Several rail drilling machines are available. This section

describes one example.
This is a powered rail drilling machine designed to drill
the two 7.2mm holes in either Bull Head or Flat Bottom
rails at 57mm from the base of the rail. The unit is
supplied with two pairs of Tunley clamps: one pair for
each type of rail. See Figure U16.
The unit must not be used for any purpose other than
drilling rails, and it must not be modified in any way.
Some switch and crossing (S&C) layouts may prevent
the use of this machine due to the limited space between
rails. On plain line or within S&C with sufficient space,
the unit can be fitted on either side of the rail. When in
place and firmly clamped to the rail, the machine is clear
of passing traffic and can safely be left in place while
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
vehicles pass over. It is therefore not necessary to
obtain a track possession to use the machine unless the
safety rules regarding warning times and lookouts
require it.
The machine requires a power supply of 110V a.c.
provided by a portable generator with a minimum power
output of 0.5 kVA.
All personal and track safety rules must be observed,
and all operators of the machine must be certificated as
competent to use it. Safety goggles or spectacles must
be worn when operating the machine.
Instructions for use:
1 Do not have the machine connected to power at this
stage.
2 Fit to the machine the correct pair of Tunley clamps
for the type of rail to be drilled.
3 Fully withdraw the spindle by rotating the feed
handle. Fit a 7.2mm (9/32”) drill in the chuck and
tighten at all chuck key holes with the key provided.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
4 The rail to be drilled must be cleared of heaped

ballast and other obstructions (including orange
pipes). The underside of rail must be clear to allow
the mounting legs to pass through. (50mm is
sufficient.) Ensure the Tunley clamps are open and
with the arms hanging down. Offer the machine to
the rail in the required position.
5 Pass the arms under the rail and locate the heads
of the two clamps into the rail web.
6 Tighten both clamps by rotating the clamp Allen
studs with the “T” key provided. Check that the
machine is correctly located and firmly clamped.
7 Check the drill position is correct, with the slider
block fully located against the desired stop. Also
check that the slider block studs are tight. Lubricate
the drill bit with a suitable cutting fluid or oil.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
8 Route the power cable so that it passes under rails
and presents no hazard. Connect and turn on the
power supply. Rotate the spoked feed handle to
engage the drill against the rail. Maintain an even
pressure without undue loading of the drill. Continue
applying cutting fluid or oil as necessary and cut the
first hole. After the drill pops through, withdraw the
spindle and switch off the power.
9 Slacken the slider block studs. Gently take the
weight of the drill with one hand and slide the block
along to the opposite stop. Re-tighten both slider
block studs.
10 Lubricate the drill bit and cut the second hole in a
similar fashion to the first. When the drill is through
the rail, fully retract the spindle and switch off the
power.
11 Disconnect the power supply. Slacken off the
Tunley clamp Allen studs, disengage the clamps
and lift the machine from the rail. Place it clear of
the track. Make sure the chuck and “T” keys have
not been mislaid.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
WARNING: Turn off and disconnect the machine from

the power supply before carrying the
machine, fitting it to or removing it from the
rail, or changing the drill bit.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Figure U16 Under-Rail Drilling Machine
END

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Stripping Tools
To enable a connection to be made, the wire or cable

has to be stripped of its insulation. When stripping
insulation, it is important to ensure that the metal
conductor is not nicked or damaged in any way. The use
of a purpose built stripping tool will, if used correctly,
ensure that the conductor is not damaged during this
process.
When using the stripping tool, take care that the metal
conductor is not nicked or damaged in any way by the
stripping operation. This warning also applies to the
braid in the case of a screened or co-axial cable.
1 Cable Sheath Stripping

The Egerton E1890 tool (see Figure U17) can be used
for removing the sheath of most PCP and PCP covered
cables up to 25mm diameter that have a sheath of even
thickness. To use the tool:
1 Press the stop pawl to retract the blade.
2 Turn the adjusting screw to set the height of the
blade according to the thickness of the sheath. The
blade should project very slightly less than the full
thickness, to avoid damage to the core insulation.
3 Insert the cable into the tool trough and push the
ratchet up until the blade fully enters the sheath.
4 Rotate the tool round the cable one complete turn,
and then pull the tool along the cable to make a
longitudinal cut.
5 Remove the sheath. In some cases, a second
longitudinal cut on the opposite side of the cable to
the first cut will make the sheath easier to remove.
Before stripping an installed cable, you must make two
test strips on a scrap piece of similar cable to check the
blade setting. Make quite sure the blade has not nicked
the core insulation. Check the final strip also.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Stripping Tools
Figure U17 Egerton E1890 Sheath Stripping Tool
Certain multicore cables (2 core in particular) have a

varying thickness sheath, making it impossible to use the
tool for a full depth cut without damaging the cores. In
this case:
1 Set the cutter for the thinnest part of the sheath and
make the circular and two opposite longitudinal
cuts.
2 Use your side cutting pliers at the cable end to
divide the sheath in half along sufficient length to be
able to grip one half of the sheath in each hand.
3 Pull the sheath apart until the split reaches the
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
circular cut.
4 Trim off the split sheath with the side cutting pliers.
Do not damage the core insulation.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Stripping Tools
If the cable is too large or otherwise unsuitable for the

sheath cutter, a knife will have to be used to make the
circular and longitudinal cuts. The knife must have a
fixed or locked blade and must not be of the “break-off”
type. Take extreme care. Place the end of the cable on a
firm surface. Do not cut above or towards your other
hand holding the cable. Make two cuts and pull the
sheath apart as described above. Make sure the core
insulation has not been damaged.
2 Hot “Vee” Stripper

PVC or polythene insulation on small wires may be
removed by using a hot “Vee” stripper. The stripper is
similar to an electric soldering iron but the bit has at the
end a small disc with a “V” slot in it. Another version of
this stripper consists of an attachment which fits onto an
ordinary soldering iron.
1 Lay the end of the wire so that the point from which
the insulation is to be stripped is in the bottom of the
heated “Vee”.
2 Rotate the wire through about three quarters of a
turn and pull so that the insulation is removed.
3 Do not allow the wire to remain in contact with the
hot stripper for more than a brief moment before
stripping. If you do, the end of the insulation
remaining on the wire will be damaged.
3 Hand Operated Stripper

Hand operated strippers can be used for most types of
insulation but need to be adjusted and locked to suit the
particular cable being stripped.
1 Before using this tool it must be set correctly. Take
a spare piece of wire, identical to that being worked
on. Adjust the tool so that the insulation is cut
cleanly, but the metal conductor is not damaged.
Then lock the cutting heads and retest. After
setting, the strippers need only be checked
occasionally when working with the same type and
size of wire.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Stripping Tools
2 Prepare the wire to be worked on by cutting it to the

correct length.
3 Strip the wire using a straight pull.
Stripping wires prior to fixing a crimped connector
requires particular care.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Figure U18 Wire Stripping
With the remaining insulation put up flush to the crimp

barrel, the conductor should just protrude beyond the
barrel.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Stripping Tools
An automatic self adjusting hand tool (the Klippon

Stripax) is also available.
This is capable of stripping solid conductors from 0.08 to
2
4.0mm and stranded/flexible conductors from 0.08 to
2
6.0mm . It will also strip multiple conductor and flat
ribbon cables, even double insulated cables in two
operations without any adjustments. A protected wire
cutter is incorporated within the handles. Spare cutting
jaws and a special shaped cleaning brush are also
available.
See Figure U18 for illustrations of good and bad
stripping.
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Extractor Tools
When removing spades from relay plugboards it is

important to use the correct extractor tool to suit the type
of spade used. The four most commonly used spade
extractor tools are shown in Figure U19.
Extractor tools must be used carefully, especially when a
relay from a working circuit is plugged into the
plugboard. When using the Westinghouse type, ensure
that it is inserted squarely between the flat side of the
spade and the plugboard. Push the tool fully home and
then withdraw the spade and extractor together. When
using the single pronged types, insert the prong only
sufficiently far to be able to lift the locking tab to allow
withdrawal.
Figure U19 Spade Extractor Tools
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Marking Pliers for Wire Loop Connections
When terminating a single strand conductor to a pillar

terminal a loop of wire is normally formed. To form the
loop, the wire is wrapped around the ends of round nose
pliers using one of the fingers as a mandrel, according to
the following process:
1 It is an advantage if your round-nose pliers are first
marked for 0BA and 2BA terminals. Push one of
each size of washer tightly onto one nose of the
pliers (see Figure U20). Mark completely around the
nose, just on the lower side of each washer.
Remove the washers and use the marks to position
the wire when forming a loop.
2 Remove the insulation with a properly adjusted
stripping tool. (See section U011.)
3 Do not use a knife. The strip needs to be
approximately 20mm for 2BA and 30mm for 0BA
terminals. Form the neck by bending the wire at
right angles, 3mm from the insulation (see Figure
U20).
4 Hold the wire in the round-nosed pliers and form a
loop by rotating the pliers (see Figure U20).
5 Cut off surplus wire with side cutters. Re-form the
loop if necessary so that there is approximately
1mm gap.
6 When complete, check that the loop slides easily
onto the terminal.
Points to note (refer to Figure U20):
• If labels are to be used, they must be slid onto the
wire before forming the loop.
• The loop must go clockwise around the pillar.
• The loop shall be just large enough to move freely
over the terminal.
• Mount the loop between washers.
• The insulation shall stop just short of the washers.
• Do not overlap the wire loop on itself.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Marking Pliers for Wire Loop Connections
• The loop must be properly formed as shown. The

wire must not be just wrapped round the terminal.
Figure U21 shows the correct arrangement of nuts and
washers on 0BA and 2BA terminal blocks.
Figure U20 Wire Loop Connections
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Wire Connections and Crimping
The techniques described in this section apply to all

conventional safety signalling wiring, and where possible
shall also be applied to non-safety connections.
Exceptionally, such as within plugs, sockets,
lampholders, etc., restricted space may prevent the use
of a crimped connector on a multi-strand wire before
termination. Electronic equipment generally has special
plug and socket connections, and some connectors (the
older non-standard relay spade, for instance) are
designed for soldered connection only.
1 General Rules
Wherever possible, a multi-strand conductor must have
a crimped connector fitted.
A solid strand conductor is normally connected to a pillar
terminal by forming a loop of wire (section U013). An
exception is where the diameter of the conductor is less
than the thread pitch of the terminal post. In this case, a
crimped connector is used. Without the crimped
connector the thin wire might become trapped in the
thread groove and be severed as the nut is screwed
down.
2 Crimping Tools - Points to Note

• Crimping tools must be hydraulic or ratchet type.
• Use only authorised types.
• Use the correct manufacturer's tool to suit the crimp
being used, to ensure integrity of the connection
and to avoid damaging the tool (it is generally
identified by a coloured label, dot, or sleeve on the
handle to match the colour code of the crimp, as
described in sections 3 and 7).
• Inspect the crimping tool daily. See section 9.
Check that it is complete, undamaged and clean.
• If you have any doubts about the tool’s condition or
accuracy, do not use it. Seek your supervisor’s
advice.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
• Arrange for tools to be sent for inspection annually

or whenever it appears to be faulty.
• Crimping tools are precision tools. Look after them
and do not use them for anything other than their
designed purpose.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Figure U21 Terminal Block Arrangements

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
3 Crimp Connectors for Terminations with Nuts

and Screws
The type of crimp connector to be used must be vibration
resistant. The AMP name for such terminals is PIDG
(Pre Insulated Diamond Grip), but there are other
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
manufacturers’ compatible products.
It is essential that the correct manufacturer's tool is used
for a particular type of crimp.
Usually a colour code helps you to ensure this. With
AMP tools the colours of the connector end and the tool
handle or label correspond. Other tools may have
coloured spots to show which part of the head to use.
Choose a connector that suits the wire size. In addition
the connector must be the right termination style. For
example:
• Ring tongue for terminal studs.
• Blade type for grub screw and pressure plate
(tunnel type) terminals.
• Check that the blade is a suitable length and width
for the terminal.
• Occasionally, the terminal block is designed to
accept only a circular cross section conductor, in
which case a pin type connector shall be used.
• Hook type for BS 88 fuses and track circuit
fuse/links (including RS 32 and 63 and fuseholder
type 32H).
Do not deform, cut, or alter a connector to overcome
terminating difficulties.
Put only one wire in each connector.
Note that aluminium cored power cables require special
crimp connectors and terminals. See the Signalling
Installation Handbook.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
4 Crimp Connectors (Spade Style) for

Terminations to Relay Plugboards
These are spade shaped connectors that slide and clip
into the plugboard. A connector can have one or two
wires crimped to it.
The spade used must be the correct style to suit the
plugboard (See Figure U22).
The shape of the spade is the recognising feature rather
than any name stamped on it.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Figure U22 Connectors for Relay Plugboards

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
The only spades that can be crimped are the

Westinghouse style and the SGE (or GEC) "F" type. All
other types of spade connector (including those for “P”
series plug-in relays) require soldered connections.
Note that the Westinghouse type of plugboard and
spade is now standard for new work. (New GEC
plugboards are no longer obtainable.)
When making alterations to existing installations, check
the make of relay plugboard and obtain the same make
of spade. Legitimate Westinghouse connectors are
marked with a miniature "W" or "Z". Unmarked
Westinghouse type crimps should be discarded since
they do not adequately grip the insulation.
Either tin plated (dull finish) or silver (bright finish)
connectors may be used in blue or white plugboards, but
only tin connectors are permitted for new work in black
plugboards. Before using a spade, check that is
untarnished. Discard any that are discoloured.
2
Connectors will accept conductor sizes from 0.63mm to
2
1.15mm .
Relay spades with only one wire connected shall be
installed so that the single wire is always on the same
side (usually the left) when fitted into the plugboard. This
assists wire counting and checking. However, existing
practice at the installation concerned should be
perpetuated for alterations.
Where two wires are to be connected to a Westinghouse
spade, both should be of the same size to ensure the
insulation is correctly gripped.
Do not deform, cut, or alter a connector to overcome
terminating difficulties.
If a crimp is faulty, cut the connector off the wire and
start again.
When inserting spades in the plugboard, make sure the
spades are the correct way round. See Figure U23.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Note: Positions 3, 5, 7, R1, R2 as for position 1.

Positions 4, 6, 8, R3, R4 as for position 2.
Westinghouse connector has lug to ensure correct entry.
Figure U23 Relay Plugboards - Spade Arrangement
Push the spade carefully home. Do not push so hard that

the spade is forced in too far. In the case of the
Westinghouse style spade you may, if necessary, use
the insertion (stubby) end of the insertion/extractor tool
to push the spade fully in. Do not use any other type of
tool for this purpose.
The spade should slide in smoothly and click into
position. After insertion, give the wire(s) a gentle pull to
check that the latching tab has operated. (Take care not
to tug too hard on a "F" type crimp, since the connector
can easily be deformed.)
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
When a considerable number of new plugboards have

been completely wired, you can make a quick additional
check using the following method.
Before any relays are plugged in, view the plugboards
from the relay side and shine a small bright torchlight
beam at the plugboard face and at an angle of about 30
degrees to the line of sight (See Figure U24).
Reflections from the end of the spade will stand out
brightly and indicate how the spade is seated in relation
to the slot wall. Figure U24 shows the appearance of
correctly fitted spades and also how various types of
faults will show up.
Figure U24 Checking Relay Spades

Correctly Inserted
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
While carrying out this check, bear in mind the relay

contact and coil arrangement (cross checking with the
relay contact analysis if necessary) and you will also be
able to spot:
• missing spades and wiring.
• extraneous spades and wiring.
• spades inserted in the wrong slot.
• incorrect coil connections.
Correct any errors found. Refit faulty spades, replacing
any that are damaged. If a plugboard is damaged,
replace that also.
Keep a watch for any dirt or fragments of wire or
insulation lodged in the spade slots. Blow or gently
probe out anything that should not be there, making sure
that it doesn’t then fall into some other unsafe place.
Use only an approved extractor tool to remove spades
from plugboards (see Figure U19). Use the tool carefully,
and with extreme care when a relay is inserted into the
plugboard. With the Westinghouse type, make sure it is
inserted squarely between the flat side of the spade and
the plugboard, push it fully home, and then withdraw the
spade and extractor together. With the single prong
types, insert the prong only sufficiently far to be able to
lift the locking tab or notch clear to allow withdrawal.
5 Crimp Connectors - Faston Style

These connectors are a push-on fit to a tab on the
equipment termination.
Several different sizes are available, but the miniature
size is most common and fits the plugboards of the
continental style relays used in the Alstom High Voltage
Impulse Track Circuit equipment. The AMP connector for
these relays is:
Faston PIDG, 110 series, for 0.020” tab thickness,
Part No. 640923-1
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
This AMP connector has red coloured insulation to

indicate the wire and tool size. Crimp these connectors
to the appropriate size of wire using an AMP red handled
tool. The locator will usually need to be temporarily
removed to accommodate the connector head, so make
sure the connector is correctly positioned before
crimping.
6 Examples of Crimp Terminals

Black terminations give improved wire support and are
used in conditions where high levels of vibration are
experienced. They are most commonly used for ring
connectors for 0BA and 2BA terminals at, for example,
track circuit terminations, clamp lock detectors and AWS
inductors. It is preferable to use black connectors on
2
both ends of 2.5mm (f) on-track cables.
Colour Code RED BLUE BLACK YELLOW
Conductor 0.25 - 1.6 1.0 - 2.6 1.0 - 2.6 2.7 - 6.6
Cross
Section
(mm2)
Maximum 3.7 4.3 6.4 5.8
Insulation
Dia. (mm)
Wire Size 0.75* 0.75#
(mm2) 1.15* 1.15 1.15** 10
2.5 (f) 2.5 (f) 2.5 (f)***
2.5
Strip Length 5-6 5-6 6-7 6-7
(mm)
* Type A1 insulation fits these crimp connectors but Type A2 does not.
** Preferred for Type A2 insulation with Ring Tongue connectors.
*** Used when jointing track circuit tail cables
(but see method in the Signalling Installation Handbook).
# Use for Type A2 insulation but the conductor must be doubled over.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Cable made to specifications NR/PS/SIG/00005 or

GS/ES0872 (see SMS part Z) have slightly larger
insulation than the previous BR 872 cable. Entry into
Red and Blue ring tongue crimps is eased if the
expanded version of the connector (which has a tapered
entry) is used.
Details of all the commonly used types of connector are
available from your materials supplier.
7 Examples of Crimping Tools

7.1 AMP (manufactured by Tyco)
Colour Code RED BLUE BLACK / PURPLE

YELLOW
Size Code 22 - 18 16 -14 12 -10 see E052
Part No. 525690 525691 59239-4 45216
The black/yellow coded tool is used for both black

and yellow sleeve crimps. Earlier tools had a yellow
handle coding.
The purple (with a purple label on the head) and
black/yellow coded tools are used for bomb tails, as
described in section E052.
AMP also make a black handled tool for crimping
“F” type spade connectors. This is not usable with
black crimps.
7.2 Hellerman Mk.3/RS8 (made by Deutch)

This has one red and one blue handle and is
illustrated in Figure U25. It is only for use with the
Westinghouse style of relay plugboard spades. It
2
can cope with one or two cores of 0.75mm or
2
1.15mm wire and crimps both sides of the spade at
once. Consequently, for two conductors, both must
be the same size. The strip length required is 7mm.
Note: The PVC insulation of 24/0.20mm wire is
not gripped by this system.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Figure U25 Hellerman Crimp Tool for

Westinghouse Connector
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
7.3 Crimpstar HP 2 WT1560

A universal tool suiting AMP terminal ends coloured
red, blue, black, and yellow. It is intended for use by
maintenance staff on essential repairs. Use only if
authorised. The preferred version is fitted with a
locator. Take care to use the correct part the jaw
(identified by a colour spot). For black terminals use
the jaw marked yellow.
7.4 CTT RTB-510

Suits AMP and CTT terminal ends and the
Westinghouse or "F" type connectors. Die heads for
each type have to be specifically ordered and are
fitted with locators.
7.5 Aluminium Cored Power Cables

Aluminium cored power cables require different
crimping tools. See the Signalling Installation
Handbook for details.
8 How to Crimp
Follow this procedure carefully, taking particular care
that the crimp is correctly located in the tool:
1 Strip the insulation from the wire to be crimped.
Figures U28 and U29 show you how much to strip.
2
When using 0.75mm Type A2 cable, the outer
braid will also have to be cut back just clear of the
crimp insulating sleeve.
2 Fully squeeze the handles to release the jaws. Then
open the crimping head.
3 Place the terminal in the crimping jaws so that the
crimp tongue goes under the locator, with the
locator fitting into the slot between the wire barrel
and the insulation barrel of the crimp (Figure U26).
4 Certain types of terminal foul the locator. In this
case remove the locator.
5 Replace it before using other types of terminal.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Figure U26 Location of Terminal in Tool

(GEC "F" Type)
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
6 With the Crimpstar tool, make sure the tongue of

the terminal is on the side of the tool bearing the
coloured spots.
7 Squeeze the handles gently – enough to grip the
terminal but not deform it.
8 If stranded wire is being used, twist the strands
together.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
9 Insert the stripped wire fully into the barrel of the

terminal until it butts against the locator, in
accordance with the instructions for the particular
type of tool.
Note: The wire insulation must not enter the wire
barrel of the connector, but is gripped by the
insulation barrel.
2
Note: When using 1.15mm wire in a relay spade,
it is easier to insert the wire(s) into the
connector before placing it in the tool.
10 Ensure all strands enter the barrel.
11 Hold the wire in position and squeeze the handles
together until the ratchet releases.
Some tools impress a mark when the terminal has been
properly crimped:
• AMP red and yellow handled tools produce one dot.
• AMP blue handled tools produce two dots.
• Crimpstar tools impress a design like an “O” with a
bar across the centre.
• CTT tools impress one, two, or three dots according
to which type of die head is in use.
These marks are illustrated in Figure U27.
When a crimped connector is in its final terminated
position, the impress mark shall, if possible, be visible.
This is so that later quality checks can be easily made.
For example, when crimping connectors for cable and
link terminations, make the crimps and place the ring
connectors on the pillar terminals so that the impress
mark faces towards you. In the case of cable cores,
make the crimp so that the printed core number is also
visible from the front.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Note: CTT tools impress one, two or three dots according to

die head in use.
Figure U27 Various Types of Impress Marks
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Although the terminals in general use have plastic
sleeves, these must not be relied upon to electrically
insulate the terminal body. The terminal must be
installed so that no part of it (including the sleeve) lies
against any other uninsulated fitting or wiring.
See Figure U28 for how to check a crimped connector.
See Figure U29 for how to check a crimped relay spade.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Figure U28 Crimped Connectors
After inspecting the crimp, give the wire and connector a

firm tug apart to check that the crimp is secure. Inspect
the crimp again to make sure the conductor and
insulation have not moved.
If the crimp is in any way faulty, cut the connector off and
start again with a new connector.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
9 Testing and Maintenance of Hand Crimping

Tools
Crimping tools must be regularly tested and checked.
The procedure varies slightly according to the make of
tool. Some (the AMP for example) have non-removable
dies, unlike the CTT.
Test gauges are not available for all tools and all dies.
Details are available from your materials supplier.
Daily, at the start of work:
a) Clean the tool and die heads with a brush or lint
free cloth. Carefully inspect the tool and die heads
to make sure they are undamaged, complete, and
clean. Lubricate sparingly with light mineral oil (such
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
as “3 in 1”) all pivot pins, adjusters, ratchets, pawls,
and return springs.
b) Operate the tool (with the die heads fitted if they are
removable) to fully close the dies, then release
hand pressure. Test the die gap with the
appropriate die Go/No-go pin gauge. AMP tools
have two gauges: one for the conductor dies and
one for the insulation dies. The locator may have to
be removed when checking the conductor dies.
c) If the die gap is correct, make a test crimp with
samples of the connector and wire you intend to
use. Carefully inspect the crimp for correctness as
shown in Figures U27, U28, and U29.
d) Try pulling the connector and wire apart by hand to
check that the crimp is secure.
e) If the test crimp appears correct, write the date of
the test on a label and attach it to the test crimp.
Retain each test crimp for seven working days.
f) If the test crimp is inadequate and it appears that
the adjustment to the tool might cure the fault, make
the adjustment as described later in this section.
Then repeat the test crimp check.
g) Do not use tools or dies that fail the tests and
checks.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Figure U29 Crimped Relay Spades - Westinghouse

(Standard for New Installations)
Daily, at the end of work:

h) Carry out the die Go/No-go pin gauge check. If the
tool fails the test, the crimps made during that day
are suspect and they must all be carefully inspected
and replaced if necessary.
Monthly, or more frequently if necessary:
i) Remove all lubrication using an approved de-
greasing agent. Make sure the de-greaser does not
damage any paint or plastic part. Dry the tool.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
j) Check that all pivot pins etc. are secure with their
proper clips and do not have excessive wear. If
everything is satisfactory, lubricate the tool as
described above. Operate the tool (without die
heads if they are removable) and check that the
ratchet mechanism operates correctly and the jaws
and handles operate freely.
k) On the CTT tool, carry out a pressure test as
described later in this section. If necessary, make
adjustments and re-test.
Annually, or whenever the tool’s operation is suspect:
l) With the Hellerman tool (for relay spades), clean the
fixed die as follows:
• Remove the circlip.
• Drive out the retaining pin.
• Remove the fixed die.
• Clean out any debris.
• Re-assemble.
• Make a test crimp to check correct operation.
• Send for recalibration.
m) Arrange to return the tool to an approved service
centre for overhaul and recalibration.
10 CTT RTB–510 Tool Pressure Adjustment

To check the pressure adjustment of the tool:
1 Remove the dies from the tool.
2 Open the tool handles and clean the jaw faces.
3 Holding the tool with the impressed name side
uppermost, fit a clean Go/No-go gauge with the
outer chamfered corner towards the top of the tool.
4 Gradually close the tool handles until the ratchet
mechanism just holds the gauge so that it cannot be
withdrawn by hand.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
5 Continue to close the handles and count the

additional clicks from the ratchet. There should be
two clicks, with the tool releasing on the second
click. If there were more than two clicks the jaw
pressure needs decreasing, and if there was only
one click the pressure needs to be increased.
If pressure adjustment is needed:
6 Remove the circlip from the spindle end of the
adjusting wheel (see Figure U30).
7 Press the spindle gently inwards until the twelve
sided shoulder at the wheel end is just clear of its
location hole. Hold the end of the spindle in this
position with a finger.
8 Using a 4mm hexagonal key wrench in the socket,
turn the adjusting wheel so that it moves round one
of the twelve shoulders. Turn it in the direction of
the arrow to increase pressure and the opposite
direction to decrease.
9 Push the wheel inwards so that it locates into its
twelve sided hole.
10 Make sure it aligns properly - do not use undue
force.
11 Check the pressure adjustment, using the gauge as
before. If it is still not correct, repeat the adjustment.
When it is correct, replace the circlip in its groove
and remove the key wrench.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Figure U30 CTT RTB-510 Tool Pressure Adjustment

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
11 Insulation Adjustment of AMP Tools

Correct setting is important. Each tool has three
insulation crimping adjustments. The method of setting is
as follows:
1 Place both Insulation Adjustment Pins in the No.3
position.
2 Place a terminal end in the crimping jaws.
3 Insert unstripped wire into the terminal end, placing
the wire just in the insulation grip portion of the
sleeve.
4 Crimp.
5 Check the insulation support by holding the terminal
end and bending the wire back and forth once (the
sleeve should retain its grip on the insulation).
6 If the wire pulls out, set both Insulation Adjustment
Pins to the No.2 position and repeat the test.
7 If the wire still pulls out, move the Pins to the No.1
position and repeat the test.
If a satisfactory grip cannot be obtained with the pins in
the No.1 position, then the tool is probably faulty. It shall
be sent for inspection.
12 Screw Termination without a Crimp Connector

Where a crimp connector cannot be fitted to the wire
before termination in a grub screw or pressure plate type
of terminal (for example if the wire has a solid conductor
or the conductor diameter is too large), strip sufficient
insulation from the wire to allow the conductor to fully
enter the tunnel.
Slacken off the screw or clamp so that the wire can be
pushed right in. The end of the insulation should be
about 1mm clear of the metal of the terminal and well
within any insulation tunnel. The insulation must not
enter the conductor clamping tunnel.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Tighten down the grub screw or clamp bolt and check

that the conductor is gripped by gently pulling the wire.
Some larger terminals have more than one grub screw
or bolt for each wire, in which case make sure the
conductor enters far enough for all screws to be effective
and tighten the screws evenly.
Screws shall not be over tight. If there is no pressure
plate, the wire should be firmly compressed and slightly
indented but not cut-into by the screw end.
If stranded wire has to be used in this type of connector,
slightly twist the strands together and make sure they all
enter the tunnel. If a choice of terminal block is possible,
the pressure plate type is better than grub screw alone.
13 Soldered Spade Connectors for Relay

Plugboards
As mentioned in the section on crimp connectors for
relay plugboards, certain spade connectors can only be
soldered. There are several different styles of connector,
but in general the wire conductor passes through a hole
or round a tag before soldering, and the insulation is
held by a bend-over clamp. One or two wires can be
fitted to each spade. Figure U31 shows the termination
procedure for a typical example, that for Westinghouse
Style B relays such as the VT1. For the general
techniques of soldering, see section U015.
Further Information
NR/PS/SIG/00005 Railway Signalling Cable
GS/ES0872 superseded by NR/PS/SIG/00005
BR 872 superseded by GS/ES0872
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Figure U31 Connecting Westinghouse

Style B Relay Spades
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Soldering
1 Principle
Solder is a low melting point metal used to join together
other metals. To obtain a good joint the solder must:
• Flow between the metal surfaces (which must
remain unmelted).
• Completely fill the space between surfaces.
• Adhere to the surfaces.
• Solidify.
It is essential, therefore, that:
• Each of the surfaces to be joined is wetted by a film
of solder.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
• The films of solder are continuous and the space
between them is filled with solder.
The rest of this section will show how to achieve these
essentials. Make sure you can produce good results
before you work on signalling installations.
Practise on dummy jobs until you can produce perfect
joints every time.
2 Soldering Irons: The Bit

This is made of copper and available in different shapes.
That most commonly used for electrical connections is
cylindrical (about the thickness of a pencil) with a
bevelled tip.
The larger the bit, the more heat it will retain and the
larger the job it can solder.
Easy access of the bit to the work is all important.
Consistent with this, you should choose a bit which has
the shortest length, largest diameter, and largest tip
face.
The shape of the bit is chosen to allow maximum heat
transfer to the joint.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Soldering
The bit will be slowly eaten away as you solder. Keep

the bit in shape with a smooth file.
Keep the bit clean. When first used and also after
cleaning, “tin” it by applying flux and solder to the heated
working tip.
3 Soldering Irons: Heat Source

Small irons are usually electrically heated. They are
designed to reach the correct heat. Examples include:
Voltage Wattage Application
12, 25, 110, 240 12 Printed circuit boards, etc.
110, 240 25 General purpose
most connections
110, 240 100 Heavy duty connections
Signalling supplies must not be used to power electric
soldering irons. They may only be connected to the
correct voltage traction, domestic or other specially
provided supplies.
A gas powered soldering iron kit is available for use at
location cupboards and other sites where there is no
suitable electricity supply. This is the Oryx Portasol
Professional kit - STC Part No. 030375G.
Large irons are heated by a flame, often fuelled from
gas. Heat the main body of the bit (not the tinned tip)
with the flame. The correct heat is when the flames turn
a greenish hue.
On large workpieces, you may use a gas torch or blow
lamp to directly heat the metals to be joined. Make sure
the flame size and shape is adequate.
Use a stand for the iron when it is being heated or
placed down while hot. Do not hang the iron on racks or
equipment - it may damage wires or someone may put
their hand on it.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Soldering
4 Solder
For normal, small soldering work, such as wires to tags,
use an approved Flux Cored Solder Wire.
For large jobs, the solder comes in wires or bars without
an internal flux.
5 Fluxes
These must be an approved type, suitable for the work.
Acid flux must never be used. Corrosive fluxes (for
example Bakers Fluid and Fluxite) must not be used for
electrical connection work.
6 Small Soldering Jobs (e.g. Wires to Tags)

Proceed as follows:
1 Heat up the iron. Clean and tin the bit if necessary.
2 Clean the stripped wire and tag with a soft cloth.
New wire and tags should not be dirty, but a gentle
rub with fine emery cloth may be needed in rare
cases.
3 If either of the metals to be joined is not pre–tinned
or silver plated, it must be tinned before the joint is
made. Heat the non–tinned part with the iron and
apply a small amount of solder. The aim is to obtain
a thin film of solder over the whole area to be
joined.
4 Assemble the wire to the tag so that one lies on the
other. The wire insulation should be about 1mm
clear of the area to be soldered.
5 Apply the iron to the underside of the tag. (See
Figure U32.)
6 Wait a few seconds until both connections have
heated up.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Soldering
Figure U32 Applying the Iron & Solder Flow
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Soldering
7 Apply the resin cored solder to the two parts to be

joined. Do not apply the solder to the iron. The
solder should melt and flow over the joint with the
flux burning away. If it does not, you did not heat the
parts long enough before applying the solder -
reheat and apply a little more solder.
Good solder will flow evenly over the surfaces, and
penetrate any hole in the tag. (See Figure U32.)
Badly applied solder will form into globules and will
not flow evenly. (See Figure U32.)
8 Remove the iron. Allow the joint to cool and the
solder to set without disturbance.
9 Clean off any excess flux and examine the joint:
• The solder must show a bright tin finish and be
evenly coated over the entire joint area.
• A dull matt or crystalline appearance to the
solder surface indicates that the components
have moved during cooling. This is not
acceptable.
• The base metal of the jointed parts must not
be visible in the region of the joint. For
instance, the wire surface must not be visible.
• The outer edges of the jointing solder must
blend in with the tinning on the components in
a smooth concave curve. It should not end
abruptly in a ragged outline or convex “blob”.
The junction between the component tinning
and the jointing solder should be hardly
noticeable.
• Excessive heat will have damaged the wire (or
other) insulation, causing it to melt, blacken, or
recede.
If any of the faults indicated above are apparent, the joint
must be re-made. If necessary, re-strip or even replace
the wire if it is damaged.
Figure U33 shows examples of good and faulty joints.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Soldering
7 Heat Sensitive Equipment

Sometimes you have to solder in a place where the heat
may damage nearby electrical or electronic components,
such as transistors. In this case apply a “heat sink”
between the iron and the sensitive component. The heat
will be conducted away before it can do any damage.
Special “clip on” heat sinks are available. A pair of small
snipe nosed pliers held in place may be a suitable
alternative.
Figure U33 Solder Joints
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Soldering
8 Soldering to Telecoms Type Tag Blocks

Sufficient of the insulation should be stripped to enable
the wire to be fixed to the tag. This is done as follows:
1 Wind the wire around the tag so that the insulated
wire is wrapped round it for one and a half turns.
(See Figure U34.)
2 Wind the bare wire round for a further two turns in
the tag grooves. Cut off any surplus wire. (See
Figure U34.)
3 Solder the last turn of wire, using the same
technique as in “Small Soldering Jobs”, above.
Avoid excessive heat, as this will damage the wire
insulation.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Figure U34 Soldering to Telecoms Type
Tag Blocks

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Soldering
9 Soldering Larger Jobs with a Gas Torch

Proceed as follows:
1 Follow your safety procedures for the use of
Liquefied Petroleum Gas (LPG).
2 Clean the surfaces to be joined.
3 Apply a non-acid flux to each surface.
4 If a surface to be joined is not already tinned, heat it
to the correct heat and apply solder to a thin film
over it.
5 Bring together all surfaces to be joined and heat
them to the correct heat.
6 Remove the flame and apply solder to the heated
metals. The solder should flow into all parts of the
joint. Do not use the lamp flame to melt the solder.
7 Make sure that the flux has “boiled” out of the joint.
If not, re-heat and apply a little more solder.
8 Allow the joint to cool without disturbance.
9 Wipe off any excess flux on the surface and check
that the joint is satisfactory.
An example of soldering a cable lug follows.
10 Soldering a Lug Onto a Copper Cable

Proceed as follows:
1 Strip the cable insulation to the length of the lug
depth plus 2mm. If the core is stranded, make sure
the strands are all undamaged and remain twisted
together.
2 Apply flux to the copper core and heat it up. Then
apply a little solder to tin the wire all round. If there
are strands, they will now be all lightly soldered
together.
3 Apply flux to the inside surface of the lug. Hold the
lug at the tip with pliers and heat it in the gas flame.
4 Melt solder into the cup of the lug until it is half full.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Soldering
5 Make sure both the wire and lug are still hot
enough, and insert the wire into the lug.
6 Allow the whole joint to cool without disturbance.
Clean off any surplus flux.
7 Check that the soldered joint looks satisfactory in
the same way as described previously. (See the
section - Small Soldering Jobs.)
Further Information
indg248 Solder Fume and you (HSE leaflet)
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Wire Wrapped Connections
1 Principle
Wire wrapped connections consist of a number of turns
of wire tightly wrapped around a metal post using a
special wrapping tool. They are used in certain types of
electronic equipment as an alternative to soldered
connections.
Wire wrapped connections can be used only for solid
(i.e. single strand) conductors. The wire to be used is
usually specially manufactured for wire wrapping work.
The conductor size is commonly measured in American
Wire Gauge (AWG).
2 Types of Connection
A standard wrapped connection consists of a helix of
uninsulated wire tightly wrapped around a wrapping post.
The number of turns required depends on the gauge of
wire used (see Figure U35). The wire is wrapped with
sufficient tension to ensure that the sharp corners of the
wrapping post bite into the wire to provide electrical
continuity and mechanical stability.
Diameter of Wire Minimum Number
(AWG) of Turns
16 3
18–22 4
24–25 5
26 6
28–30 7
Figure U35 Wire Wrapped Connections
Minimum Number of Turns Required
(Uninsulated Copper Wire)
Where connections may be subject to severe vibration,

the standard connection is modified by adding a
minimum of half a turn of insulated wire wrapped around
the wrapping post at the base of the joint. This provides
added mechanical strength to help withstand vibration.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
3 Wrapping Tools
Wrapping tools may be electric or hand-operated.
Some types of wrapping tool require the insulation of the
wire to be stripped to the correct length before the wire is
inserted into the tool. Other types automatically strip and
wrap the wire in a single operation.
Wrapping tools should be inspected before use. Check
that the working faces are not damaged.
4 Making a Wrapped Joint

The method is illustrated in Figure U36:
1 If you are using a wrapping tool that does not
automatically strip the wire, you must first strip off
the insulation from the end of the wire to be
terminated.
2 The stripped length must be sufficient to provide the
required number of turns around the wrapping post.
3 Feed the end of the wire into the feed slot of the
wrapping tool.
4 Position the wrapping tool so that the wrapping post
fits into the central hole.
5 Hook the wire into one of the notches at the end of
the stationary sleeve of the tool.
6 Press the trigger to operate the tool. The bit rotates
inside the sleeve and wraps the wire tightly round
the wrapping post.
5 Requirements of Wrapped Joints

The completed joint should be firmly held in position on
the wrapping post.
There must be no overlapping of turns, and no gaps
between turns greater than half the diameter of the wire.
See Figure U37.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Figure U36 Wire Wrapping Method
Once the joint has been made, it must not be

mechanically disturbed. Do not try to move the joint
along the post or to close up gaps between the turns.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Wrapping posts may be of different lengths, allowing for

1, 2 or 3 wrapped joints. Never attempt to wrap more
than the allowed number of joints on one post. A clear
space must be left between joints on the same post.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Figure U37 Wire Wrapped Connections

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
6 Unwrapping
To avoid damage to the wrapping post, wrapped joints
must only be removed using the proper unwrapping tool.
If the wire is to be re-terminated, the portion of wire that
has been unwrapped must not be re-used; it must be cut
off and a new section of the wire used to form the new
joint. If the wire is not long enough to allow this, a new
wire must be run.
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Insulation Displacement Connectors
1 Principle
Insulation displacement is a comparatively recent form of
connection. It is used in the telecommunications and
electronics industries, and may be found on allied
equipment used within the signalling field. Examples are
telephone, train describer, and computer systems.
Wiring that uses this type of connection is usually of
small diameter, PVC insulated, and either in single core
or multicore form, or as a ribbon cable.
Where such wires have to be fixed to strip connectors
within junction boxes, plugs, or sockets, the connectors
are designed so that the wire end can be laid into the top
of a slot and when the wires are pressed down into
position, sharp metal edges within each connection cut
into the insulation and make contact with the conductor.
The slot is usually shaped to grip the insulation also.
The method of making the connection varies according
to the connection system. The most common systems
are those for pluggable telephone and cord connectors
(PTC and PCC), and Krone connection boxes and strips.
2 PTC/PCC Plugs and Line Jacks

PTC/PCC plugs require two hand tools. One is a
stripping tool for the cable and the other is a terminating
tool for making the actual connection to the plug. For
terminations in the PTC/PCC line jack units (sockets),
alternative tools are available for the wire insertion into
the terminations. For frequent use, one tool incorporates
an insertion head and cutters which cut the conductor to
correct length after insertion in one operation. A low cost
tool for occasional use merely inserts the wire to be
trimmed later if necessary.
3 Krone Connectors
Krone connectors require their own special insertion tool
for pressing each wire down into its termination.
Connectors for 0.4mm to 0.65mm solid wires will accept
two identical wires of the same diameter.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Insulation Displacement Connectors
The following variants of Krone strips are most common:

• Type 237A (10 pair disconnection block) incoming
and outgoing wires are connected via closed spring
clip connections. The insertion of a “Krone test
lead” allows the circuit to be tested without
disconnection. Plastic plugs are available to
provide circuit disconnection if required.
• Type 237B (10 pair disconnection block) incoming
and outgoing wires are connected via a one piece
contact which provides a continuous link with the
provision of monitoring.
4 Special Connectors
Special connectors are required for ribbon cables, and
although some also require suitable tools for making the
connection, others have in-built devices for making the
insulation displacement connection.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the particular
type of connector.
5 Making the Connection

The general rules for making any of these connections
is:
• Use only the correct tool for that connector.
• Make sure the wire is correctly positioned before
pressing it home into the termination.
• If necessary, cut off surplus projecting wire. Some
insertion tools do this automatically.
• Test all connections for continuity and insulation.
• Ensure cable or wire clamps are effective.
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Meters for Signalling Use
This section U020 gives details of the tools and meters

available for general use, whilst sections U021 to U029
give instrumentation for specific types of track circuits.
In general, both analogue and digital multimeters can be
used when testing track circuits.
1 Types of Meter (General Purpose)

a) “Lineman’s” Avo (Avo Model 6 Heavy Duty)
Advantages: Robust.
Good for fluctuating measurements.
Has a cut-out that trips on overload and can be
reset.
Disadvantages: Not very sensitive
(no good for “electronic” measurements).
No longer available and costly to repair.
b) Avo Model 8 (analogue)

Advantages: More sensitive than “Lineman’s” Avo
(can be used for “electronic” measurements and
earth testing).
Disadvantages: Not so robust.
c) Fluke 23, Fluke 77, AVO M2006, or similar

approved digital meter
For general purpose installation, maintenance,
faulting and testing work.
Advantages: Robust.
Can be connected either way round.
Auto-Ranging.
Gives reasonable results with “electronic”
equipment.
Built-in continuity tester.
Disadvantages: May be too sensitive for some
uses.
Not suitable for fluctuating measurements.
May not work properly when wet.
Requires battery power which may fail.
Current protection by fuse.
The Fluke 23 is no longer available.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
d) Fluke 8060A, Philips EA116, or similar

approved digital meter
For technical support work.
Advantages: Higher input impedance than Avo
Model 8.
Can be used to measure frequency.
Disadvantages: As in group c).
e) Other Digital Meters

See list in section 5.2. Digital meters will usually
require a loading resistor of 150k ohm fitted to the
meter to ensure that a load current is drawn when
used on voltage tests.
f) D.C. Clamp Ammeter

This instrument is used for current measurement
without disconnection of the cable; it can be used
for d.c. traction current measurement. The
instrument clips around the cable and the current
measurement read directly from the meter.
Will only work with single-core cables.
g) Clip-on Ammeter
Used to measure a.c. without requiring any
connection to the circuit.
Will only work with single-core cables.
h) Special Frequency Meters

Specially made to measure voltages at specific
frequencies, e.g. for TI.21 track circuits (see section
U026).
i) Special Use Meters

Other special use meters are described in sections
U021 to U029 and U041 to U044.
2 Use of Meters
Choose a suitable meter for the measurements to be
taken.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Before using a type of meter with which you are not

familiar, always read the maker’s instructions.
If the meter does not have an internal fuse, the leads
must be equipped with HRC fuses in each lead. (This
applies to the Fluke 77 meter.) These lead fuses typically
introduce a resistance of 1.5 ohms per lead which, whilst
measuring current or resistance, can have a significant
affect on the accuracy of the readings. The actual value
can be established by taking a reading with the two
leads connected together.
Prods must be equipped with finger barriers to prevent
slippage onto live equipment. Bare metal at the ends of
prods must not exceed 2mm measured across any
surface. The use of crocodile clip connectors and the
clip-on type of prod is prohibited. Meter leads and prods
must be carefully checked for security and insulation
before use.
For a meter which is not auto-ranging, make sure the
correct range is selected before applying the meter to
any circuit. If the voltage or current is uncertain, select a
higher range than is probably required and change to a
lower range if necessary.
Remember that most meters give a virtual short circuit
across the probes when connected or switched for
current measurement. In the type of meter where the
leads are plugged into special sockets for current
measurement, this short circuit remains even when the
meter is switched to "off", so always remove the leads
from the meter sockets immediately on completion of
current measurements.
When a meter is not in use, always switch it to the
highest AC voltage range, unless a special “off” position
is provided.
It is false economy to fit unsealed dry cells in relatively
expensive instruments. Sealed, leak-proof cells should
always be used.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Ensure that meters are returned to the service/

calibration centre for re-calibration at the specified
intervals, or whenever there is any reason to suspect the
accuracy of the readings. If replacement of meter
batteries or internal fuses involves breaking a calibration
seal, recalibration may be required. If a meter is likely to
remain unused for long periods of time it is advisable to
remove the batteries before storing it.
3 Meter Shunts and their Uses

Shunt Value Usage Remarks
or Attachment
1 ohm Cell on-load test Applied for 10 second period
to intermittently loaded
primary (dry), or secondary
(alkaline / lead acid) cells.
Must not be used for batteries
of several cells in series due
to the possibility of high
current.
220 ohm Insulated rail Applied to d.c. track circuit
joint testing joints to determine whether
the fishplates of an insulated
joint are in electrical contact
with either rail.
(See SMS test 41.)
33k ohm (within Earth leakage Applied instead of the 150k
the A.C. testing ohm shunt for a.c. busbar
Busbar Earth tests where no Earth Leakage
Test Adaptor Detector is present.
unit) (See section U042.)
150k ohm Earth leakage Applied to d.c. busbars where
testing no Earth Leakage Detector is
present.
2.2M ohm HVI track circuit Used to determine rail
(within HVI testing voltage.
integrator unit) (See section U028.)
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
4 Fluke Meter Malfunction

A fault has been found on Fluke series II Models 21, 23,
70, 73, 75 & 77 manufactured since 1994 with serial
numbers in the range 60990000 and 63752000, which
can give false readings if a voltage in excess of 400V
d.c. is measured. The meter can indicate a zero or near
zero reading. If the serial number, which can be found on
the bottom of the case is preceded by "9R" they are not
affected by the fault.
Affected meters must be returned to Fluke for
modification, even if they are not normally used to
measure voltages in excess of 400V.
5 Fluke Meter Autorange Problem

This section describes a problem affecting certain
models of Fluke digital multimeters (DMM).
Circuitry design on Fluke 80 series meters up to (but not
including) series iv may allow large, short duration d.c.
voltage spikes to affect the readings given. Typical of
this is the d.c. voltage output from an Aster U track
circuit receiver. In a.c. or d.c. autorange mode (the
default setting when first switched on) a large spike can
cause confusing readings if the meter lead polarity is
reversed. For example, with the meter leads connected
with correct polarity a reading approximately 30% lower
than the true d.c. voltage can be displayed.
The problem is caused by a combination of the circuit
design used in the Fluke 87 III meter and the nature of
the voltage waveform. If the waveform contains relatively
large, short-lived voltage spikes (~100V 2µs), when the
meter auto ranges, it selects a range which does not
accommodate the voltage spike and erroneous readings
can be produced.
It is not obvious to the user that such an error is
occurring.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Some other models in the Fluke product range, such as

the Fluke 8x Series and Fluke 8x Series III meters, are
also affected by this problem and these meters shall not
be used to measure a.c. or d.c. safety-critical voltages
on signalling equipment. This covers the taking of any
voltage measurement specified in a Network Rail
signalling standard, e.g. a maintenance or testing
specification or test plan.
Note: The Fluke 87 IV meter is different to the earlier
Fluke 87 and Fluke 87 III models. It is not
affected by the problem detailed in this
document and is suitable for measuring safety-
critical voltages.
5.1 Affected Fluke Meters

The following meters must not to be used to
measure safety-critical voltages:
Fluke 83, Fluke 83 III
5.2 Unaffected Fluke Meters *

The following meters can be used to measure
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
safety-critical voltages:
Fluke 8060A
Fluke 8062A
All Fluke 20 range (Fluke 23, etc)
All Fluke 70 range (Fluke 75, 77, etc)
Fluke 87 IV
Fluke 89 IV
All Fluke 180 range (187, 189, etc)
Fluke TPWS Special
* This list indicates the more popular hand-held
DMMs available in December 2000 and is not
exhaustive.
END

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Insulation Test Equipment
1 Megger
These produce a high voltage for testing the insulation of
cables, etc. Older types have to be wound by hand; it
can be difficult to do this and read the scale at the same
time. Newer types are battery powered.
It is important that the insulation rating of the cable is not
exceeded. Particular care should be taken in the case of
telecoms cables. Ensure that the voltage produced by
the megger is correct for the test to be carried out. The
insulation testing requirements for new cables are given
in the Signal Works Testing Handbook (section on
“Testing Procedures”), and for existing cables in the
Signalling Maintenance Testing Handbook (section on
“Defined Tests”). Resistance values are given in SMS
part Z.
If the insulation resistance of an altered cable has
changed appreciably, investigate the cause.
The insulation tester must not be used with equipment
connected to the cable. It is particularly important to
make sure that all equipment containing electronic
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
components is disconnected from wires to be tested.
Insulation testers must not be connected to live circuitry.
1.1 AVO BM8 Megger Malfunction

A number of AVO BM8 meggers have been found
to operate intermittently or produce inaccurate
readings.
1 If the meter is failing intermittently on all ranges,
with the exception of the battery test range, the
meter should be sent for servicing. A request
should be made to check the standard of the
solder connections, in particular the
connections to the transistors on the AVO BM8
PCB. This component check should be
requested as standard when the meter is sent
for calibration.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
2 If the meter is failing on all ranges, including the

battery test range, the battery cells should be
checked to ensure that they are secure. Battery
compartment lids that are not secured with a
screw should be checked for the presence of
sufficient foam on the interior to hold the cells in
place. In addition the connections must be tight
enough to prevent the batteries from being
dislodged so causing a complete failure.
It is false economy to fit unsealed dry cells in
relatively expensive instruments. Sealed, leak-
proof cells should always be used. When cells
are fitted they should be checked to ensure that
they fit properly and are not loose.
3 The Zero Point Test and the Resistance
Measurement Test should be performed
immediately on all AVO BM8 insulation testers
to verify their correct operation.
4 If a replacement is required for a faulty AVO
BM8 Insulation Tester the approved alternative
is the AVO BM82 Digital Insulation Tester.
1.2 Zero Point Test

1 Switch the rotary switch to the battery test
position.
2 Press the test button.
3 Ensure that the pointer indicates in the “white”
battery test zone.
If it does, proceed with item 4.
If it does not, return the meter for servicing.
4 Connect the leads together.
5 Switch the megger to the test voltage to be
used in the tests.
6 Press the test button.
7 Ensure that the meter reads “zero” (within the
width of the pointer). If it does, carry out the
Resistance Measurement Test.
If it does not, return the meter for servicing.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
1.3 Resistance Measurement Test

1 Perform the Zero Point Test as above (if not
previously carried out).
2 Connect the megger leads to each end of a
10M ohm resistor.
3 Switch the megger test voltage on (using 1000
volts).
4 Ensure that the meter reads 10M ohm (within
the width of the pointer). If it does, record that
fact on a suitable record card.
If it does not, record that fact on a suitable
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
record card, and return the meter for servicing.
When returning a faulty meter for servicing it is
helpful if a brief description of the suspected fault is
included.
2 Rail Clip Insulation Tester

The vast majority of concrete sleepered track comprises
a resilient insulating pad between the underside of the
rail and the sleeper, with the rail secured on each side by
a clip bearing on the rail foot. Insulation is maintained by
plastic pads between the clip and the rail foot.
Vibration causes the clip to wear through the pad,
putting the rail in electrical contact with the concrete,
which degrades the ballast resistance, and, if the track
circuit is d.c. operated, may increase the levels of
residual voltage. The degradation occurs gradually and
identification of the failed insulations can be difficult.
The Rail Clip Insulation Tester, sometimes known as
“PRIT” or “K9”, consists of a unit with an extending
handle, which can be rolled along the rail head (see
Figure U38). Metal brushes mounted on each side
“sweep” the rail clips, measuring the rail to clip
insulation. Low values are indicated by an audible alarm.
Description Catalogue No.

Rail Clip Insulation Tester 40/017741

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
2.1 Operation
In d.c. traction areas, the machine must not be used
on the rail adjacent to the conductor rail unless an
isolation has been obtained. The brushes must be
fully retracted and the insulated brush guards fitted
before lifting over conductor rails.
Figure U38 Rail Clip Insulation Tester
2.2 Preparation
Set the brushes to the correct height.
The unit is equipped with “on/off” and “polarity
change” switches on the chassis and “test” and
“silence alarm” buttons on the handle.
Switch “on” and set the “polarity change” switch to
+ve.
Press the “test” button, note the continuous alarm
tone and then silence it by pressing the “silence
alarm” button.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
If no alarm is given, or if the alarm sounds only

when the “test” button is depressed, the battery
shall be replaced with type PP9 or equivalent and
the unit rechecked.
2.3 Use
Push the unit along the rail.
When an alarm is received, press the “silence
alarm” button and check by re-sweeping the
suspect fastening. Turn the “change polarity”
switch to -ve and re-sweep: If an alarm is received,
the clip is faulty; if there is no alarm, the clip on the
other rail is suspect.
The clip assembly shall then be plainly marked for
attention by the permanent way organisation.
The brush carriers can be raised/lowered to cater
for flat or Pandrol type rail clips by moving the brush
carrier handle to its vertical position to release the
locking mechanism.
Care must be taken to ensure that the rollers of the
unit do not straddle any IRJs, causing “flicking” of
adjacent track circuits.
3 Sleeper Insulation Tester

Description Acceptance No.
Bombardier Transportation (Signal) UK PA05/01391
Ltd: Sleeper Insulation Tester
This acceptance covers the Bombardier track circuit fault
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
locator. Designed primarily for use with TI 21 track

circuits, it will also work with Aster and other ac track
circuits up to 3 kHz. It is a hand-held non-contact unit
which senses the track circuit signal, allowing leakage
paths to be detected.
END

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Track Circuit Shunt Box
1 Universal Shunt Box

Various designs of track circuit shunt box have been
produced over the years, some early designs being
incapable of coping with the power dissipation
requirements when shunting higher powered track
circuits. The only design described in this document is
the current standard design, which is suitable for use on
all track circuit designs (Figure U39).

Universal Track Circuit Shunt Box 40/005450
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Figure U39 Universal Shunt Box
The shunt box has two resistance selection dials: 0 - 9

ohm and 0 - 0.9 ohm which are additive to give a
combined range of 0 - 9.9 ohm in 0.1 ohm steps. In
order to avoid overheating when left connected, the
selected resistance is only placed between the test leads
when the button is pressed.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
The unit comes complete with connecting leads fitted

with 4mm plugs, and with two rail clamps for making
attachment to the rail foot. These clamps have upper
and lower contact points and shall be attached to a
section of cleaned rail foot without over tightening. The
contact points shall be replaced if they become blunt.
2 Drop Shunt Test

Test:
1 Connect the shunt box across the rails at the relay
end of the track circuit.
2 To ensure that the clamps make a good electrical
contact with the rails, connect a voltmeter between
the rail heads. With zero ohms set on the shunt box
and the button or switch operated, ensure the rail to
rail voltage falls to zero.
3 Set the shunt box to maximum resistance.
4 Whilst keeping the button depressed, steadily
reduce the resistance value until the track relay
front contacts are fully open and remain open. The
value of drop shunt can then be read directly from
the shunt box. The following points shall be borne
in mind:
a) Track circuits do not react instantly to changes
in shunt value and time shall be allowed for the
relay to respond (2-3 seconds is adequate).
b) It is obviously impractical to start at 9.9 ohm
and reduce in 0.1 ohm steps at 3 second
intervals. Do a preliminary test by setting the 0 -
0.9 ohm selector to 0 ohm and stepping down
the 0 - 9 ohm selector to identify the
approximate value. Set the 0 - 0.9 ohm selector
to 0.9 ohm and step down to obtain the exact
value.
For example, if the relay drops at 1.0 ohm on
the preliminary test, the actual value lies
between 1.0 ohm - 1.9 ohm.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
3 Pick-up Shunt Test

Test:
1 Connect the shunt box as for the drop shunt test
and set both resistance selector switches to 0 ohm.
2 Whilst keeping the button depressed, steadily
increase the resistance value until the track relay
front contacts just close. The value of pick-up shunt
can then be read directly from the shunt box (as for
the Drop Shunt Test, similar techniques of delayed
stepping and preliminary approximation shall be
used).
4 Faulty Shunt Boxes

Some S&T depots received replacement track circuit
shunt boxes, issued by their calibration contractor, in
place of their old shunt boxes.
These new shunt boxes are not fit for purpose in that,
when turning either of the two resistance dials, the
resistance of the shunt box is open circuit, between
‘click’ positions.
This has the effect of allowing the track relay to be free
of shunt resistance during movement of the shunt box
dials, which could give an incorrect figure for the drop
away and pick up shunt value. If a track circuit were to
be re-adjusted on the strength of this incorrect value an
unsafe or unreliable setting could be made for the track
circuit.
When moving from one resistor setting to a different one,
the resistance must be maintained at all times.
The faulty shunt boxes are in a black metal case, slightly
smaller than the traditional shunt box. The dials are
annotated 0 to 11, (11 is not coloured white and is an
open circuit) The rear of the box may carry a number
CSB020.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
There is no Network Rail type approval for this design of

track circuit shunt box. If shunt boxes of this type have
been issued they must be withdrawn and the provider
advised.
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Track Circuit Fault Detector
Short circuits between the rails can be difficult to locate,

since, except for audio frequency types, the short circuit
results in an identical drop in rail voltage along the length
of the track circuit and gives no clue as to its physical
location. Without the Track Circuit Fault Detector, it
would often be necessary to sub-divide the trackwork to
locate the faulty section.
The detector is designed to be used on the trackwork of
a track circuit where the feed and relay have been
disconnected. It consists of two portable battery
powered units: a transmitter and a receiver.
Transmitter
This is housed in a box incorporating an “on/off”
switch and an LED indication. Yellow leads with
clips are provided to connect the unit across the
rails or lineside apparatus housing links. It is
battery powered and outputs an intermittent high
frequency voltage.
Receiver
This is housed in a box incorporating an “on/off”
switch and an LED indication. It is battery powered
and incorporates an internal aerial, amplifier and
loudspeaker. When the receiver detects a signal
from the transmitter it outputs an audible tone.
Before commencing to test the bonding of a track circuit,
the track circuit fault detector shall be checked as
follows:
1 The transmitter leads shall be connected together
and the transmitter switched on.
2 The receiver shall then be switched on and held
near the transmitter leads; an audible tone should
be heard emitting from the receiver (this simple test
will prove that the fault detector is working
correctly).
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Track Circuit Fault Detector
3 The feed and relay ends of the track circuit under

test shall be disconnected. With jointless track
circuits, the track circuits either side of the track
circuit under test shall also be shorted out.
4 The transmitter shall then be connected across the
rails at the feed end and switched on. The receiver
is switched on and held near the rail; an audible
tone should be heard emitting from the receiver. No
tone may indicate a bad connection to the rails. If
the rail connections are good, the fault is an open
circuit, which may be found in the conventional
manner. If an audible tone is heard, the receiver
should then be carried along the track near to the
rail and when the receiver passes the short circuit, a
distinct drop in the volume of the tone will be noted.
5 With audio frequency track circuits it may not be
necessary to disconnect the feed, as the receiver
will detect the steady tone of the feed frequency
until the short circuit is passed. If this method does
not prove successful, the transmitter should be
used in the conventional manner.
6 The rail impedance limits the useful range of the
device (as measured from the transmitter). Where
this occurs, the transmitter is simply moved to
another position within the track circuit and the test
repeated.
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Double Millivoltmeter
1 Introduction
Figure U40 shows the double millivoltmeter, which
comprises the following:
• A unit fitted with twin centre-zero millivoltmeters
controlled by a common selector switch for 5, 25 or
100mV ranges.
• Two pairs of 4m leads with sleeving bonds attached
at ½m spacing to enable a 1m test length of rail to
be measured when making balance tests.
• Four rail flange clamps, having upper and lower
contact points (do not over tighten).
• Two test prods for checking cable, lug or bolt
connections where clamps cannot be attached.
Tests rely on the ratios between the two meters
contained within the unit, therefore the instrument does
not require calibration; it shall, however, be checked in
accordance with configuration procedures.
If a double millivoltmeter is not available, the tests may
be carried out using a pair of identical digital multimeters
(e.g. Fluke 23) set to the d.c. mV range.
Figure U40 Double Millivoltmeter

--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
2 Uses of the Millivoltmeter

Since the traction return system is connected to give the
maximum number of parallel traction current return
paths, the current passed by any rail or cable should rise
and fall gradually when trains are running. By observing
the millivoltmeters in relation to train positions and the
location of substations or TP Huts, the meters should
rise and fall when trains are under power.
Consequently, faults can be monitored in traction return
networks at locations remote from the one under test.
A sharp rise or fall in traction return can be due to a train
passing over a fault in the return system or one of the
following:
• The driver operating the train controller, i.e. when
the train starts away from stationary.
• The train becoming gapped, i.e. when none of the
train’s positive pick-up shoes are in contact with a
conductor rail at any instant.
Note: Electric locomotives are especially
susceptible to this.
• The driver closing the train controller. (Usually
accompanied by a loud “pop” from the main circuit
breaker situated on the power coaches.)
Thus, by observing two or three trains, a suspected
traction return fault can be confirmed. It will be noticed
that immediately in front of a moving electric train there
is a “wave” of return current, which shall be ignored.
3 Connections
The instrument can be connected in a number of ways,
each dependent on the test being performed. See Track
Circuit Fault Finding Procedures in D.C. Electrified
Areas, which will be located in the SMTH, for details.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
4 Operation
The equipment is designed to enable most tests to be
made whilst standing clear of the track, with the leads
passing under the rails. Possession of a track circuit is
not required when using this instrument.
When connecting to rail flanges, side leads or centre
plates, it is essential to clear rust, corrosion or dirt from
the contact area.
Before making any connections, ensure the selector
switch is set to the highest range. Insert the leads into
the instrument first and then connect to the test prods or
rail clamps. This reduces the risk of interchanging the
leads, which would result in failure of the track circuit
and damage to the instrument.
Never connect the instrument across either the traction
or auxiliary coils of impedance bonds or allow the
connecting leads to come in contact with the conductor
rail, as this will result in serious damage to the
instrument.
Do not connect the instrument where a check rail is
present, as some current will be carried in the check rail,
resulting in false readings. Transfer the test to a position
where the check rail is discontinued or not present.
Note: All tests must be made when traction current is
flowing.
5 Traction Return Current Values in Running Rails

An approximation of the value of traction return current
flowing in running rails can be deduced from the
millivoltmeter readings. Since the resistance of one
metre of running rail is approximately 35 micro-ohms,
dependent on rail type, temperature, wear etc., a traction
current of 1000A will produce a volt drop of 35mV along
one metre of rail. Therefore, the value of traction current
for other values of millivolts will be as in Figure U41.
Millivoltmeter Readings Traction Current
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
5mV 143A
10mV 286A
25mV 714A
50mV 1429A
100mV 2857A
Figure U41 Traction Return Current
It must be borne in mind that this will be the current

flowing in one rail only; for a total value of current flowing
in a double rail track circuit, the summation of both rail
currents must be used.
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Direct Reading Phase Angle Meter
This section describes special instrumentation for a.c.

track circuits, such as the direct reading phase angle
meter for use in determining the relationship between the
local and control coil voltages of the track relay.
1 Mark 4 Direct Reading Phase Angle Meter

The Mk 4 direct reading phase angle meter is the latest
in a series of meters which have been developed for use
on 50Hz vane type track circuits. Only the Mk4 unit will
be described.
The instrument is illustrated in Figure U42.
Figure U42 Mk 4 Direct Reading Phase Angle Meter
The instrument can be used to display the following:

• The phase angle relationship between the local and
control coil voltages of the track relay. This is
shown as the angle (0 - 180°) with the lead or lag
indicated by red lights.
• The a.c. relay control voltage.
• The degree of electrical stagger between adjacent
track circuits at IRJs.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Note: 1) A 50 Hz filter is incorporated to eliminate

spurious traction frequencies; voltage
readings will therefore be slightly lower than
those of a technicians’ multimeter which will
read the 50Hz a.c. volts plus any harmonics
present.
2) Only the Mk 4 phase angle meter will give a
direct stagger reading.
To measure the relay phase angle and control coil
voltage, connect the "local" and "control" leads to the
appropriate windings of the relay. Ensure that the BX
and NX markings are correct in relation to the relay
terminals.
Refer to Figure U43 for terminal and relay base
markings.
Local Control
Relay BX NX BX NX
Red lead Black lead Red lead Black lead
VT1 7 or 1 8 or 2 5 6
G2/G4 Q1 Q2 R1 R2
CE391 Q1 or 7 Q2 or 8 R1 or 5 R2 or 6
AB401/AB402 Q1 Q2 R1 R2
L4 Q1 Q2 R1 R2
Figure U43 Meter Connections to Track Relays
All connections must be made at the relay terminals or

plugboard to avoid the possibility of errors in the case
wiring or where traction suppressors are fitted.
With the switch in the "phase angle" position the meter
will display the phase angle in degrees together with a
lead or lag display.
With the switch in the "volts" position, the instrument will
read the relay control voltage.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
The instrument will indicate phase angles between

0°-180° lead and lag.
The instrument measures the phase displacement
directly.
Note: To preserve the life of the internal batteries,
switch to PHASE (OFF) when readings are not
being taken.
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
TI.21 Test Meters
1 Frequency Selective Voltmeter

The Frequency Selective Voltmeter described in this
section, is a dual track circuit unit as it can also be used
on Aster U and SF15 type track circuits. All audio
frequency voltages given in the TI.21 Equipment
Specification can be obtained using this meter, with the
exception of the transmitter output voltage, which must
be measured using a digital multimeter.
The meter, as shown in Figure U44, has been designed
to measure voltages at specific TI.21 frequencies. It
enables readings of track circuit parameters to be taken
without disconnecting or interfering with any adjacent
track circuits.
Figure U44 Frequency Selective Voltmeter
1.1 Operation
When the push button on the front panel is pressed,
one of the LEDs will light. These LEDs indicate the
state of the battery:
GREEN = Good.
YELLOW = Replace batteries at next opportunity.
RED = Replace batteries before use.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
TI.21 Test Meters
When the push button is released, the meter will

operate for approximately two minutes before an
internal timer switches the unit off. A flick of the
display needle will indicate when this happens.
The frequency of operation of the particular track
circuit must be set on the 12-way switch on the front
panel (A to H). The other four positions are for
Aster track frequencies. An approximate voltage
range must also be set using the tables in the
subsequent sections as a guide.
Note: This meter is not suitable for measuring
voltages at the output terminals of the
transmitter, as these will be in excess of
10V. A standard digital voltmeter shall be
used for this purpose.
Test leads are supplied with the unit, which plug
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
into the 4mm sockets on the front panel. Other

forms of meter leads may be used which are
compatible with the 4mm sockets.
2 T1.21 Test Meter (TTM)
Figure U45 T1.21 Test Meter

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
TI.21 Test Meters
The TTM meter (Figure U45) has been designed to

measure voltages at specific TI.21 and Aster type SF
frequencies. It enables readings of track circuit
parameters to be taken without corruption from other
track circuits or interference at non-TI frequencies, e.g.
50/60Hz. It is intended for use as an aid to fault finding
with TI.21 and Aster track circuits.
The TTM can also be used to measure track circuit
current in the running rails when used in conjunction with
a Rocoil Rail Current Transducer (see section 3).
The meter is supplied with a carrying case and leads.
2.1 Operation
TTM is switched on when main switch is moved
from OFF position to AC, DC or a frequency.
Ensure that low battery indication is not displayed, if
it is displayed replace the batteries. If unit powers
down automatically after 30 minutes, it can be re-
activated by pressing the backlight button or by
operating the main switch.
Track circuit frequency selection
The frequency for operation for the track on
which measurements must be set on main
switch and an approximate voltage range must
be selected on the range switch.
Main Switch Positions
OFF 1848Hz - TI ‘G’
AC Broadband 2445Hz - TI ‘H’
1699Hz - TI ‘A’ DC
2296Hz - TI ‘B’ OFF
1996Hz - TI ‘C’ Aster 2600Hz
2593Hz - TI ‘D’ Aster 2300Hz
1548Hz - TI ‘E’ Aster 2000Hz
2146Hz - TI ‘F’ Aster 1700Hz
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
TI.21 Test Meters
AC or DC measurement
If broadband AC or DC measurements are to be
taken, the AC or DC position must be set on the
main switch.
The unit is fully isolated from rail-to-rail voltages
and protected from overload of the input.
Current measurement
The TTM can be used to measure track circuit
rail current in the running rails when a Rocoil
rail current transducer probe is connected to the
meter. This allows a profile of the rail current to
be recorded to aid fault finding, particularly for
detecting where current leakage is occurring.
Details of the RCT is given in the RCT
operating instructions.
2.2 Batteries
The batteries are located in a compartment at the
rear or the meter. Access is achieved by releasing
two screws and carefully lifting off the cover. Ensure
that the batteries are fitted correctly and are of the
leak proof type. Refit and secure the cover after
fitting new batteries. A low battery indication
appears in the display when the batteries need to
be replaced.
2.3 Signal Levels of “Healthy” and “Failed” TI

Equipment
Tables giving an indication of the typical minimum
and maximum voltages or operating currents at
different points in a track circuit can be found in the
appropriate track circuit equipment specification. It
must be emphasised that these can vary depending
on the particular site conditions and weather, e.g.
track ballast impedance.
However, with the track circuits set up to operate
with a 1.0 ohm shunt, this will ensure a minimum of
a 0.5 ohm shunt under all conditions which may
subsequently occur.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
TI.21 Test Meters
Should the measured voltages differ considerably

from the tables, a fault must be suspected.
In particular, a check for a broken bond/rail should
be made if the drop shunt rises significantly.
It is recommended that when a track circuit is
installed, a complete set of measurements are
made and recorded, then any subsequent major
deviations from these will indicate a condition which
requires investigation.
2.4 Measurement Hints

Pole Zero Rejection Ratio
This is the ratio of the track voltage measured at a
“pole” tuning unit to the track voltage measured at a
“zero” tuning unit.
Example: If track voltage at “pole” is 4.9 V and at
“zero” is 0.35V, then
Rejection ratio = 4.9 / 0.35 = 14:1
Typical values for voltages across the rails at the
transmitter tuning unit position can be found in the
respective Manual/Code of Practice/Handbook and
will indicate the state of the transmitter output.
The receiver input current is measured by
connecting the meter unit across the 1W resistor
terminals. The meter reading then represents
current, i.e. 0 to 20mV range represents 0 to 20mA.
To check correct operation of the TI receiver, it is
best to check its threshold by using a shunt box
across the rails and monitoring the input current
until the output relay drops.
The value of current at which this occurs depends
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
on the gain setting and manufacturing tolerances.

Typical values of input current for various gain
settings can be found in the TI.21 equipment
specification.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
TI.21 Test Meters
3 Rocoil Rail Current Transducer (RCT),

This is a complete current measuring system, consisting
of a coil and an integrator.
The system is designed to measure the current in rails
without the need to totally encircle the rail if using a
flexible coil. The sensor mounts over the top of the rail
and is held in place with magnets. The sensitivity is 1V
output for 10A with a maximum capability of 50A. This
was originally developed for measuring track circuit
signal currents.
The output from the integrator is a voltage reproducing
the current waveform which can be displayed on an
oscilloscope or multimeter or used in conjunction with a
spectrum analyser. A spectrum analyser has been
developed specifically for use with this sensor. The
frequency response is flat from 20Hz to above 33kHz
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Reed Track Circuit Instrumentation
1 Test Equipment
This part describes the test instruments particular to
reed track circuits.
General equipment required is:
• technician's multimeter (see section U020),
• insulation tester (see section U021),
• track circuit shunt box (see section U022),
• digital millivoltmeter in d.c. electrified areas (see
section U024).
Testing instruments suitable for reed track circuits are
listed below.
For measurements on track filters and dummy amplifiers,
a digital or high impedance multimeter must be used
since a standard ‘AVO’ presents too great a load to the
reed circuits and false readings or equipment damage
may result.
It is not possible to accurately measure rail to rail
voltages at any specific reed frequency (except when
testing insulations, cable, impedance bonds etc. when
the frequency is immaterial) because:
• The frequencies of the voltages being measured
are very close and separation is difficult.
• A certain level of 50Hz from domestic supplies etc.
will be measured.
• The electric traction systems generate as voltages
at varying frequencies.
2 Dummy Amplifier
This instrument directly replaces an Rx amplifier and
enables the reed filter output a.c. voltage to be read
directly using a digital multimeter. It is used in the
following manner:
1 Remove the Rx amplifier/filter from its plugboard;
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Reed Track Circuit Instrumentation
2 Undo the hexagonal screw on the top of the Rx

amplifier until it springs up. (It is automatically held
captive). The hexagonal screw on the
amplifier/dummy amplifier is only required to be
screwed finger tight;
3 Holding the Rx amplifier (the silver portion) firmly in
one hand and the Rx filter (the black portion) in the
other, gently push the amplifier towards the back of
the filter and gently lift. The amplifier and filter
should now separate;
4 To fit the dummy amplifier. Reverse the procedure
in step 3;
5 Replace the Rx filter/dummy amplifier in the
plugboard and secure with the retaining clip wire;
6 Connect the digital multimeter (switched to mV a.c.)
to the output terminals on the front of the dummy
amplifier;
7 Read output in mV. (On few early models with
button provided, press it and read the output in mV
a.c. Release the button and the unit again functions
as an Rx amplifier);
8 Restoration of the Rx amplifier is the exact reverse
of the above.
Note: The dummy amplifier must not be used for the
final commissioning drop shunt tests.
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
HVI Track Circuit Adaptor Integrator
An adaptor integrator is required for the measurement of

the transmitted pulses. It uses capacitors to store the
peak voltages of one polarity only and converts the
waveform into a voltage level which may be measured
by a digital volt meter (DVM) on the d.c. auto-range. To
measure the opposite polarity, the test probes must be
reversed. It is connected as shown in Figure U46.

Adaptor Integrator (French Design) 86/43906
High impedance voltmeter with shrouded 40/56003
probes
DVM
dc auto
Optional 2M2 Shunt

For Faster Meter Discharge
ITE
No Other Terminals
To Be Used
Adaptor
Integrator
Rails
Figure U46 HVI Track Circuit Adaptor Integrator
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
FS2600 Set-Up Box
1 General Description
The FS2600 set-up box (also referred to as the set-up
test box) is a dedicated portable item of test equipment
for use in the commissioning of FS2600 double rail track
circuits. The FS2600 receiver (Rx) sensitivity is
adjustable and the set-up box, in conjunction with a
digital voltmeter (DVM) and a universal track circuit
shunt box, enables the Rx to be set to the most
appropriate sensitivity for each track circuit.
The sensitivity of the Rx is configured by means of up to
four wire links connected across pairs of pins in a 15-
way D-type plug. This is called the configuration plug
and is fitted into the set-up connector on the front of the
Rx.
When used on double rail track circuits, a test is carried
out to determine the required sensitivity and the
appropriate wire links are fitted into the configuration
plug.
Note: The FS2600 set-up box is not required for a Rx
used on a single rail track circuit. All single rail track
circuit Rxs are set for the same sensitivity; therefore a
pre-wired configuration plug is provided.
2 Construction
The set-up box has a moulded case which is fitted with a
handle and a shoulder strap. An area within the case is
set aside for the storage of the interconnecting cable.
The dimensions of the set-up box are as follows:
Length - 245mm
Width - 144mm
Height - 150mm
The weight of the unit, including the interconnecting
cable, is 2.1kg.
Figure U47 shows the layout of the front panel:
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
FS2600 Set-Up Box
The following components are mounted on the front

panel:
• SET-UP Measurement Push button. This is a red
topped push button which, when pressed, connects
the ten-position potentiometer into the
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
measurement circuit,
• Ten-Position Lockable Potentiometer (used to set
the voltage shown on the DVM to the channel
specific value). The locking mechanism is released
by pulling the knob up, and locked by pushing it
down,
• Coarse, Medium and Fine Rotary Switches (used to
configure the set-up box to the required settings in
order to test for the correct link settings for a
particular sensitivity),
• LINK SET-UP Rotary Switch (used in conjunction
with the LEDs to determine which links are
required),
• Twelve LEDs. These illuminate Green or Red
during testing to indicate which links are required,
• Two 'D' Type Connectors: A 25-way and a 15-way
'D' type connector are provided. The 25-way is a
plug connector (used for connecting the set-up box
to the Rx via the interconnecting cable). The 15-
way is a socket connector (used for inserting an
unpopulated Rx configuration plug),
• Two Jack Sockets (SK1 and SK2) used to connect
the DVM to the set-up box.
3 Interconnecting Cables
An interconnecting cable is provided with the set-up box.
One end is terminated in a 25-way 'D' type socket which
connects into the 25-way plug on the set-up box front
panel. The other end terminates in two D type
connectors; a 9-way socket which connects to the
MONITOR POINT socket on the Rx, and a 15-way plug
that connects to the SET-UP socket on the Rx.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
FS2600 Set-Up Box
Figure U48 shows the details of the interconnecting

cable:
4 Functional Description
The set-up box is used in conjunction with a DVM, a
universal track circuit shunt box and the tables provided
in part F to determine the appropriate sensitivity setting
of a Rx and its correct configuration plug link settings.
The Rx sensitivity is determined by setting the DVM
reading to the appropriate channel specific value,
imposing a shunt into the circuit and recording the
resultant reading. The tables provided in part F are then
used to look up the required settings which can then be
obtained using the COARSE, MEDIUM and FINE rotary
switches.
Once these switches are set, the set-up box is
configured for the link position test.
The LINK SET-UP switch has five positions; SET-UP
and four LINK positions (A to D). The switch is set to
position LINK A and two LEDs, one red and one green,
illuminate to indicate where the link shall be fitted. If a
link is not required, the NO LINK LED illuminates. When
a link is fitted into its correct position the LEDs are
extinguished.
After the above procedure has been performed for each
switch position (A to D) the configuration plug will have a
minimum of two links and a maximum of four links if
correctly set.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Date: April 2006
Set-Up Box Front Panel

Page: 4 of 5
Issue: 02
FS2600 Set-Up Box
Figure U47
NR/GI/U029
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Set-Up Box Interconnecting Cable

Date: April 2006
Page: 5 of 5
Issue: 02
FS2600 Set-Up Box
END
Figure U48
NR/GI/U029
Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Cable Locating Tools
1 Authorisation
Cable Locating Tools are devices used to locate buried
cables (see section W003 for application). A locator may
not be able to distinguish between cables running close
together. Certain locators require the presence of a
current in the cable to enable them to detect the cable.
The degree of confidence with which buried services can
be detected depends on a number of factors such as:
• the characteristics of the device being used,
• the type and depth of the service,
• the magnitude of the current carried by the cable,
• effects of other cables and metal pipes close by,
• the training, skill, hearing and experience of the
operator.
Before use on railway infrastructure, any such tool
(including those listed below) must be authorised by the
Infrastructure Controller in writing, due to the possibility
that a signalling wrong side failure could be caused by
interference from the wrong type of transmitter.
2 Competency and Inspection

It is essential that all personnel required to operate these
tools are thoroughly trained in their use and consider the
necessary safety precautions for use near railways. It is
also important that the tools are regularly checked for
correct operation, any damage, etc. prior to use.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
3 Assessed Tools
The following equipment has been assessed in terms of
possible Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) to track
circuit cables and is understood not to offer a significant
risk. Connection of the locating equipment to any cable
carrying signalling control circuitry or electronic
transmission circuits, either directly or by current clamp,
has not been assessed for interference implications.
These methods of connection are not permitted at
present. The list below is not exhaustive nor implies any
opinion on the effectiveness of cable detection. Use of
the following equipment in its standard form has
previously been accepted by Railtrack (now Network
Rail):
CAT & Genny (Radiodetection Ltd)

CD C.A.T. Cable Avoidance Tool 10/1306/CD
CG C.A.T. Cable Avoidance Tool 10/CG1375-GB
GD Genny Signal Transmitter 10/1506/GD
GG Genny Signal Transmitter 10/GG1376-GB
400 Cable/Pipe Locator Series (Radiodetection Ltd)

Locator 10/RD400PL
Locator 10/RD400PXL
Locator 10/RD400SL8
Locator 10/RD400SL33
Transmitter 10/RD400SDTX
Transmitter 10/RD400STX33
Radiodetection transmitter model RD 400 HPTX is not

authorised for use.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Note that 22KHz signal generators conflict with Ministry

of Defence frequencies and Radiodetection Ltd are
offering a 33KHz version. Mk.1 equipment recalibrated
to 33kHz can be used subject to local Network Rail
confirmation.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
It should be noted that the connection of cable locators

to signalling equipment (and its operation) must be in
accordance with the requirements of section U033.
4 Gaining Approval for Cable Locating Tools

Approval for use (see section E012) requires the
following:
a) commercial products to be assessed to a relevant
British or European Standard and CE marked as
appropriate;
b) custom designed products to be certified to an
appropriately compiled Functional Requirements
Specification and Safety Requirements
Specification;
c) the EMI susceptibility of each electrical/electronic
signalling system in the asset register to be
assessed and any constraints on the use of the
cable locating tool necessary to ensure the safe
operation of the system to be documented;
d) formal endorsement of items a) to c) through the
product acceptance process in NR/SP/ACC/029;
e) authority of the Area Signal Engineer, who must
ensure that any documented constraints are
supplied to the user.
The above assessments may be undertaken by Network
Rail or certified by the manufacturer or an independent
assessor.
Further Information
NR/SP/ACC/029 Product Acceptance
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Use of Monitoring and Test Equipment
1 Instrumentation
The objective of this section is to define a framework to
ensure the safe and controlled use of test
instrumentation. It is particularly concerned with the
connection of measuring instruments to circuitry which
has the potential to create wrong side signalling failures
via unwanted, and not always obvious, connections
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
through the internal wiring of the instruments.
All instrumentation for use on safety-critical systems
shall be approved for the application (see section E012).
This guidance applies to all test and monitoring
instrumentation which is temporarily connected to
equipment directly responsible for the integrity of the
signalling (safety-critical equipment), such as
interlocking or trackside functions. The instrumentation
may either have direct electrical connection to some part
of the safety-critical equipment or its power supply, or be
in close proximity (no direct electrical connection but
some part of the instrumentation is sufficiently close as
to constitute a potential hazard, e.g. monitoring spare
relay contacts).
This guidance covers two particular categories of work;
short duration attended tests and temporary unattended
monitoring. This includes connection to working
systems which must not be isolated in order to perform
monitoring and testing activities.
Wherever applicable, the principles of Maintenance
Testing shall be applied during the application of the
instrumentation, e.g. disconnection of wires, plug
couplers or links.
2 Competence Requirement
With the exception of measuring equipment for general
use described in section A012, the use of other test
instrumentation, including any mains powered device,
requires training appropriate to the equipment involved
and specific competence assessment. This includes:

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
• the ability to select the correct instrumentation,

• types of instrumentation,
• understanding the risks and limitations associated
with use,
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
• the importance of instrumentation calibration,
• short duration attended tests,
• temporary unattended monitoring,
• methodology of testing including connection,
• non-intrusive measurements,
• likely effects on the circuits under test,
• instrumentation power supplies and fusing,
• assessment of existing equipment and systems.
Those assessing this competence shall themselves have
been assessed as competent in instrumentation theory /
discipline.
3 Guidelines for Short Duration Attended Tests

Short duration attended tests are defined as the use of
test instrumentation where the competent person who is
using the equipment is present throughout the period of
time when the equipment is connected to the working
system.
Each a.c. powered instrument shall be supplied via its
own dedicated isolating transformer, unless the
equivalent is provided internal to the instrument.
Instruments requiring external d.c. supply shall not
derive that supply from any d.c. safety signalling supply.
Acceptable methods are a separate dedicated battery or
rectification of an a.c. supply, the latter incorporating an
isolating transformer.
The connection of instrumentation shall not permit
safety-critical signalling circuits to function in any other
way than their intended manner.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
4 Guidelines for Temporary Unattended

Monitoring
Temporary Unattended Monitoring is defined as the
connection of test instrumentation to the working system
where the equipment may remain connected for up to six
months without a competent person being continuously
present. The Area Signal Engineer may approve
extended retention of the monitoring arrangements if
required, including permanent connection.
The requirements for short duration attended tests
(section 3) also apply to temporary unattended
monitoring. Additionally, the connection and
disconnection of the test instrumentation shall be under
the control of a competent Engineer, who shall ensure
that the requirements set out below are followed.
An overlay wiring diagram shall be prepared and
independently checked. This diagram is additional to the
existing site diagrams and must show the
instrumentation and all its connections along with the
name and contact details of the Engineer responsible for
the work. A copy shall be kept in a prominent place on
site for reference with the site diagrams.
Wiring provided for monitoring purposes shall use a
coloured insulation or sleeving, other than red, distinctive
to the installation concerned. Wires shall, as far as
possible, use existing wire routes and be securely
positioned to avoid being pulled or otherwise damaged.
All terminations shall be of a standard acceptable for
permanent installations.
Where spare conductors in lineside cables are jumpered
through for monitoring purposes the jumpers shall be the
same colour as the rest of the monitoring wiring and
have a durable label attached giving details of where the
overlay diagram is located.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Where monitoring is confined solely to spare relay

contacts or data outputs, and provided that any power
source connected to those spare contacts is completely
separate from any safety signalling supplies, direct
connection between instrument inputs and the spare
contacts is permitted.
Other than where an instrument has been specially
examined and declared suitable by a competent
Engineer, all connections to safety-critical signalling
circuitry shall incorporate a series connected device
intended to protect the signalling against an instrument
fault. The device may be either a fuse or resistor, the
value being selected to limit current to a level incapable
of malfunctioning the signalling equipment. Where all
test wiring is confined to a single apparatus case or relay
room and installed using single wires, the protective
devices may be inserted adjacent to the instrument.
Where test wiring utilises cables, the protective devices
shall be inserted between the signalling connection and
the cable. Where a number of protective devices are
assembled into one enclosure, steps shall be taken to
ensure adequate physical and electrical separation
between individual circuits so as to preclude crosstalk.
The direct measurement of current shall be avoided
wherever possible. The preferred method of current
measurement is clip-on probes or voltage measurement
across a known resistance.
The installation work shall be independently checked
before implementation, by the Engineer responsible for
the work.
On completion of the monitoring, the Engineer
responsible for the work shall ensure that the system is
returned to its original state.
Where temporary monitoring arrangements are
subsequently to be made permanent, the requirements
of section 7 of SMTH Appendix D1 shall be complied
with.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
5 Guidelines for Permanent Fixed Monitoring

Systems
Section 4 for Temporary Unattended Monitoring must be
followed, except for the use of distinctive wire insulation
colours and the provision of an overlay diagram.
Where a particular design of monitoring instrumentation
has been assessed by a competent Engineer, and
appropriate guidelines produced for its use, design
personnel may use these guidelines for design
purposes.
Permanent monitoring schemes are to be included in the
site wiring diagrams, installed and tested to the same
standard as the signalling system itself. No distinction is
required in the colour of wiring insulation.
Where such permanent systems monitor voltages via
protective devices arrangements must be made to
periodically verify the effectiveness of these devices.
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Management and Control of Temporary Straps
The issue of temporary straps for use in testing signal

circuits must be strictly managed and their use must only
be as a last resort when all other testing methods have
failed to identify or rectify the fault.
Straps must only be used by the person to whom they
have been issued.
1 Use of Temporary Straps - Attended

1 Straps must only be used for:
a) Release of controls as specified in section 4
of section B003.
b) Resetting of block systems as laid down in
section B003.
c) Testing for faults, when all other methods of
testing have been exhausted.
2 Relevant Rule Book module T1A
disconnections must be in place before straps
are used.
3 All straps must be removed immediately after
the work is completed and before leaving site.
No straps must be left unattended without a
method statement.
2 Management and Control of Temporary Straps -

Attended
1 The supervisor, at his discretion, may issue
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
straps to Maintenance Testing staff, only for
attended use.
2 The supervisor must keep a log book that
details the ID number of the straps and the
person to whom they have been issued must
sign the log when issued.
3 The person to whom the straps are issued must
keep them secure and check them at regular
intervals.
4 The supervisor must check the straps as part of
routine surveillance.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
3 Use of Temporary Straps - Unattended

Temporary straps can only be left in situ unattended
for the temporary linking out of circuit functions
such as point detection, ground frames and track
circuits occupied by engineering works.
A Method Statement is to be produced.
Note: The use of temporary straps for the
diversion of circuits in a defective cable is
not covered by this instruction as their use
is laid down in SMTH Appendix D1.
4 Management and Control of Temporary Straps -

Unattended
1 The supervisor will hold all Temporary straps for
unattended use.
2 The supervisor must keep a log book that
details the ID number of the straps and the
person to whom they have been issued must
sign the log book when issued.
3 Details must be recorded in the log book of the
location and circuit where the straps have been
installed.
4 A copy of the diagram detailing the position of
the temporary straps must be left in the
location/relay room until the straps are
removed.
5 When the temporary straps are removed and
the circuit returned to normal the straps must be
returned to the supervisor.
5 Construction of Temporary Straps

1 Straps shall only be constructed on the
instruction of an authorised manager.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
2 Temporary straps must be constructed of a

brightly coloured wire, usually yellow, that
ensures that they are easily identifiable
amongst other wires. Red wire must not be
used, since this is reserved for temporary cable
core diversion.
3 Each strap must carry a firmly attached
plasticised label that contains the following
information:
a) The unique identity number.
b) This strap is the property of … and location.
c) If this strap is found please contact
telephone number …
6 24-Way Insulation Test Strap

This test strap consists of 25 wires of minimum
cross section 0.5mm, approximately 0.6m long
grouped at one end and with crocodile clips fitted at
the other. It is used to connect conductors together
in a cable for testing purposes. The test strap is
supplied with a plastic bag, in which the unused
clips must be stored during testing.
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Miscellaneous Test Equipment
1 Telegram Error Rate Test Set

A device used by technicians who are deemed a Special
User / Instrumentation Engineer. It is used on SSI
systems to measure the telegram messages sent over
the datalink. This device is available for use under
controlled conditions which must be documented and
authorised by the Area Signal Engineer. Subject to this
authority, it may be connected directly to SSI current
loop test points, but power must be supplied using a
mains adapter which incorporates an isolating
transformer.
2 SSI TFM Input Tester

The TFM Input Tester has been developed to enable
testing of transient suppression devices fitted to inputs of
later types of SSI Point Modules and Signal Modules
only. This testing, not done by any existing TFM
Go/NoGo tester, can detect input degradation before a
signalling failure occurs. Only Point and Signal Modules
of the following types can be tested: WRSL Mk3A;
Alstom Mk3; and Alstom Mk4. Earlier versions of SSI
TFM do not contain the same input transient
suppression devices, and cannot be tested by this
device. TFMs can be tested on site using their own
power supply, or in the workshop using the Power
Adaptor Cable.
The tester is manufactured by Park Signalling Ltd and
has product acceptance certificate PA05/02361.
Part No. Description PADS No.
ST201 TFM Input Tester 086/047176
ST202 Power Adaptor Cable (for workshop use only) 086/047177
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
3 Portable Digital Oscilloscopes

Used for measurements to locate SSI data link faults
where the Technician's Terminal cannot provide
sufficient information. Essential features are digital
storage, external triggering (an external trigger pulse
should be generated using a Data Link Interrogator),
variable pre-trigger, word length greater than 2K,
sampling rate greater than or equal to 1
Megasample/second and having at least two channels.
Differential inputs, battery operation, cursor
measurement and the ability to print or plot are
desirable. The two data links must never be connected
together.
4 Portable Computer Diagnostics

Modern systems, such as HPSS points and AzLM axle
counters use plugable diagnostic computers or
handsets, to assist in fault finding, set-up and testing.
5 TCAID Test Set

This device can be used for all three types of TCAID, but
due to the differing input impedances, different meter
readings will be obtained for each. The meter is used to
determine whether the TCAID system is capable of
shunting the track circuit given the presence of a TCA
fitted train. Different test procedures need to be
undertaken for all three different types of system.
6 Light Measuring Tools

There are two models of Light Measuring Tools (LMT)
produced by Dorman for use with its range of LED
signals and indicators. As LEDs age, their light output
gradually diminishes (unlike filament lamps, which tend
to burn at the same brightness until they abruptly fail).
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Dorman signals contain regulator circuits that largely

compensate for output changes but it is necessary to
check that the regulation is still effective and the end of
life has not been reached. These tools enable that check
to be easily made. Both tools comprise a flowerpot-like
hood that fits over the front of the aspect module and a
digital readout meter (Figure U49). It may be necessary
to refer to a calibrated graph (supplied with the tool) to
read off the correct value. Full user instructions are
supplied in the carry-case with each tool.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Figure U49 Dorman Light Measuring Tool
LMT01 is used for Position Light Signals (PLS), Position

Light Junction Indicators (PLJI), Lineside Status
Indicators, and other products derived from the Dorman
SLM unit.
LMT02 is used for Dorman Searchlight LED long-range
signals.
The Light Measuring Tools have product acceptance
certificate PA05/01412.
Part No. Description PADS No.
LMT01 Light Measuring Tool 086/009922
LMT02 Light Measuring Tool 086/009923
END

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Earth Fault Test Adapters
1 A.C. Busbar Earth Test Adapter

This device (Figure U50) is used in conjunction with an
electronic measuring meter to determine that non-
earthed a.c. equipment and power supplies up to 110V,
50Hz are earth free. Earth tests are undertaken and the
earth leakage is compared against a calculated figure. If
any of the results show a voltage higher than that
permitted, then methodical disconnections shall be made
until the earth is located.
The tests are described in the SMTH.
Figure U50 A.C. Earth Test Adapter
2 FDM Earth Test Adapter

--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
The Non-Intrusive Earth Leakage Test Adapter for Reed

FDM Systems is a live tester for use on Reed FDM
systems. Risk assessments to allow full implementation
of FS2600 track circuits and Class 373, identified the
need for FDM systems to be tested at regular intervals
as they are sensitive to interference from both. The FDM
systems are exposed to these interference currents
through earth faults. See section E001.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
2.1 Visual Inspection

Prior to use the adapter shall be visually checked
for signs of possible damage. The Mod status,
defined in the Operation and Maintenance
Specification, NR/SP/SIG/10029, shall be compared
with that shown on the equipment label of the
adapter to ensure that they are the same. If damage
is suspected then the adapter shall either be tested
or sent to the manufacturer for repair. If during the
course of testing there are any measurements
which appear out of sequence or incorrect, then
again the adapter shall be tested or returned for
repair.
2.2 External Multimeter Shunts

Prior to the tests being performed any external
multimeter shunt used by signalling technicians, for
example 150k ohm, shall be removed. An external
multimeter shunt shall never be used with this
adapter as it will greatly affect the measurements.
2.3 Battery Check

Before any measurements are made the internal
battery shall be checked. To do this the auto-
ranging multimeter shall be switched to the dc volts
scale and the multimeter + ve and -ve shall be
connected to the Red and Black 4mm sockets
respectively. The Red lead shall then be connected
to the Green lead. A voltage will then be observed.
If this value is below 9 volts then the internal
batteries shall be changed. It is essential that the
voltage test is carried out before each series of
tests as this ensures that the multimeter used for
the tests is on the correct scale, the battery voltage
is adequate for the tests, and certain components
are within specification.
If the batteries need to be changed then the
procedure for replacing them is shown in
NR/SP/SIG/10029.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
2.4 Lead Connection

After the battery has been checked, testing of the
system can commence. The adapter’s Green lead
shall be connected to the test earth and the Red
lead shall be connected to the cable under test,
normally on the cable terminals. The voltage
reading (v) on the multimeter shall be allowed to
steady before being noted (It could take in excess
of 15 seconds for the adapter to charge up the
cable to earth capacitance, only when that is done
will a steady state reading be possible).
2.5 Connections to Test Terminals

The Red lead shall then be connected to the test
terminals in the order shown below. The reference
readings do not require any stabilising time and
shall be performed using exactly the same
multimeter, on the same scale and within a short
period (three minutes) of the cable test.
Terminal Reference Value
(ohm)
1 White 1M
2 Brown 3M
3 Yellow 6M
4 Green 10M
5 Blue 15M
2.6 Connection to Earth

For the purposes of measuring earth leakage in
accordance with this specification, measurements
may be made with earth connection resistances of
up to 1k ohm.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
2.7 Voltage Comparison

For each of the reference terminals the voltage
observed shall be compared against the steady
state voltage observed on the cable (v). The
reference voltage will be seen to go steadily lower
as the reference resistance value increases. When
the reference terminal voltage is lower than the
cable voltage (v), then the cable leakage resistance
is lower than that reference value.
2.8 Testing of Cores

Items 2.5 to 2.7 shall be repeated for each cable
core required to be measured.
2.9 Interruptions to Testing

If there is a break in the testing (of more than an
hour) for any reason it is essential that, prior to
recommencing testing, the condition of the batteries
is checked as detailed in section 2.3.
2.10 Precautions
It shall be the user’s responsibility to ensure the
integrity of the earth and all connections.
Connection of adapter to the test points shall be by
a direct route avoiding the creation of loops in the
leads.
Further Information
NR/SP/SIG/10029 Operation and Maintenance of Non-
Intrusive Earth Leakage Test Adapter for
Reed FDM Systems Produced to
Specification EDS 01/96 Mod State 3
NR/SP/SIG/10059 Non-Intrusive Earth Leakage Test
Adapter for Reed FDM Systems
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
AWS Strength and Polarity Meter
There are two types of Strength and Polarity (S&P)

Indicator (Figure U51) used for testing the strength of the
magnetic field (flux). Each indicator is coloured to
correspond with the type of inductor for which it is
calibrated. Yellow for a standard strength inductor and
green for an extra strength inductor.
Make sure that the right type of meter is used.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Figure U51 AWS Strength and Polarity Meter
Before using either indicator, check that the pointer is

against its end stop in the red sector and no letter (P or
E) is shown in the display window. If the position of the
needle is incorrect or a letter is displayed the indicator
may have been dropped or misused and the control
spring damaged. The indicator will not be reliable and
must be returned for inspection, repair and re-calibration.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
AWS Strength and Polarity Meter
To ensure a true indication of the strength of the

magnetic field is obtained, move the S&P Indicator over
the nominal centre of the magnet until the pointer is at its
maximum deflection. The magnetic centre should usually
coincide with the physical centre of the magnet.
However, where this is not the case, it is now a design
requirement that it is clearly marked by the manufacturer
in such a manner that the indication will not be affected
by environmental conditions.
The green S&P Indicator was developed for testing the
Mk I extra strength inductor. This inductor has been
superseded by the Mk II inductor. When testing a Mk II
inductor, the S&P Indicator should be stood on a
wooden plinth, 46mm thick to re-calibrate the indicator.
The extra strength suppressor inductor should be tested
with a Gauss meter or similar device.
Details of AWS test procedures are given in SMS part
AW01 and the Signalling Installation Handbook.
Further Information
Specifications
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
TPWS Test Equipment
See SMS part TP00, and the TPWS defined tests and
the fault finding guide in the SMTH for further details.
1 Test Equipment
A maintenance testing jig (Thales Part No.608411-02),
Mk2 yellow calibrated test aerial (Thales part No.
606940-01) and a calibrated test aerial lead with integral
100W load (Thales part No 606915-02) are required for
annual maintenance and general fault finding.
A commissioning jig (Thales Part No.608410-01) will be
required for testing of TPWS following track renewals
where the position of transmitter loops has been
disturbed. Both test jigs are compatible with standard
loops and the buffer stop miniloops.
Note that the previously available 0.75 metre test aerial
lead has been replaced with the 1.5 metre test aerial
lead and should no longer be used for testing. The lead
and aerial will require annual calibration by TCL.
For testing of TPWS transmitter loop output, due to the
frequencies at which TPWS operates, meaningful results
will not be obtained from digital multi-meters with a low
bandwidth such as those in general use by signalling
faulting teams, therefore a Fluke 187/TPWS is required.
This is the only meter suitable for TPWS testing as it is
capable of measuring a.c. voltages up to 200 mV with a
70 kHz minimum bandwidth and frequency count to 70
kHz to the required minimum accuracy, and it also has
suitable accuracy at very low voltages (i.e. the 50mV
range).
When in use, the meter shall not be held over the loop
itself but shall be held outside the loop field, preferably
with the test lead fully extended, as shown in the
diagrams below. Failure to comply with this requirement
will invalidate the test results.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
TPWS Test Equipment
2 Use of Maintenance Jig

To take measurements, the aerial shall be placed in the
Maintenance jig and positioned in the centre of the
transmitter loop, with the test lead extended to its full
length to ensure the meter is clear of the loop field as
shown. The meter shall not be held over the loop itself
but shall be held outside the loop field, preferably with
the test lead fully extended. See Figure U52.
3 Use of Commissioning Jig

The commissioning jig also has an integral loop height
gauge to enable confirmation that the transmitter loop is
within the acceptable range of 60 to 100mm Below Rail
Level (BRL). This is the green portion of the aerial
holding tube. The top surface of the transmitter loop
should be within the green portion of the gauge. This test
is achieved without the Maintenance jig being used. See
Figure U53.
On slab track, if the loops are less than 53mm below rail
level, the Maintenance jig cannot be used to locate the
commissioning jig in the centre point of the loop, and in
this case the commissioning jig should be positioned
manually. The meter shall not be held over the loop itself
but shall be held outside the loop field, preferably with
the test lead fully extended.
4 Typical Values Expected

Standard transmitter loop output voltage measurement
(except where installed over concrete slab track), using
Mark 2 yellow test aerial (see Appendix D for TCL part
numbers), test aerial lead with commissioning jig:
When required to be energised: Minimum 5.65 mV
(using 50mV AC DMM range)
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
TPWS Test Equipment
Figure U52 TPWS Maintenance Testing
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
TPWS Test Equipment
Figure U53 TPWS Commissioning Testing
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
TPWS Test Equipment
Buffer stop mini-loop, except where installed over

concrete slab track, output voltage measurement using
Mark 2 yellow test aerial, test aerial lead with
commissioning jig:
Buffer stop mini-loop, where installed over concrete slab

track, output voltage measurement using Mark 2 yellow
test aerial, test aerial lead with commissioning jig:
Standard transmitter loop output voltage measurement
using Mark 2 yellow test aerial, test aerial lead with
maintenance jig:
When required to be energised: Minimum 29 mV
(50mV AC DMM range) Maximum 53 mV
When required not to be Maximum 2 mV
energised:
(At TPWS frequency - 50mV AC DMM range)
Buffer stop mini-loop output voltage measurement using
Mark 2 yellow test aerial, test aerial lead with
maintenance jig:
When required to be energised: Minimum 59 mV
(500mV AC DMM range) Maximum 107 mV
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
When required not to be Maximum 2 mV

energised:
(At TPWS frequency - 50 mV AC DMM range)
When conducting the `not energised' test on a Train
Stop, it is important that both loops of the Train Stop are
de-energised to prevent the test aerial picking up a field
from the adjacent loop.'
An alternative means of measuring the output of the
TSM / OSM using direct voltage measurement of the
transmitter loop cable circuit (for faulting purposes only)
is described in the SMTH fault finding guide for TPWS.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
TPWS Test Equipment
The frequency of the transmitter loop feeder circuit can

be measured either from the loop output using the
Maintenance test equipment, or from the output of the
OSS / TSS modules at the terminal rail of the baseplate
or trackside enclosure. Either method is equally
effective. A frequency drift of greater than 10 Hz from the
frequency specified in SMS part Z indicates a fault within
the OSS or TSS module.
Further Information
Specifications
Handbook
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
NR/GI/W001 Page: 1 of 2
Security - General
1 Security of Equipment
When removing and replacing covers care must be
taken so as not to disturb the internal components. If the
equipment is fitted with doors or covers etc., these must
be replaced on completion of work and locked where
required.
Electronic systems with password protection must be
returned to their protected state upon completion of the
maintenance service.
Keys must be guarded carefully. Keys must not be
labelled with their purpose in order to greatly reduce the
chance of misuse if they are lost.
It is essential that all equipment and buildings are kept
secure from unauthorised access. After locking, check
that the lock is effective by gently testing the door or
padlock.
2 Padlocks
Keep the lower end of the hasp lightly oiled.
Leave the padlock hanging vertically to reduce rain
ingress to the key mechanism.
Don’t put a padlock down on the ground when removed.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Hang it on the lock staple or place it somewhere it will

not get dirty.
3 Door Locks
If door locks are stiff or badly fitting, arrange for them to
be properly altered.
Do not remove or file out striker plates as this weakens
the lock.
Lock mechanisms shall not be oiled as this attracts dirt.
They shall be lubricated with the correct type of graphite
powder if essential.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Security - General
If keyhole cover plates are provided, ensure they drop

when the key is removed. This keeps out dirt and
insects.
4 Key Types
The standard range is:
JW 442 Grand Master for YS and YW locks for
S&T personnel only.
JW 442 Sub-master YS for YW locks.
RKB 221 For S&T personnel only.
RKB 222 For Operating Dept. personnel only.
BR No.1 For Trainmen’s access.
Triangular For wooden cupboards.
For security reasons, what these keys operate is not
listed here. Ask the supervisor for advice if needed.
Many regional variations to the above list still exist.
Special keys are required for some token and key
release instruments and lifting barriers.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
5 User Worked Crossings

You must lower or close barriers or gates at user-worked
crossings and report if you see any barriers or gates that
have been left open or not lowered properly.
6 Other Gates
You must keep any other gates giving access to the
railway closed, and if possible locked, in order to prevent
trespass and vandalism.
7 Lineside Fences
If you come across a damaged fence, you must secure it
if you can do this safely, and report it to Operations
Control.
Further Information
GE/RT8000 Rule Book
END

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Portable Plant, Tools, Materials
and Road Vehicles at the Lineside
1 Introduction
All plant, tools and materials and equipment must be
securely stored and locked when not in use. This
instruction supplements Rule Book module T6, section
9. Its purpose is to prevent vandals from placing
unsecured plant or materials on the track thus putting
trains at risk.
2 Fire Prevention and Tidiness of the Line

Extensive damage may be caused by fire, so flammable
substances such as paper, wood shavings, scrap timber,
cotton waste and litter must not be left near any
equipment.
Technicians must arrange for points, signals and their
connections, cable routes and locations to be kept free
of ballast, weeds, rubbish and any other obstruction to
the proper working of the apparatus. Branches of trees
must be kept clear of overhead wires and must not be
allowed to foul or interfere with the sighting of signals.
All redundant equipment must be removed from site as
soon as possible.
3 Equipment Rooms and Lower Floors of Signal

Boxes
Relay rooms and lower floors of signal boxes must be
kept clean and tidy. They shall be kept locked whenever
possible. Surplus material shall not be stored in the
lower floors of signal boxes.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
4 Plant
Unless stored in a secure depot or building all
wheeled/portable plant and hand trolleys must be
chained to a substantial fixed object. Purpose made
security chain must be used and secured by a high
security padlock. The chains must be secured by the
padlock in such a way as to prevent the possibility of
using the momentum of the plant or trolley to assist in
breaking it free.
5 Material
Materials and equipment which have been supplied for
work and not used must not be left about the line, but
must be returned to the depot as soon as the work is
completed. Valuable material must be secured under
lock and key until required for use.
Materials and tools must not be left foul of the running
line, any walking routes or on station platforms.
All other movable objects weighing under 500kg (1100lb)
which constitute a possible derailment hazard if placed
on the track must be secured with purpose made
security chain and high security padlocks to a substantial
fixed object. If this is impractical items must be stored in
a locked container, such as a Portastor 'Vault Tool', or
building, or removed from site immediately work has
ceased.
Concrete cable route materials must be laid out as close
as practically possible to the date of installation. Where a
delay is to occur between the installation of the route and
the installation of the cable the route must be lidded up
as final as it is completed and de-lidded for cable
installation. Lids must be installed as final immediately
following cable installation.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
6 Staff Safety
When secured, items of plant, equipment or materials
must not obstruct refuges, recesses, walkways or
walking routes.
7 Redundant Material
Scrap or surplus material must be stacked in an orderly
manner and cleared away as soon as possible. Valuable
surplus material such as copper wire and cable shall be
kept under lock and key until returned to the depot.
Care must be taken to segregate different categories of
potentially hazardous waste so that it can be removed by
an appropriately registered contractor. See SMS part
A14 for categories of waste.
Skips for scrap are an important weapon in the fight to
keep the railway safe, neat and tidy but a skip is itself a
source of potentially dangerous materials. They shall be
positioned well away from any area to which the public
have right of access and preferably where they can be
left under surveillance, i.e. in well lit surroundings near
staff accommodation, signal boxes, etc. When full, they
must be removed from the lineside as an urgent matter
of safety.
8 Strategic Spares
Certain equipment, regarded as strategic by Network
Rail, must not be scrapped when recovered, but
dispatched to a central holding point, as directed by the
supervisor.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
9 Temporary Works, Plant and Materials on

Platforms
Ladders and scaffolding, including mobile scaffold
towers and other temporary works, must not be erected,
neither must plant or materials be stored nor portable
plant used, closer than 1.8m from the edge of any
operational part of a station platform without appointing a
Lookout or working under T2 protection. If in any doubt
ask the supervisor.
Always advise the senior member of station staff before
starting work.
Ladders and steps may be used, and mobile plant
operated, between 1m and 1.8m from a platform edge if
lookout protection is provided such as to ensure
adequate warning of the approach of a train on the
adjacent line. When such a warning is given, the
ladders, steps or plant must be moved to a position
where no part of it is less than 1.8m from the platform
edge and remain clear until the train has passed.
See section W005 for working at height.
Particular care must be taken when carrying out work
above platform level in overhead electrified areas. Only
ladders made of non-conducting material may be used in
the vicinity of overhead line equipment.
The area within 1m of the edge of a platform alongside a
running line must not be obstructed except under
protection in accordance with Rule Book module T2.
Where it is necessary to erect, use, or store equipment,
plant, or materials anywhere on a platform open to the
public, the supervisor should be asked to consult with
the manager responsible for the station, to ensure that
proper regard is paid to customer care and safety and
minimise the risk of vandalism.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
10 Use of Road Vehicles near the Line

Persons in charge of a road vehicle being used near the
line must:
• switch on the vehicle's hazard warning lights and
during darkness or poor visibility, use dipped
headlights,
• not allow any part of the vehicle including open
doors to come within 2 metres (2.75 metres if the
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
line speed is over 125 mph) of any line on which
trains may approach,
• securely fasten all doors,
• when turning, keep the rear of the vehicle further
from the line and use a suitable turning point.
• when parking, make sure that all red lights are
switched off.
Further Information
GE/RT8000 Rule Book
SI2005/894 Hazardous Waste (England and Wales)
Regulations 2005
SI2005/895 List of Wastes (England) Regulations
2005
SI2005/1820 List of Wastes (Wales) Regulations 2005
HWR03 A Guide to the Hazardous Waste
Regulations - Consignment Notes
END

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Excavations, Buried Services and Driving Spikes
1 Services Likely to be Encountered

The Electricity at Work Regulations 1989 require that
any work activity on or near an electrical system be
carried out in such a manner as to prevent danger -
excavation work should not be carried out unless all
suitable and sufficient steps have been taken to identify
and, as far as is reasonably practicable, prevent any risk
from any underground cable or other underground
electrical service.
Services damaged during excavation could cause
severe or fatal injury, as follows:
a) Electricity Cables
risk of electric shock, explosive effects of arcing
current and of associated fire or flames.
b) Gas Pipes
risk of fires or explosions, including latent damage.
c) Water Pipes and Sewers

risk from high pressure main water jet, flooding and
sewage contamination (see section W004 for
Leptospirosis hazard).
d) Pipelines
risk from hazard or flammable chemicals, possibly
under high pressure.
e) Telecommunications
risk from failure of emergency communication
systems.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
The practice of indicating the presence of services

installed on the railway has varied throughout the
country. Indicator systems can vary from purpose-built
brickettes, tiles, slabs, wire mesh tape (usually yellow) or
coloured plastic marker tape (with or without wire insert).
Equally, the presence of sand, granular fill or bench
marked concrete can indicate the location of a service.
Where the presence of a service is indicated, care
should still be taken during excavation as alterations
may have taken place since the system was installed.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
2 Safe System of Work
It is essential that prior to carrying out any excavation a
safe system of work should be devised, including:
a) The processes demanded by the Excavation Check
Sheet (see NR/PRC/MPI/CI0026) must be fully
completed and the check sheet accepted by a
competent person appointed by Network Rail, prior
to any ground penetration works commencing. A
copy of the signed sheet will be maintained on site
together with all relevant services records, before
being returned to Network Rail for inclusion in the
Health & Safety File.
b) Always assume that a service is present until
proved otherwise. Plans or other suitable
information about services in the area should be
obtained before excavation starts. It is important to
note the absolute necessity of consulting with the
local Network Rail Maintenance Manager to ensure
that the very latest information relating to buried
services is obtained, with a site visit wherever
possible. Account should be taken of any
indications that services exist, such as the presence
of lamp posts, pit covers, cable markings, etc., but
the absence of such indications should not be taken
as evidence that services are not present.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
c) Approved cabling avoiding tools (CATs) and pipe

locating devices (see sections U031and U033)
should be used, in conjunction with any available
plans or information when available, to determine
as accurately as possible the position of existing
services in or near the proposed work area. CAT
scanning must be used at ground surface level to
check for the presence of live services both before
and during excavation works, but CAT scanning
alone cannot be relied upon to locate or eliminate
the presence of live services. It will not detect
plastic pipes and certain locators require the
presence of a current to enable them to be able to
detect a cable.
d) Always assume that a second (or third) service may
be close by or underneath a service already
detected until proved otherwise. A locator may not
be able to distinguish between cables or pipes
running close together and may represent them as
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
a single signal.
e) When the line of any service is confirmed it should
be noted and marked, for example by using paint,
wooden pegs or waterproof chalk. Consideration
must then be given to isolating or diverting the
service before excavating. Where this is not
possible, excavation must only commence at least 1
metre remote from the confirmed position.
f) Always employ a safe digging practice (see section
3). Once the presence of a service has been
confirmed and marked it should be exposed by
using hand tools with care. Spades and shovels
should be used rather than forks or picks. The
excavation should be carefully monitored for
evidence of services during the digging work and
repeated checks made with a locating device.
g) Always protect services with timber, etc. once they
are exposed and assume they are live unless
assured otherwise.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
h) Always contact the owner before backfilling where

practicable. Where it is not practicable for this to
occur a temporary backfill material of sand should
be utilised until the appropriate material can be
substituted at a later date. Where unmarked, its
location shall be identified over the exposed length
before backfilling is completed with an underground
warning tape containing a metallic core, at least
150mm above the service.
3 Protection of Excavations
The Construction (Health, Safety and Welfare)
Regulations 1996 state that "suitable and sufficient steps
shall be taken to prevent, so far as is reasonably
practicable, any person from being buried or trapped by
a fall or dislodgement of any material". This may
generally be achieved by using the following rules:
1 Any excavation being made over 1m deep must
have shoring material available on site.
2 Excavations of a depth of 1.2m or greater must be
secured by shoring to prevent the risk of collapse.
3 Shoring of excavations must only be erected,
altered or dismantled under the direct supervision of
a competent person - that is someone trained with
the theoretical and practical knowledge of carrying
out excavations.
4 Every excavation of 2m or more must be inspected
by a competent person at the commencement of
every shift.
5 No soil must be stored closer than 1m from the
edge of the excavation.
6 No vehicle must be permitted closer than 2m from
the edge of the excavation. Mechanical diggers are
only permitted within this distance under the direct
supervision of a competent person.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
7 At the end of each shift all excavations must be

securely fenced and if possible, covered. All
excavations must be backfilled as soon as
practicable and the site restored to a suitable
walking surface.
8 If you are in any doubt as to whether all these
conditions are being met, you must consult your
supervisor.
Note: The depth of the excavation is to be taken from
the height of the highest natural ground level at
site to the deepest extent of the excavation.
4 Spike Mounting Equipment and Driving Earth

Rods
NR/PRC/MPI/CI0024 mandates a total exclusion on the
use of metal driven pins or metal spikes of any
description into the ground on railway infrastructure
without first:
a) examining all possible reasonable alternative
methods of working,
b) taking all reasonable steps to ensure that there are
no buried services in the vicinity of the spike(s), as
described in section 2,
c) obtaining written permission from the project
manager to permit the driving of metal spikes in a
particular location, subject to:
i) checking of the HAZARD Directory for any
recorded services,
ii) seeking clarification as to the whereabouts of
any recorded services from the relevant body
and marking them on site
iii) undertaking an approved CAT scan and, if
necessary, excavating trial holes by hand,
iv) undertaking a visual site survey of any buried
services associated with particular items of
infrastructure, such as signalling equipment,
and locating and marking any relevant cables,
or pipes, etc.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Further Information
GE/GN8507 Managing the Risks from Contaminated
Land
GE/RT8000 Rule Book
GI/RT7008 Pipelines, Buried Services and
Undertrack Crossings
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
NR/PRC/MPI/CI0024 Control and Use of Metal Pins and Spikes
on Network Rail Infrastructure
NR/PRC/MPI/CI0026 Process for locating Buried Services prior
to ground penetration
NR/SP/CIV/044 Undertrack Crossings
NR/SP/INF/02202 Management of Health and Safety Files
Held By Network Records Group
NR/SP/OHS/028 Provision of Information on Surface and
Buried Services to Contractors
NR/SP/OHS/011 Prevention of Damage to and Danger
from Surface and Buried Services
S.I.1996/1592 Construction (Health, Safety and Welfare)
Regulations 1996
HSG47 Avoiding danger from underground
services (HSE Books)
HSG66 Protection of workers and the general
public during the development of
contaminated land (HSE Books)
(HSE Books)
HSG185 Health and safety in excavations
(HSE Books)
indg220 A Guide To The Construction (Health,
Safety and Welfare) Regulations 1996
(HSE leaflet)
cis08 Safety in excavations
(HSE Construction Information Sheet)
cis47 Inspections and reports
(HSE Construction Information Sheet)
END

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Common Worksite Hazards for S&T Staff
These hazards may often be encountered at the

worksite, but this section is not exhaustive.
1 Handling Cable Drums

Staff handling cable drums must wear protective gloves
and keep fingers and hands clear of moving parts.
Specifically designed cable jacks must be used, rather
than improvised lifting methods. Drums must not be
dropped off vehicles, unless there is no alternative and
adequate cushioning is provided, in which case staff
must stand well clear. Damaged cable drums must be
informed to the supervisor.
When rolling drums, whether full or empty, staff must:
• comply with 'Roll this way only' markings If
provided,
• always keep a lookout,
• never pull the drum with their back to the direction
of travel,
• keep fingers clear of drum bolt heads,
• always keep the drum under control.
Drums must be chocked to prevent their accidental
movement when not in use, and examined for rot or
deterioration every three months.
When steel binding straps are cut they should be
restrained from springing upwards and eye protection
must be worn. Care must be taken when removing
battens and they must be stored safely, due to the
danger of protruding nails.
2 Occupational Dermatitis
Occupational dermatitis is an inflammation of the skin. It
is neither infectious nor contagious - but it is chronic and
will continue while there is exposure to the offending
substance and often long after. The chief symptoms are
redness of the skin, irritation and a rash. Hands, arms
and face are most often affected.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Medical advice is usually necessary to determine the

cause but most cases can be prevented by taking simple
precautions. Personal cleanliness is essential. Hands
should be washed with recommended skin cleanser or
with soap and water and then rinsed thoroughly after
each work session, particularly before eating. Harsh
methods of hand cleaning can actually induce dermatitis.
(Petrol and degreasing solvents should never be used
and scouring roughens the skin and leaves it even more
sensitive.) After work an appropriate hand cream should
be used.
3 Leptospirosis
There is a possibility that S&T personnel may contract
Leptospirosis (Weil's disease) during their normal course
of their duties through the unintended contact with rat
excrement or sewage, which may contaminate water in
cable routes or other areas. The early symptoms are
similar to influenza and the disease itself in very rare
cases can be fatal.
Before working under these conditions, cover all
exposed cuts and abrasions with a waterproof plaster
and wear protective clothing to prevent skin contact.
Never smoke and avoid rubbing your nose or mouth with
unwashed hands or gloves during work.
If during the course of your work you scratch or cut
yourself, wash thoroughly under running water as soon
as possible, dry the wound and cover with a waterproof
plaster. Later, inform your doctor or a hospital and
advise your supervisor.
After working in contact with sewage or water which may
be contaminated with sewage, wash your hands and
forearms thoroughly with soap and water. If running
water is not immediately available, use a waterless hand
cleanser, remove clothing, then proceed to a point where
thorough washing can be carried out.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
4 Contaminated Cable Insulation

Substances leaking from degraded cables and wiring do
not normally present a hazard to health provided they
are not swallowed or allowed to come into contact with
the skin. Impermeable gloves and overalls should be
worn when dealing with a leaking substance and should
be disposed of correctly at the end of each shift. The
supervisor should be asked to undertake a COSHH
assessment to control any health and safety concerns.
5 Needle Stick Injuries

Staff working around buildings, in the vicinity of toilets or
on the track must take care to avoid needle stick injuries
from discarded syringes and cuts from glass ampoules,
razor blades, etc. Staff needing to work on railway
premises in the vicinity of such items should ask the
supervisor to arrange to have the site cleared.
6 Powered Plant
Powered plant generally needs trained competent
operators wearing personal protective equipment. See
section U002 for further details.
7 Noise
Ear defenders must be worn wherever the ear defender
sign is exhibited (see section P015). If noise levels
whilst undertaking a work task make it difficult to talk
without shouting, the supervisor should be asked to
arrange a noise assessment.
8 Lead Work
All staff must be trained in the safety aspects of lead
work before they are allowed to carry out such work.
Personal protective equipment will need to be used.
Medical and biological monitoring will be carried out as
required.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
9 Cadmium
Cadmium is a bright anti-corrosion finish often found on
nuts, bolts and washers. Unless proven otherwise the
plating of metal components must be assumed to be
cadmium. Always wash your hands after handling plated
components particularly before consuming food.
Fumes and dust containing cadmium are potentially very
harmful and care is necessary to ensure that they are
not inhaled. No flame cutting or burning of plated nuts,
bolts or washers is permitted without protection. When
brazing, it must be ensured that cadmium-free brazing
alloys are used.
Further Information
GE/RT8000 Rule Book
S.I.1989/1790 Noise at Work Regulations 1989
EIS26 Noise in engineering (HSE Engineering
Information Sheet)
indg084 Leptospirosis. Are you at risk?
(HSE leaflet)
indg099 Noise at work - a guide for employees
(HSE leaflet)
indg136 COSSH: A Brief Guide to the Regulations
indg233 Preventing Dermatitis at Work. Advice for
employers and employees (HSE leaflet)
indg298 Ear Protection (HSE leaflet)
indg305 A Guide to Working Safely with Lead -
Lead and You (HSE leaflet)
indg391 Working with Cadmium are you at Risk?
Cadmium and You (HSE leaflet)
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Working Environment
1 Working on Connected Equipment

Hands or feet must not be placed between the switch
and stock rails of worked points unless a scotch/wedge
has first been placed between the rails to prevent
unexpected movements. The scotch/wedge must be
removed on completion of the work.
Take care to avoid injury from unexpected movement of
connected apparatus such as point, signal or barrier
machines, detectors, balance levers, cranks,
compensators and rodding.
Safety helmets must be worn when working beneath
mechanical frames. Care must also be taken to avoid
working in a position in which the unexpected movement
of a lever may cause injury. Positions in the line of travel
of backweights, tappets and other moving parts of a
lever frame must especially be avoided unless the lever
has first been secured.
2 Working in Confined Spaces

Before entry into a cable pit, shaft, duct, or other
confined space (particularly if the access/exit
arrangement does not allow normal walk in/out
movement, or the atmosphere might be contaminated),
the space should be assessed to ascertain if there is any
risk to staff.
If necessary, expert advice should be obtained on how to
make it safe to work in. If suitably trained staff and
equipment are not available, specialist contract staff
must be employed or specialist plant hired.
3 Working at Height
Persons working on overhead structures must:
a) ensure that work is properly planned and organised,
b) ensure that the workplace, and any protective
equipment to be used, has been inspected as safe,
taking weather conditions into account,
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Working Environment
c) take care not to drop tools or material which may

cause injury to those below, and
d) avoid any risk of encroaching upon any fragile
surface.
3.1 Working on Signal Posts or Telegraph Poles

Before climbing a signal post or telegraph pole,
check the following requirements:
• The surrounding earth must been undisturbed.
• Telegraph pole line wires must not be removed.
• There must be no decay at or near ground level,
especially if the pole is not stayed.
• A safety belt must be used (see section U002).
Before dismantling or renewing a signal post or
telegraph pole (and before removing line wires),
check the following:
a) The post or pole must be securely stayed.
b) Stay wires to be renewed must not be removed
before new (or temporary) wires have been
fixed.
c) When line wires are being removed from a
stayed pole the resulting strain must be
counteracted by a temporary stay before the
lines are cut.
d) If the work (including any temporary stays) is
likely to cause obstruction of the line, trains
must be protected as described in Rule Book
module T2.
3.2 Use of Portable Ladders

All staff required to use portable ladders should be
given a Ladder Drill Card. Ladders should be
securely tied before working, or steadied by an
additional person.
Stepladders should be used in equipment rooms.
Ladders must not be leant against equipment racks
or overhead trunking.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Working Environment
Wooden ladders are generally preferable. Only

ladders made of non-conducting material may be
used in the vicinity of overhead line equipment, in
accordance with Rule Book module AC2.
To avoid hiding defects, ladders should not be
painted, except for preservative treatment.
See section U002 for inspection requirements.
See section W002 for working on station platforms.
3.3 Using Plant in the Vicinity of Overhead Wires

Such work should be undertaken in accordance
with Rule Book module AC2 for the electrified
railway, or the HSE's "Avoidance of Danger from
Overhead Electric Lines" for electricity supply lines.
Further Information
GE/RT8000 Rule Book
S.I.1997/1713 Confined Spaces Regulations 1997
S.I.1996/1592 Construction (Health, Safety and Welfare)
Regulations 1996
L101 Safe work in confined spaces Approved
Code of Practice (HSE Books)
(HSE Books)
GS6 Avoidance of danger from overhead
electric power lines (HSE Guidance Note)
indg098 Permit-to-work systems (HSE leaflet)
indg220 A Guide To The Construction (Health,
Safety and Welfare) Regulations 1996
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(HSE leaflet)
indg258 Safe work in confined spaces
(HSE leaflet)
S.I.2005/0735 Work at Height Regulations 2005
indg401 The Work at Height Regulations 2005 - A
brief guide
GS6 Avoidance of Danger from Overhead
Electric Lines (HSE Books)
END

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Asbestos
1 General
Asbestos is a strong, durable and non-combustible
fibrous mineral, which is known to be harmful when
inhaled. Legislation covering the use and treatment of
asbestos is provided in the Control of Asbestos at Work
Regulations 2002.
In general if asbestos materials are sound and
undamaged and are not likely to be damaged no action
is necessary. If damaged asbestos is found or
suspected staff must report the fact immediately to the
supervisor who will inform the Territory Signal Engineer
and arrange for its safe disposal. Care must also be
taken to avoid damage to covered asbestos.
Asbestos materials or components shall not be
subjected to drilling, machining, brushing, scraping,
dusting, cleaning, wiping, sanding, filing, sawing/cutting
or any other activity which could release asbestos fibres
into the atmosphere.
Any new materials introduced into the railway
environment shall not contain asbestos.
2 Asbestos on the Railway

Asbestos has been used extensively throughout the
railway. Advantage was taken of its engineering
properties as a fire resistant insulating material. Typical
applications included:
• insulating material, sprayed on structural steelwork,
• lagging material for pipework, boilers, etc.,
• insulating boards for noise and heat, mixed with a
bonding agent like cement,
• in insulating materials used in electrical equipment,
• in rope form to provide fire protection packed
around pipework passing through walls,
• a fire protection overwrap for electric and signal
cables,
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Asbestos
• mixed with bitumen for coating corrugated sheets,

• asbestos cement products for rainwater goods,
tanks and roofing material, etc.
• a component of brake lining material,
• arcing fire protection materials in rolling stock.
Predicting where to find asbestos in the environment is
therefore not simple. Some locations have been
surveyed and the residual asbestos stabilised. However,
there are still locations which have not yet been
surveyed, and many inaccessible areas such as behind
false walls and ceilings which will require investigation
and risk assessment before work can be performed
safely.
3 Application to S&T Equipment

NR/WI/ELP/00110 gives asbestos related requirements
for S&T equipment incorporating asbestos materials or
components to ensure compliance with current
legislation.
Method statements are included, which are applicable to
maintenance work on the following generic equipment
types, without the need for personal protective
equipment or respiratory protective equipment, or a
further risk assessment:
a) Low voltage fused isolators (interior compartment
lining);
b) Equipment and relay rooms (shelves);
c) 650V Switchgear for signalling supplies (door seal
using fibrous rope, flash guard);
d) Standby generators (asbestos wrapping on exhaust
pipe);
e) Cable troughing (non concrete types);
f) Location cases (door seals, cable entry base-
boards);
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Asbestos
g) Points machine types M3, M3A, HA, HB, HW

(bevel gear bearing and thrust washer, friction
clutches, fibrous rope seals);
h) Signal head AEI-GRS (door seal);
i) Signal relays types QJ1, QJN1, PTT1, PTT2, TT1B,
TT3B, TT6B and TT5 (asbestos covered thermal
timing elements);
j) Pump gaskets;
k) Asbestos covered cables.
Further Information
S.I.2002/2675 Control of Asbestos at Work Regulations
2002
L27 Work with asbestos which does not
normally require a licence Control of
Asbestos at Work Regulations 2002
ACoP and guidance (HSE Books)
L127 The management of asbestos in non-
domestic premises. Regulation 4 of the
Control of Asbestos at Work Regulations
2002 ACoP and guidance (HSE Books)
HSG227 A comprehensive guide to managing
asbestos in premises (HSE Books)
indg223 A short guide to managing asbestos in
premises (HSE leaflet)
indg289 Working With Asbestos In Buildings
(HSE leaflet)
NR/WI/ELP/00110 Maintenance of Electrification, Plant,
Signalling and Telecommunications
Equipment, Incorporating Asbestos
Materials or Components
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs)
1 PCBs in S&T Equipment

PCBs are a known hazard used as the oil in old type
capacitors and transformers. It is known that they were
used in limited S&T applications, mainly in capacitors
since their use in transformers is usually found only in
higher power equipment.
See table below for component identification. Note that
transformers to BR 924A (air cooled only) or to BS 148
(conventional oil filled) do not contain PCBs.
If PCBs are known or suspected to exist in capacitors or
transformers hazard warning signs (section P015) must
be affixed on or immediately adjacent to the equipment.
If you see the PCB warning label on a piece of
equipment, do not touch it.
2 Spillage
If you find any leaking components you must inform the
supervisor as soon as possible. Do not touch the
equipment.
If there is any possibility of contact, full impervious
protective clothing should be worn, including gloves,
overshoes, goggles and respirator. Any contaminated
clothing must be disposed of as in section 4.
Decontamination from spillage must only be undertaken
by a specialist contractor.
3 Replacement
Generally PCB equipment in good repair will not be
immediately replaced. However whenever such
equipment is found, guidance should be sought. Should
a component either known to contain, or suspected of
containing, PCBs be found leaking, the component
should be considered as failed and arrangements made
for replacement.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Trade names using PCBs at one time

Aceclor, Apirolio, Aroclor, Asbestol, Askarel,
Auxol, Bakola 131, Biclor, Chiorextol, Chloroxotol,
Clophen, Clophenharz, Cloresil, Delor, Delorene,
Diaclor, Discanol, DK, Ducanol, Dychlor,
Dykanol, Elaol, Electrophenyl, Elemex, Fenclor,
Fenocloro, Gilotherm, Hivar, Hyvol, Inerteen,
Interteen, Kanechlor, Kaneclor, Kennechlor, Leromoll,
No-Flamel, Olex-sf-d, Orophene, Phenoclor, Prodelec 3010,
Pydraul, Pyralene, Pyranol, Pyrochlor, Pyroclor,
Saf-T-Kuhl, Sof-T-Kuhl, Santosol, Santotherm, Siklonyl,
Solvol, Sovol, Sovtol, Terphenychlore, Therminal,
Turbinol
Known BICC 1958-1979

manufacturers Hunts Bryce (now ASEA/BICC) 1964-1979
and dates
Capacitors Ltd. (HWAR) 1962-1975
Johnson & Philips 1970-1977
Dubilier 'DUCONOL' -1974
Claude Lyons (aluminium cans with pink or green
cement at connector end)
Equipment containing PCB-filled components
Harmer & power supply units
Simmons 'HS2T', 'CYCLOSTAT', 'FIXED CURVE'
(prior to 1973 and up to serial number 129000)
GEC - General constant voltage transformers for:
Signal Type D Remote Control, Train Describers and
(prior to 1980) Reed RR 9110, RR 9121, RR 9131, RR 9181.
Power supplies NT 1202, NT 1212, NT 1302
Gourock/ track circuit capacitors
Ladybum H 2007A and reference KP on drg CD 14312.
G4 relays catalogue numbers 88/30516 and 88/30833
Gould Voltstat sine wave output type no.15 O/C capacitor

marked: Sprague Chlorinol 5.0 - 66AC, 60Hz
200P66005KC36P4X made in USA
Rediffusion automatic voltage stabiliser model MCA220
200VA, 50Hz capacitor marked:
DF capacitor 4mF 1600TV AC 197 4.24
Transformers to BS 171 with coolant classification 'L' on the
nameplate contain synthetic coolants which may be PCBs.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
The stocking of PCB filled components should have

been phased out and equipment being serviced will
have any such components replaced with non-
hazardous items.
4 Disposal
PCBs come within the provisions of the Control of
Pollution (Supply and Use of Injurious Substances)
Regulations 1986.
Ask the supervisor to arrange for disposal. This must
only be undertaken by a specialist contractor.
Further Information
S.I.1986/902 Control of Pollution (Supply and Use of
Injurious Substances) Regulations 1986
S.I.2002/2677 Control of Substances Hazardous to
Health Regulations 2002
(amended by S.I.2003/978)
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
L5 The Control of Substances Hazardous to

Health Regulations 2002 ACoP and
guidance (HSE Books)
indg136 COSSH – A Brief Guide to the
Regulations (HSE leaflet)
indg352 Read the Label - How to find out if
chemicals are dangerous (HSE leaflet)
msa9 Do you know how to work safely with
PCBs? (HSE leaflet)
END

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
NR/GI/X011 Page: 1 of 3
Electrical Safety - Cathode Ray Tubes
This section concerns the handling of Cathode Ray

Tubes (CRTs) and the servicing and maintaining of
equipment containing CRTs such as TV monitors, Visual
Display Units (VDUs) and Oscilloscopes.
Throughout this instruction reference to CRT includes
any equipment containing CRTs.
1 Hazards
There are two main hazards associated with working
with CRTs:
• Implosion: The violent collapse of the glass due to
the vacuum within it. This can be due to flying glass
and the toxic chemicals associated with the
phosphor. A CRT shall always be handled with
care. Except for small CRTs used in train
describers never carry a CRT by its neck. Use two
hands at the diagonal comers of the screen.
• Electric shock: This can be as high as 30kV.
Shocks can be due to:
- High Voltage Power Supply; the supply to the
CRT is at high voltage when the equipment is
switched on.
- Charged Capacitors; capacitors may take a
long time to discharge after the power supply
has been switched off.
2 Electric Shock
All adjustments to CRT equipment shall be carried out in
accordance with the suppliers or makers information.
Where possible the power supply shall be switched off. It
must be remembered that high voltage may be present
for some time after the equipment is switched off. Circuit
alterations and component changing shall generally be
carried out at recognised service centres.
The use of a rubber mat to stand on can reduce the risk
of electric shock.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Rings watches, bracelets, etc. shall be removed or

taped.
When working with the power supply off, the EHT must
be discharged.
The CRT acts as a capacitor and will hold a charge. As a
result the EHT terminal of a CRT may still be charged at
several thousand volts after switch-off.
Since such high voltage charges have little energy they
are unlikely to be lethal in themselves but they could
lead to serious injuries due to involuntary muscle action.
CRTs must ALWAYS be discharged before they are
handled. They can re-establish a charge even though
they are not connected to a supply. Therefore even new
tubes must be discharged before removing them from
their packaging.
To discharge a tube which is connected to an EHT
supply the supply to the unit must be switched off. A
probe rated at 30kV shall be connected to the tube
metallic frame using a crocodile clip. The probe shall
then be inserted under the protecting shroud of the tube
EHT terminal making contact with the terminal. After
discharge the probe lead shall be removed and the EHT
connection to the tube disconnected from the tube.
A specially made strap shall now be connected between
the tube EHT terminal and the tube metallic frame to
prevent the tube recharging. This strap shall be left in
place until the EHT lead requires reconnecting.
Tubes which have been stored disconnected from their
associated circuitry shall be discharged using the 30kV
probe between anode and all other pins shorted
together.
Small CRTs such as those used in train describers
which do not have a separate anode connection may be
discharged by means of a socket which has all
connections shorted.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
3 Working in Public Areas

When working in public areas barriers, warning notices
and/or tapes may be needed around the work area to
keep others away especially on station platforms and
concourse. A proper working platform of adequate height
and working area shall be used so that CRT equipment
can be worked on safely.
Further Information
EIS36 Safety in electrical testing: Servicing and
repair of audio, TV and computer
equipment
(HSE Engineering Information Sheet)
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Electrical Safety - Lithium Batteries
The application of a charge current to a Lithium cell may

cause it to explode.
Lithium cells are often used to provide supply or stand-
by supply for low power memory systems.
This risk is covered by the Electricity at Work
Regulations, which states, in regulation 4(1):
"All systems shall at all times be of such construction as
to prevent, so far as is reasonably practicable, danger."
1 Charge Prevention
Arrangements must be made to ensure Lithium Batteries
are not charged and such a protective arrangement is
shown:
Minimum of
3mm Clearance
between battery
positive terminal
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
and any track or

other terminal.
The current limiting resistor R is recommended to cover

possible diode failure and as a result must be connected
adjacent to the positive battery terminal as shown.
Diode leakage current must be limited to below 10uA
otherwise battery life may be affected.
Current limits vary according to battery model and rating.
The manufacturer's data sheet shall be consulted.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Electrical Safety - Lithium Batteries
2 Action
All existing equipment and systems must be examined
and the necessary protective measures provided. All
new equipment and systems must incorporate the
required protective arrangements on delivery.
Further Information
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Safety in Battery Rooms
1 General Precautions
All normal electrical precautions must be taken when
installing and operating battery charging equipment.
Battery chargers connected to outside supplies should
be adequately earthed.
Before working near a battery remove all metallic wrist
watches, rings, neck chains, etc.
Suitable insulated spanners must be provided, and
maintained in good condition.
Care should be taken when handling secondary cells,
which can be heavy and awkward to carry.
Always use the protective equipment specified above.
Electrolytes, whether acid or alkaline, are corrosive and
toxic.
No smoking or naked lights should be permitted in the
battery room.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
2 Equipment
The following safety equipment should be available at all
battery rooms:
• Goggles, Grade 1 Impact, Chemical, Dust and
Molten Metal
• Gauntlet, Rubber, Type 'J', Medium Weight, 400mm
long
• Apron, Rubber
• Eye Wash Solution, in 500 ml sealed container
3 Notices and Signs

The following notices should be available at all battery
rooms:
• Electric Shock Notice
• Battery Charging Precautions Notice

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Safety in Battery Rooms
Signs are to be provided, in accordance with section

P015, as follows:
• "No Smoking, No Naked Lights"
• "Eye Protection Must be Worn"
and where appropriate:
• "Caution: Risk of Electric Shock"
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Safe Work On or Near DC Electrified Lines
1 Scope
This instruction sets out mandatory requirements which
are supported by safe methods of work for selected
routine tasks. It is to be read in conjunction with the
Working Instructions for d.c. electrified lines relevant to
the worksite:
GO/RT3091 D.C. Electrified Lines Instructions
BR 29636 Electrified Lines Working
Instructions for
Euston/Watford/Richmond, North
Woolwich
Working Instructions for the D.C.
Electrified lines in the Tyne &
Wear Area
NR/WI/ELP/27051 Working Instructions for the D.C.
Electrified lines in the Liverpool
Area
Electrified lines between Moorgate
and Drayton Park
2 Statutory Requirements
The Electricity at Work Regulations 1989 generally
prevent work being carried out on or near live equipment
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
unless it is unreasonable having regard to all relevant
factors for the equipment to be dead while work
proceeds.
Work must therefore be planned wherever possible with
the conductor rail isolated in accordance with the
procedures contained in the Working Instructions listed
above.
If these requirements are unreasonable all factors must
be assessed to determine the protection required before
any task is allowed to commence on or near live d.c.
electrified lines. A generically grouped list of tasks and
minimum standards is given in section 4.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
Protective equipment and personal protective equipment

specifically for use on or near d.c. electrified lines must
be examined by the user immediately prior to use for
obvious defects.
3 Competence
All staff whose duties take them on or near d.c.
electrified lines must be competent in the following:
• Personal Track Safety; the certificate to be
endorsed for d.c. electrified lines,
• Emergency First Aid (BR7243/7),
• using shields and insulated rubber gloves,
• knowing how to ask for an isolation in emergency.
4 Safe Methods of Work for Specified Tasks which

are Conducted within 300mm either Side, above
or below an Energised Conductor Rail
If the work brings any part of the body within 300mm of a
live rail (except for stepping over the rail), a current
isolation must be obtained, or one or more conductor rail
shields and/or insulated rubber gloves used for
protection.
When any of the jobs in this section are undertaken, the
method shown must be used, unless the live rails have
been isolated, or the supervisor has arranged a different
safe method of work.
The supervisor should be consulted before starting any
work not shown in this instruction.
4.1 Removing Rubbish (fire hazards) from

around Equipment.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
a) Check the rubbish is not conducting

material.
b) Wear insulated rubber gloves.
c) Obtain an isolation if the rubbish is
conductive.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
4.2 Cleaning Equipment (removal of dust

and oil)
a) Scraping and brushing must only be done
when it is dry and with a non-conductive
handled brush.
4.3 Oiling and Greasing

a) Only use approved oils and greases.
b) The greasing and oiling activity must
wherever possible be conducted from the
four foot side.
c) Insulating gloves must be worn when
conducting this task.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
d) Only use plastic oil cans and grease guns.

e) Don't lean over the electrified rail.
4.4 Ballast removal

a) Use only insulated shovels and forks.
Check the insulation is in good condition
before and after use.
b) The conductor rail shield must be
repositioned so as to afford the maximum
protection to staff as the work progresses.
Additional hand protection will be given by
the use of chrome leather gloves.
c) Check that no conductive materials are
present. If they are obtain an isolation.
d) Do not use crow bars or pick axes without
an isolation.
4.5 Changing Shunt Signal Lamps (including

limits of shunt, tunnel signals and
ground signals)
a) Check whether the lid when removed might
make contact with the conductor rail. If It
does you must fit two conductor rail shields.
b) Maximum protection can be achieved by
placing the conductor rail shield on to the
conductor rail from the worksite side.

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
4.6 Using Test Meters, such as double

millivolt, Avo, or fluke meter (or passing
other equipment under the conductor
rail)
a) If it is conducting material do not bring it
close to the conductor rail.
b) All leads must be rated above 750V d.c.
and fitted with insulated terminals and
plugs.
c) Where practicable all test leads should be
connected from the four foot side of the rail.
d) Exposed ends of leads must be insulated
prior to being passed under or over the
conductor rail.
e) Staff must ensure the meter leads are
connected to the correct terminals, and is
on the correct range before use.
f) Use two people, one to push under, the
other to guide through.
4.7 Inspection of Items Connected to the

Running Rail (e.g. track pins, or treadle
mounting brackets)
a) The inspection of items of equipment
connected to the running rail should where
practical be conducted from the four foot.
b) The conductor rail shield should be placed
on the conductor rail from the side to protect
the member of staff conducting the
examination from accidental contact with
the top, bottom and work side of the
conductor rail.
c) Staff must avoid straddling or bending over
the conductor rail whilst conducting this
activity.
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Issue: 02
Date: April 2006
d) Examination of other equipment may be

conducted after suitable protection has
been provided, additional protection may be
needed by the use of a traction current
isolation or by using additional conductor
rail shields or insulated rubber gloves.
4.8 Point adjustment

a) Remember there are some tasks which
require a conductor rail isolation.
b) The adjustment of points may be conducted
after suitable protection has been provided
and staff have been trained in the work task.
Further Information
GE/RT8000 Rule Book
GO/RT3091 DC Electrified Lines Instructions
BR 29636 Electrified Lines Working Instructions for
Euston/Watford/Richmond, North
Woolwich
Working Instructions for the D.C.
Electrified lines in the Tyne & Wear Area
Electrified lines in the Liverpool Area
Electrified lines between Moorgate and
Drayton Park
RT3170 Personal Track Safety Handbook
BR7243/7 Emergency First Aid for Electrical
Accidents
END
--``,,,,``,`,``,,`,````,,`,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---


NR-L3-SIG-10064 ISSUE 7 - AkA C001 For Clearance PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

NR-L3-SIG-10064 ISSUE 7 - AkA C001 For Clearance PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Ref: NRIL3ISIGI10064

Content Approved by:

Content approved by:

Approved for publication by:

Copyright Network Rail

Red requirements – no variations permitted

Amber requirements – variations permitted subject to approved risk analysis

Copyright Network Rail

B001 Work that Could Affect the Operation of Signalling 02 Apr 06

C001 Clearances for S&T Equipment 02 Apr 06

D001 Before Starting Work 02 Apr 06

D022 Circuit Diagrams - Colouring 02 Apr 06

E001 Electrical Interference 02 Apr 06

E011 New Product Guidelines 02 Apr 06

M001 Signalling Maintenance 02 Apr 06

P001 Painting of Signalling Equipment 02 Apr 06

P013 Labelling Telephones 02 Apr 06

T001 Testing -General 02 Apr 06

U001 Tools, Measuring Instruments and Calibration 02 Apr 06

U025 Direct Reading Phase Angle Meter 02 Apr 06

U034 Management and Control of Temporary Straps 02 Apr 06

W001 Security - General 02 Apr 06

X001 Electrical Safety - General 02 Apr 06

Section(s)/clause(s) Summary of changes

Reasons for change

Briefing Post Responsible for

Copyright Network Rail

This Subject Index is sorted by primary and

Copyright Network Rail

Copyright Network Rail

Copyright Network Rail

Copyright Network Rail

Copyright Network Rail

Copyright Network Rail

Copyright Network Rail

Copyright Network Rail

Excavations, Buried Services and Driving Spikes, Safe W003

Copyright Network Rail

Copyright Network Rail

Copyright Network Rail

Copyright Network Rail

Copyright Network Rail

Copyright Network Rail

Copyright Network Rail

Copyright Network Rail

Plans and Diagrams of Engineering Details, Circuit D021

Copyright Network Rail

Copyright Network Rail

Copyright Network Rail

Copyright Network Rail

Copyright Network Rail

Copyright Network Rail

Copyright Network Rail

Spillage, Polychlorinated Biphenyls W012

Copyright Network Rail

Copyright Network Rail

Copyright Network Rail

Copyright Network Rail

Copyright Network Rail

Copyright Network Rail

A glossary of general signalling terms is given in

Affected Lever, mechanical locking or lever lock that

Alterations Changes to existing installations (including